LSIS XBE-DC08A Скачать руководство пользователя страница 168

Страница: 168 / 1284

ain

Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-12

3.4.2 16 point DC24V input module (Sink/Source type)

Model

Specification

DC input module

XBE-DC16A

XBE-DC16B

Input point

16 point

Insulation method

Photo coupler insulation

Rated input voltage

DC24V

DC12/24V

Rated input current

About 4

㎃

About 4/8

㎃

Operation voltage range

DC20.4~28.8V

(ripple rate < 5%)

DC9.5~30V (ripple rate < 5%)

On Voltage/Current

DC19V or higher / 3

㎃

or higher

DC9V or higher / 3

㎃

or higher

Off Voltage/Current

DC6V or less / 1

㎃

or less

DC5V or less / 1

㎃

or less

Input resistance

About 5.6

㏀

About 2.7

㏀

Response

time

Off

→

1/3/5/10/20/70/100

㎳

(set by CPU parameter) Default: 3

㎳

→

Off

Insulation pressure

AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)

Insulation resistance

㏁

or more by Megohmmeter

Common method

16 point / COM

Proper cable size

Stranded cable 0.3~0.75

㎟

(External diameter 2.8

㎜

or less)

Current consumption

㎃

(when all point On)

Operation indicator

Input On, LED On

External connection method

8 pin terminal block con 10 pin terminal block connector

Weight

53 g

Circuit configuration

No.

Contact

Type

TB1

TB2

TB3

TB4

TB5

TB6

TB7

TB8

TB1

TB2

TB3

TB4

TB5

TB6

TB7

TB8

TB9

COM

TB10

COM

DC24V

Internal

circuit

TB1

COM

Photo coupler

Terminal block

no.

TB8

TB9

TB01

TB02

TB03

TB04

TB05

TB06

TB07

TB08

TB09

TB10

TB01

TB02

TB03

TB04

TB05

TB06

TB07

TB08

Содержание XBE-DC08A

Страница 1: ...Programmable Logic Controller Ultimate Performance XGB Unit XGT Series XEC DN32U XEC DN32UP XEC DN32UA XEC DR28U XEC DR28UP XEC DR28UA ...

Страница 2: ...Revision History Version Date Remark Page V 1 0 2014 12 1 First Edition The number of User s manual is indicated the right side of the back cover ⓒ LSIS Co Ltd 2010 All Rights Reserved ...

Страница 3: ...he meaning of the terms is as follows This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury or death if some applicable instruction is violated This symbol indicates the possibility of slight injury or damage to products if some applicable instruction is violated The marks displayed on the product and in the user s manual have the following meanings Be careful Danger may be expected Be careful E...

Страница 4: ...be turned off and stopped for system safety However in case CPU error if caused on output device itself such as relay or TR can not be detected the output may be kept on which may cause serious problems Thus you are recommended to install an addition circuit to monitor the output status Never connect the overload than rated to the output module nor allow the output circuit to have a short circuit ...

Страница 5: ... module be sure PLC power is off If not electric shock or damage on the product may be caused Be sure that each module of PLC is correctly secured If the product is installed loosely or incorrectly abnormal operation error or dropping may be caused Be sure that I O or extension connecter is correctly secured If not electric shock fire or abnormal operation may be caused If lots of vibration is exp...

Страница 6: ... of each product and the arrangement of terminals If not fire electric shock or abnormal operation may be caused Secure the screws of terminals tightly with specified torque when wiring If the screws of terminals get loose short circuit fire or abnormal operation may be caused Surely use the ground wire of Class 3 for FG terminals which is exclusively used for PLC If the terminals not grounded cor...

Страница 7: ...ed short or soldered Heat explosion or ignition may cause injuries or fire Warning Don t remove PCB from the module case nor remodel the module Fire electric shock or abnormal operation may occur Prior to installing or disassembling the module let all the external power off including PLC power If not electric shock or abnormal operation may occur Keep any wireless installations or cell phone at le...

Страница 8: ...ter Datalog PID Control Built in Communication function Built in Position Built in Analog input output 10310001374 XGB Analog User s Manual It describes how to use the specification of analog input analog output temperature input module system configuration and built in PID control for XGB main unit 10310000920 XGB Position User s Manual It describes how to use built in Position function for XGB m...

Страница 9: ...4 Battery 3 10 3 5 Performance specifications 3 12 Chapter 4 Installation and wiring 4 1 4 18 4 1 Parameter Operation data 4 1 4 2 Attachment Detachment of Modules 4 7 4 3 Wire 4 13 Chapter 5 Maintenance 5 1 5 2 5 1 Maintenance and Inspection 5 1 5 2 Daily Inspection 5 2 5 3 Periodic Inspection 5 2 Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting 6 1 6 13 6 1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 Troubleshooting 6...

Страница 10: ...ion during RUN 2 26 2 12 Read I O information 2 29 2 13 How to allocate I O No 2 30 2 14 PLC s Read Protect Function 2 36 2 15 Function to delete all of the PLC 2 37 Chapter 3 Input Output Specifications 3 1 3 25 3 1 Introduction 3 1 3 2 Main Unit Digital Input Specifications 3 8 3 3 Main Unit Digital Output Specifications 3 9 3 4 Digital Input Specifications 3 10 3 5 Digital Output Specifications...

Страница 11: ...nction 6 1 6 2 Basic Theory of PID Control 6 2 6 3 Functional Specifications of PID Control 6 9 6 4 Usage of PID Control Functions 6 10 6 5 PID Instructions 6 26 6 6 PID Auto tuning 6 29 6 7 Example Programs 6 38 6 8 Error Warning Codes 6 49 Part3 Embedded Positioning Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 1 12 1 1 Characteristics 1 1 1 2 Purpose of Positioning Control 1 3 1 3 Signal Flow of Embedded Positioning ...

Страница 12: ...Data 4 29 Chapter 5 Internal Memory and I O Signal 5 1 5 11 5 1 Internal Memory 5 1 5 2 I O Signal 5 9 Chapter 6 Function Block 6 1 6 64 6 1 Common items of function blocks 6 1 6 2 Positioning module function block 6 3 6 3 Function blocks related to reading module information 6 5 6 4 Function blocks related to parameters changing operating data 6 9 6 5 Function blocks related to Start up and Stop ...

Страница 13: ...unction 8 150 Chapter 9 Positioning Error Information Solutions 9 1 9 15 9 1 Positioning Error Information Solutions 9 1 Chapter 10 Internal Memory Address of Read Write Variable Data command 10 1 10 92 10 1 Parameter memory address 10 1 10 2 Axis 1 operation data memory address 10 5 10 3 Axis 2 operation data memory address 10 14 10 4 Axis 3 operation data memory address 10 23 10 5 Axis 4 operati...

Страница 14: ...tion of Internal Memory 1 41 1 11 Example Program 1 54 1 12 Troubleshooting 1 56 Part 5 Built in communication functions Chapter 1 Built in FEnet communication 1 1 1 122 1 1 Outline 1 1 1 2 Specifications 1 3 1 3 Specifications of installation and a trial run 1 9 1 4 Configuration of FEnet communication system 1 13 1 5 Protocols for each service 1 15 1 6 Dedicated services 1 32 1 7 P2P service 1 3...

Страница 15: ...ine of the Web Server 3 1 3 2 Specification 3 4 3 3 How to use the web server 3 7 3 4 Functions of the web server 3 14 3 5 Improvement of the web server s speed 3 70 3 6Directions for use of the web server 3 73 Part 6 Appendix Appendix 1 Flag list App1 1 11 Appendix 1 1 Special Relay F List App 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Communication Relay L List App 1 6 Appendix 2 Dimension Unit mm App2 1 5 Appendix 3 Ins...

Страница 16: ...the user page App4 1 56 Appendix 4 1 Device monitoring parameter App 4 1 Appendix 4 2 Individual exercise related to the user page App 4 7 Appendix 4 3 Integrated exercise for the user page Temperature control system App 4 45 ...

Страница 17: ... series Chapter 4 CPU Specifications Describes performances specifications and operations Chapter 5 Maintenance Describes the check items and method for long term normal operation of the PLC system Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Describes various operation errors and corrective actions Chapter 7 EMC Specifications Describes system configuration following EMC specification 2 Main Chapter 1 Program Confi...

Страница 18: ...cribes parameter and operation data to be set by software package with embedded positioning Chapter 5 Internal Memory and IO Signal Describes the internal memory used for positioning module if XGB Main unit 4 Analog Chapter 1 Embedded Analog Describes the Built in Analog Function used in XGB PLC 5 Communication Chapter 1 Built in FEnet Communication Describes the Built in FEnet Communication used ...

Страница 19: ...8UA 1 3 2 Flexibility of System Configuration 1 The small and medium sized system can be established which controls up to 352 points I O through 10 stage expansion 2 Compact size Compared to the existing XGB basic unit this product has various embedded functions to enhance functionality and has a reduced size so you can install it even in a small space Unit Type Model Size W H D Remarks Basic unit...

Страница 20: ...nsmitting receiving frame monitoring function The 2 ports switch function embedded in Ethernet makes the configuration of line topology easier 4 Embedded PID function It supports the embedded PID control function up to 16 loops It provides parameter setting using XG5000 convenient loop state monitoring through trend monitor You can get the control constant easily by the improved automatic synchron...

Страница 21: ...rogram can control the system XG5000 A program and debugging tool for the MASTER K series It executes program creation edit compile and debugging PADT Programming Added Debugging Tool XG PD Software to execute description edition of basic parameter high speed link P2P parameter and function of communication diagnosis I O image area Internal memory area of the CPU module which used to hold I O stat...

Страница 22: ...ut signal turns on Z Input impedance Source Input Current flows from the PLC input terminal to the switch after a input signal turns on Z Input impedance Sink Output Current flows from the load to the output terminal and the PLC output turn on Source Output Current flows from the output terminal to the load and the PLC output turn on ...

Страница 23: ...s with one cable if time interval provided though it can t be transferred simultaneously c Full Duplex Data is simultaneously transferred and received in two ways with two cables 2 Transmission type a Serial transmission This type transmits bit by bit via 1 cable The speed of transmission is slow but the cost of installation is low and the software is simplified 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 송신 ...

Страница 24: ...ransmits characters one by one synchronously in serial transmission At this time synchronous signal Clock etc is not transmitted Character code is transmitted with a start bit attached to the head of 1 character and it is finished with a stop bit attached to the tail E N Q 05H S T O P S T A R T P A R I T Y K S T O P P A R I T Y S T A R T O S T O P P A R I T Y S T A R T R S T O P P A R I T Y S T A ...

Страница 25: ... unit of packet separates transferred data into the defined length to add a header that presents the correspondent addresses station No etc thereto 8 Port Port is meant to be the part of the data process device which sends or receives the data from a remote control terminal in data communications but in Cnet serial communication is meant to be the RS 232C or RS 422 port 9 RS 232C RS 232C is the in...

Страница 26: ...data via one line so to execute communication with all stations where multi sever is advantageously available 12 Full Duplex Communication Two way communications of simultaneous transmission receiving is available This communication type is applied to RS 232C RS 422 Since the transmission line is separated from the receiving line simultaneous transmission receiving is available without data impact...

Страница 27: ...BCC after calculating BCC by receiving side itself using the data input to the front terminal of BCC 14 XG5000 service This is the function to remotely perform programming reading writing user s program debugging and monitoring etc without moving the physical connection of XG5000 in the network system where PLC is connected to Cnet I F module Especially it is convenient to control a remote PLC via...

Страница 28: ... Tail E N Q E O T Station No Parameter by Commend B C C Segment A C K Request Frame Response Frame E T X B C C Head Segment Tail Comm and Station No Comm and Proces sing Result Structure of general Tx Rx frame Head ASCII value indicating frame start Tail ASCII value indicating frame end BCC Block Check Character Check data for Tx Rx frame Used to inspect reliability of data with such various metho...

Страница 29: ...tworks so to be operated as one network Bridge is used not only to connect two different types of networks but also to divide one big network into two small networks in order to increase the performance 4 Client A user of the network service or a computer or program mainly the one requesting services using other computer s resource 5 CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection E...

Страница 30: ... which can send about 10Mbps and use the packet of 1 5kB Since Ethernet can allow various types of computers to be connected as one via the network it has been called a pronoun of LAN as a universal standard with various products available not limited to some specific companies 10 FTP File Transfer Protocol An application program used to transfer files between computers among application programs ...

Страница 31: ...ble within a limited area such as in an office or a building 20 MAC Medium Access Control A method used to decide which device should use the network during given time on the broadcast network 21 Node Each computer connected with the network is called Node 22 Packet A package of data which is the basic unit used to send through the network Usually the package is made of several tens or hundreds of...

Страница 32: ...r protocol for the Internet Data Tx Rx through connection Multiplexing Transmission reliable Emergent data transmission supported 29 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Transmission protocol used for communication among different kinds of computers which makes the communication available between general PC and medium host IBM PC and MAC and medium or large sized different types ...

Страница 33: ...unication because of communication without connection Multiplexing Lower reliability than TCP in transmission Tough data doesn t arrive it doesn t send data again 33 Auto NegotiationFDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface Based on optical cable provides 100Mbps Shared Media Network as Dual Ring method Token Passing is done in two way Max 200Km distance for entire network Max 2Km between Nodes Max 50...

Страница 34: ...er supply DC24V input 16 point Relay output 12 point Analog 8 Channel Expansion Unit XBE DC08A DC24V Input 8 point Input XBE DC16A B DC24V Input 16 point XBE DC32A DC24V Input 32 point XBE RY08A Relay output 8 point Output XBE RY08B Relay output 8 point isolated ouput XBE RY16A Relay output 16 point XBE TN08A Transistor output 8 point sink type XBE TN16A Transistor output 16 point sink type XBE TN...

Страница 35: ...BF TC04RT Temperature controller module RTD input 4 roof XBF TC04TT Temperature controller module TC input 4 roof XBF PN08B Network position Open type Ethercat 8Axis Communication Module XBL C21A Cnet RS 232C Modem I F XBL C41A Cnet RS 422 485 I F XBL EMTA Enet I F XBL EIMT F H RAPIEnet I F 2 UTP cable XBL EIPT EtherNet I P Module XBL CMEA CANopen MasterI F XBL CSEA CANopen Slave I F XBL PMEC Prof...

Страница 36: ... 16 point 12 point None XEC DN32UP 16 point None 16 point XEC DR28UP 16 point 12 point None XEC DN32UA 16 point None 16 point XEC DR28UA 16 point 12 point None X E C D N 32 UP Relay output R Sink type transistor output N Source type transistor output P No of I O point Standard S Standard with usb loader S High end type H Ultimate Performance type U UltimateAnalog type UA Ultimate Positioning type ...

Страница 37: ... sink type Sink type Output XBE TN16A None None 16 point sink type XBE TN32A None None 32 point sink type XBE TP08A None None 8 point source type Source type Output XBE TP16A None None 16 point source type XBE TP32A None None 32 point source type XBE DR16A 8 point 8 point None In Output X B E DC X X A Relay output RY Transistor output TN TP Digital input DC Digital input sink type transistor outpu...

Страница 38: ...100 None TC input XBF TC04S 4 K J T R None XBF TC04RT 4 PT100 JPT100 4 Transister XBF TC04TT 4 K J T R 4 Transister Positioning XBF PD02A Line Driver 2 Voltage XBF PN08B Line Driver 8 EtherCAT High Speed Counter XBF HD02A 2 Line Driver Voltage XBF HO02A 2 Open Collector Voltage X B F AD X X A Analog input AD Analog voltage output DC Analog current output DV RTD input RD Thermocouple input TC Posit...

Страница 39: ... EIMT EIMF EIMH Comm Module between PLCs electric media 100 Mbps industrial Ethernet supported EtherNet Comm Module XBL EIPT Open EtherNet I P CANopen Comm Module XBL CMEA CANopenMaster XBL CSEA CANopenSlave Pnet Comm Module XBL PMEC Profibus DPMaster XBL PSEA Profibus DPSlave DeviceNet Comm Module XBL DSEA DeviceNetSlave X B L C21A Cnet 1 channel RS 232C C21A Cnet 1 channel RS 422 485 C41A FEnet ...

Страница 40: ...module Upto2 EA Can be expandedfor 2slots just behindthebasic unit Optionmodule Cannotbe installed Configurat ion of products Basic Unit Basic type XEC DN32U XEC DR28U Positioningtype XEC DN32UP XEC DR28UP Analog type XEC DN32UA XEC DR28UA Expa nsion modul e DigitalI O module XBE DC08 16 32A XBE DC16B XBE TN08 16 32A XBE TP08 16 32A XBE DR16A XBE RY08 16A XBE RY08B Specialmodule XBF AD04A XBF AD04...

Страница 41: ...ng on the corresponding modules The high speed expansion I F modules cannot be installed behind the normal expansion modules Accordingly when using the high speed expansion modules and the existing normal expansion modules by mixture the existing ones should be installed behind the high speed ones The below table represents the example of the system configuration using the high speed expansion mod...

Страница 42: ... the further stage of the existing expansion modules 2 How to allocate slots for expansion modules In the case of the high performance XGB PLC the embedded special functions built in positioning or analog occupies No 1 slot Accordingly No 2 slot is allocated for the first expansion module In the case of the high performance XGB basic type XEC DN32U DR28U that cannot support the embedded special fu...

Страница 43: ...ll the Cnet I F module XBL C21A for RS 232C only that is the expansion module and Cnet I F module XBL C41A for 485 only so it is possible to build up various communication systems for the purposes Some examples of communication systems are represented here which can be configured by the Cnet I F embedded in the high performance XGB basic unit 1 1 1 connection with the HMI by using the basic unit s...

Страница 44: ... stations by using the basic unit s embedded RS 485port Notice For detailed specificaitons of the high performance XGB s embedded Cnet communication refer to Chap 5 Embedded Communicationof this manual For detailedspecificaitons oftheexpansionCnetcommunicationmodule refer to XGB Cnet I F of the manual ...

Страница 45: ...f computers through network so it is regarded as the representative LAN interface It is not the standard for a specific company but the common standard so you can find various products In addition it can control communication through CSMA CD and builds up the network easily furthermore can collect high capacity data 1 Ethernet system s block diagram Notice For more details on how to the above LSIS...

Страница 46: ...de STOP RUN Program s operation is executed RUN STOP Program s operation is stopped In case of STOP the remote operation is available Status display LED Displays the basic unit s operation status PWR Red light On The power is supplied RUN Green light On During RUN mode ERR Flickering red light Occurrence of errors during operation STATE Red light On flickering Red light When the SD card is install...

Страница 47: ... Output terminal block Terminal block outputting the actual output signal RUN STOP mode switch Sets the basic unit s operation mode STOP RUN Program s operation is executed RUN STOP Program s operation is stopped In case of STOP the remote operation is available Status display LED Displays the basic unit s operation status PWR Red light On The power is supplied RUN Green light On During RUN mode E...

Страница 48: ...al block AC 100 240V for power supply 24V output Terminal block with DC 24V output Battery holder Battery holder upper part of the product Analog display LED Displays the operation status of analog input output Red light On During normal operation Flickering red light Occurrence of errors Red light Off Power OFF or module errors AD terminal block Analog input terminal block DAterminal block Analog...

Страница 49: ... operation status PWR Red light On The power is supplied RUN Green light On During RUN mode ERR Flickering red light Occurrence of errors during operation STATE Red light On flickering Red light When the SD card is installed the red light is turned On when the SD card error occurs the red light is flickering RD WR Flickering red light During SD card Write SD card connector Connector with the SD me...

Страница 50: ... axes Green light On During the corresponding axial operation Green light Off Stop of the corresponding axial operation Flickering red light Occurrence of errors from the corresponding axial operation I O connector Connector for external wiring of 3 4 axis I O connector Connector for external wiring of 1 2 axis ...

Страница 51: ... 8 4 f 150 4 9m s 2 0 5G 6 Shocks Peakacceleration 147m s 2 15G Duration 11ms Pulsewavetype Half sine 3timeseachdirectionpereachaxis 7 Impulsenoise Squarewave impulsenoise AC 1 500V DC 900V LSISstandard Electrostatic discharge Voltage 4kV Contactdischarge IEC61131 2 IEC61000 4 2 Radiated electromagneticfield noise 80 1 000MHz 10 V m IEC61131 2 IEC61000 4 3 Fast transient Burst noise Classifi catio...

Страница 52: ...noise 5V 100 pp or lese 200 pp or less 24V 400 pp or less Protecting overcurrent 5V 5 5Aor more 24V 0 44Aor more Forprotection ofthe powersupply you arerecommendedtousethepowersupplywith themaximum of 4Afuse Notice 1 Allowableinstantaneous interruption time It is thetimetomaintainthenormaloutputvoltage normal operation ontheconditionthat the input voltageof AC110 220V is lowerthantherating AC85 17...

Страница 53: ... B 240 XBE TN32 16 08A 80 50 40 XBE DR16A 250 XBE TP32 16 08A 80 50 40 Expansion Special module XBF AD04A 120 XBF AD08A 105 XBF AH04A 120 XBF DV04A 110 XBF DC04A 110 XBF RD04A 100 XBF RD01A 100 XBF TC04S 100 XBF PD02A 500 XBF HO02A 270 XBF HD02A 330 XBF AD04C 105 XBF DC04C 70 XBF DV04C 70 XBF TC04RT 120 XBF TC04TT 120 Expansion Communication module XBL C21A 110 XBL C41A 110 XBL EMTA 190 XBL EIMT F...

Страница 54: ...0 XBL C21A 1 110 Consumption current 1 300 Consumption voltage 6 5W 1 3A ⅹ 5V 6 5W In case system is configured as above since 5V consumption current is total 1 300 mA and 5V output of XGB 32 points main unit is maximum 5A normal system configuration is available 2 XGB PLC configuration example 2 Type Model Unit No Internal 5V consumption current Unit Remark Main unit XEC DN32U 1 700 In case all c...

Страница 55: ...ster or short circuit It may be the cause of a fire 3 Do not disassemble the battery 3 4 2 Battery Life Abattery s life may be different depending on the conditions of blackout time service temperature etc When the voltage of a battery gets lower the basic unit sends Warning on Battery s Voltage Drop The situation also can be checked through the basic unit s error LED and XG5000 s error message Wa...

Страница 56: ...ectrostatic holding data are maintained by the Super Capacitor for about 30 minutes however it should be replaced as soon as possible The procedures to replace the battery are as below Start of battery change Open battery cover Pick up using battery from holder and disassemble the connector Insert new battery and connect to connector withproperdirection ChecktheLEDwhetherERRLEDisoff ERR LED off Ba...

Страница 57: ...tArithmetic Functions Basic function block 43 Special function block Each special module has own special function blocks Processing speed Basic instruction 60 step Program memory 384KB Max I O points 352points 348points 352points 348points 352points 348points main 10 expansions Data area Symbolic variable A 64KB Retain setting available Input variable I 2KB Output variable Q 2KB Direct variable M ...

Страница 58: ...on Cascade operation Serial Protocol Dedicated protocol Modbus protocol User defined protocol LS bus inverter protocol Embedded00 P2P 01 Channel RS 232C 1 port and RS 485 1 port Ethernet Transfer spec Cable 100Base TX Speed 100Mbps Auto MDIX 1 IEEE 802 3 Topology Line star Diagnosis Module information service condition Protocol XGT dedicated Modbus TCP IP user define frame Embedded01 P2P 02 High s...

Страница 59: ...tioning The specifications for Embeded Positioning are as below Items Specifications Remark Built in function Positioning Basic Function No of control axi 4axis Control Method Position Speed Speed Position Feed Control Control Unit Pulse mm inch degree Positioning Data Each axis can have up to 400 data Step number 1 400 Operation pattern End Keep Continuous Operation method Singular Repeat Availab...

Страница 60: ...0Ω current iput Max Resolution 1 16000 0 250 1 5V 0 3125 0 5V 0 625 0 10V 1 250 10V 1 0 4 20 1 25 0 20 Accuracy 0 2 or less When ambient temperature is 25 0 3 or less When ambient temperature is 0 55 Analog output Channels Voltage 2 channels Current 2 channels Specification Output Range Voltage 1 5V 0 5V 0 10V 10 10V Current 4 20 0 20 Output ranges are set in user program or I O parameter per each...

Страница 61: ...to operate safely Refer to 4 1 1 Fail Safe circuit 1 Because of error of output device Relay TR etc output may not be normal About output signal that may cause the heavy accident design supervisory circuit to external When load current is more than rating or over current by load short flows continuously danger of heat fire may occur so design safety circuit to external such as fuse Design for exte...

Страница 62: ...nt Process output may not work properly according to difference of delay of PLC main power and external power for process especially DC in case of PLC power On Off and of start time For example in case of turning on PLC main power after supplying external power for process DC output module may malfunction when PLC is on so configure the circuit to turn on the PLC main power first Or in case of ext...

Страница 63: ...t Emergency stop stop by limit switch Emergency stop Stop by limit Start sequence of power In case ofAC 1 Turn on power 2 Run CPU 3 Turn on start switch 4 Output device runs by program through magnetic contactor MC On Start sequence of power Incase ofACDC 1 Run CPU after power is on 2 Turn on RA2 as DC power on 3 Turn on timer after DC power is stable 4 Turn on start switch 5 Output device runs by...

Страница 64: ...gure the fail safe circuit on the outside to prevent damage of the equipment or accident due to some cause The below is the example of system configuration with the fail sage circuit System example I n p u t 1 6 p o i n t I n p u t 1 6 p o i n t O u t p u t 1 6 p o i n t O u t p u t 1 6 p o i n t Slot No 2 1 0 3 4 5 I Area Output module for fail safe IX0 0 0 0 0 15 IX0 2 0 0 2 63 Q Area IX0 3 0 0 ...

Страница 65: ...DC24V is used itis not applicable b Sum of DC5Vcircuitcurrentconsumption TheDC5Voutputcircuit powerof the powermodule is thesum of powerconsumptionusedbyeachmodule W5V I5VX 5 W c DC24V average powerconsumption powerconsumptionofsimultaneous On point TheDC24Voutputcircuit s average power of the powermoduleis thesum of powerconsumption usedbyeachmodule W24V I24V X 24 W d Averagepowerconsumptionbyout...

Страница 66: ...lculate the heats according to the entire power consumption W and review the temperature increase within the control panel Thecalculationof temperaturerise within thecontrol panel is displayed as follows T W UA C W powerconsumptionof theentire PLCsystem theabovecalculated value A surface areaof controlpanel m 2 U if equalizing thetemperatureof thecontrol panel byusingafan andothers 6 If the airins...

Страница 67: ...tion properlybefore itsfixation Themodulemaybe damagedfrom over appliedforce Ifmodule is notmountedproperly itmaycausemalfunction Donotdroporimpactthemodulecase terminal block connector Do notseparatePCBfrom case 1 Equipment ofmodule Eliminate the extensioncoveron theuppersideof module Pushthemoduleandconnectit inagreement withhook forfixation offour edges and hook forconnectionatthebottom Afterco...

Страница 68: ... Detachmentofmodule Get up the hook forfixation ofupper partandlowerpartanddisconnect it Detach themodule withtwo hands Donot applyexcessiveforce Whenseparatingmodule do notapplyexcessiveforce Ifso hookmaybe damaged Hook for module fixation Remark ...

Страница 69: ...installing at DINrail Pullthe hook as shown belowforDINrailatthebottom ofmodule andinstallitatDINrail Pushthe hook tofix themodule atDINrailafterinstallingmodule atDINrail b Incaseof installing atpanel You can installXGBcompact typemainunitonto apaneldirectlyusingscrewhole Use M4 type screwto installthe productonto apanel 2 Ø4 5 screw hole Panel HOOK for DIN rail ...

Страница 70: ... and attachment 1 Incaseheight of wiringductis less than50mm except this 40mm ormore 2 Incaseof equippingcablewithoutremovingnearmodule 20mm ormore 3 Incaseof connectortype 20mm or above 5 Moduleequipmentdirection a For easyventilation install as shown below b Don tinstallas shown below Panel PLC 20 or above 3 30 or above 1 30 or above 1 5 or above 5 or above 1 ...

Страница 71: ...ancewith other device To avoidradiationnoiseorheat keepthe distancebetweenPLC anddevice connectorandrelay asfaras thefollowingfigure Device installedinfrontof PLC 100 ormore Device installedbeside PLC 50 ormore 100mm or above 50mm or above 50mm or above ...

Страница 72: ... In case of wiring IO module if device or material that induce high heat is too close or oil contacts wire too long time it may causeshort malfunction or error d Polarity Beforesupplying power ofmodule whichhas terminalblock check thepolarity e Wiring Incase of wiringIO withhighvoltageline orpowerline induced obstaclemaycause error Letnocable pass the IOoperation indication part LED You can tdiscr...

Страница 73: ... andterminalarrayand do properly If ratingis different itmaycausefire malfunction Forexternalconnectingconnector usedesignateddeviceand solder Ifconnectingis notsafe itmaycauseshort fire malfunction Forscrewing use designatedtorquerange If itis notfit itmaycauseshort fire malfunction Letnoforeignmaterialentersuchas garbage ordisconnection part intomodule Itmaycausefire malfunction error 4 3 1 Powe...

Страница 74: ...V externallyas presentedbelow DC 24V Output DC 24V SMPS 5 AC110V AC220V DC24Vcables shouldbecompactlytwisted andconnected intheshortestdistance 6 AC110V AC220Vcableshould beas thick as possible 2mm 2 toreduce voltagedrop 7 AC110V DC24V cables should not be installed close to main circuit cable high voltage high current and I O signal cable They should be100mm awayfrom suchcables Main unit AC220V M...

Страница 75: ...shieldingtransformeror noisefiltershouldnot be arrangedvia aduct 10 To preventsurgefrom lightning usethe lightningsurge absorber as presented below Remark 1 Isolatethegrounding E1 of lightningsurge absorberfrom thegrounding E2 of thePLC 2 Select alightningsurge absorbertype so thatthemax voltagemaynot thespecifiedallowable voltage of the absorber E2 PLC I O device E1 Surge absorber to prevent ligh...

Страница 76: ...Please isolate inputsignal linefrom outputsignal line 3 I Osignallines shouldbe wired 100mm andmoreawayfrom high voltage highcurrentmain circuitcable 4 Batch shield cable should be used and the PLC side should be grounded unless the maincircuit cable and power cable can not be isolated 5 When applying pipe wiring makesure tofirmlygroundthepiping Input Output PLC Shield cable RA DC ...

Страница 77: ...System Chapter 4 Installation and wiring 4 17 6 Exampleof inputmodule 7 Example of outputmodule External Load External Load ...

Страница 78: ...ing good C commongrounding defective 4 Use the groundingcablemorethan2mm 2 Toshorten the length ofthegroundingcable placethegrounding pointascloseto the PLCas possible 5 If anymalfunctionfrom grounding is detected separatetheFG of the basefrom the grounding 4 3 4 Specifications of wiring cable Thespecifications ofcableusedfor wiring areas follows Typesof external connection Cable specification mm ...

Страница 79: ...s CheckItems Judgment CorrectiveActions Changerateofinputvoltage Withinchangerateofinput voltage Holditwiththeallowablerange Powersupplyforinput output Input Outputspecificationofeach module Holditwiththeallowablerangeofeachmodule Ambient environment Temperature 0 55 Adjusttheoperatingtemperatureandhumiditywiththedefined range Humidity 5 95 RH Vibration Novibration Usevibrationresistingrubberorthe...

Страница 80: ...ED CheckthattheLEDturnsOnandOff OnwheninputisOn Offwheninputisoff OutputLED CheckthattheLEDturnsOnandOff OnwhenoutputisOn Offwhenoutputisoff 5 3 Periodic Inspection Check the following items once or twice every six months and perform corrective actions as needed CheckItems CheckingMethods Judgment CorrectiveActions Ambient environment Ambient temperature Measurewiththermometerand hygrometer measur...

Страница 81: ... LED After checking them connect peripheral devices and check the operation status of the PLC and the program contents 2 Trouble Check Observe any change in the error conditions during the following Switch to the STOP position and then turn the power on and off 3 Narrow down the possible causes of the trouble where the fault lies i e Inside or outside of the PLC I O module or another module PLC pr...

Страница 82: ...Power LED is turned Off Is the power supply operating Isthevoltagewithintherated power Write down the troubleshooting Questionnaire and contact the nearest service center Supply the power Does the power LED turns On Supply the power properly Does the power LED turns On 1 Eliminate the excess current 2 Switch the input power Off then On Does the power LED turns On No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes...

Страница 83: ...flickering during operation Warning Though warning error appears PLC system doesn t stop but corrective action is needed promptly If not it may cause the system failure STOP LED goes flickering No No Yes Check the error code with connected XG5000 Write downtheTroubleshooting Questionnaires and contact the nearest servicecenter See Appendix 1 Flag list and remove the cause of the error Complete Yes...

Страница 84: ...owing flowchart explains corrective action procedure to treat the lights out of RUN LED when the power is supplied operation starts or is in the process RUN STOP LED is Off No Yes Write downtheTroubleshooting Questionnaires and contact the nearest servicecenter Complete Turn the power unit Off and On Is RUN STOP LED Off ...

Страница 85: ...heck the status of SOL1 byXG5000 Is the output LED of SOL1 On No Replace the connector of the terminal block Measure the voltage of terminalinSOL1byTester Correct wiring Yes Is the measured value normal Is the output wiring correct Is the terminal connector appropriate Is it normal condition Separate the external wiring than check the condition of output module Is it normal condition Check the sta...

Страница 86: ...ured value normal Check the status of the switch 1 and 2 Input unit replacement is Needed Checkvoltageofswitch1 2by tester Is the measured value normal Is the terminal screw tighten securely Is input wiring correct Correct wiring Retighten the terminal screw Replace the Terminal board connector Input unit replacement is Needed Check from the beginning Isthecondition oftheterminalboardconnector app...

Страница 87: ...XG5000 for program compile version No 4 General description of the device or system used as the control object 5 The kind of the base unit Operation by the mode setting switch Operation by the XG5000 or communications External memory module operation 6 Is the ERR LED of the CPU module turned On Yes No 7 XG5000 error message 8 History of corrective actions for the error message in the article 7 9 O...

Страница 88: ...mended value C 0 1 0 47 R 47 120 Ω 1 2W Or make up another independent display circuit Input signal doesn t turn off Neon lamp may be still on Leakage current of external device Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp Input signal doesn t turn off Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable Locate the power supply on the external device side as shown below Input signal doesn t turn off Lea...

Страница 89: ...ed W hen the polarity is as shown in the voltage charged in C plus the line voltage are applied across D Max voltage is approx 2 2 If a resistor is used in this way it does not pose a problem to the output element But it may make the performance of the diode D which is built in the load drop to cause problems Connect registers of tens to hundreds KΩ across the load in parallel The load doesn t tur...

Страница 90: ...onnect a sneak current prevention diode If the load is the relay etc connect a counter electromotive voltage absorbing code as shown by the dot line Output circuit troubles and corrective actions continued Condition Cause Corrective actions The load off response time is long Over current at off state The large solenoid current fluidic load L R is large such as is directly driven with the transisto...

Страница 91: ... is destroyed Surge current of the white lamp on A surge current of 10 times or more when turned on To suppress the surge current make the dark current of 1 3 to 1 5 rated current flow Output E R Sink type transistor output Source type transistor output Output E1 R Output E1 ...

Страница 92: ...in parameter and the installed module does not match modify the module or parameter and then restart Warning 0 5 second Flicker RUN mode switching 31 Module falling during operation or additional setup After checking the position of attachment detachment of expansion module during Run mode Warning 0 1 second Flicker Every scan 33 Data of I O module does not access normally during operation After c...

Страница 93: ...Flicker Scan end 50 Heavy error of external device Refer to Heavy error detection flag and modifies the device and restart Acc Parameter Heavy error 1 second Flicker Scan end 55 Task confliction Check task occurrence Heavy error 0 5second Flicker Every time 60 E_STOP function executed After removing error causes which starts E_STOP function in program power reinput Heavy error 1 second Flicker Whi...

Страница 94: ...rds applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below Table13 1 Specification Test item Test details Standard value EN50081 2 EN55011 Radiated noise 2 Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured 30 230 QP 50 m 1 230 1000 QP 57 m EN55011 Conducted noise Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured 150 500 QP 79 Mean 66 500 230 QP 73 Mean 60 EN61131 2 EN61000 4...

Страница 95: ... have the following features a Use SPCC Cold Rolled Mild Steel for the control panel b The steel plate should be thicker than 1 6mm c Use isolating transformers to protect the power supply from external surge voltage d The control panel must have a structure which the radio waves does not leak out For example make the door as a box structure so that the panel body and the door are overlapped each ...

Страница 96: ...dancethat is as lowas possiblemust be ensured c The earthingwire itself can generatethenoise so wire as shortandthick to preventfrom acting as an antenna d Attachferritecore under the powercabletosatisfyCE specification ferrite core manufacture name External Dimension mm maximum cable diameter mm address A B C D Laird 28A3851 0A2 30 00 13 00 33 70 30 00 12 85 www lairdtech com Laird 28A5776 0A2 29...

Страница 97: ...es The XGB series follow EN6100 1 safety of devices used in measurement rooms control rooms or laboratories And the XGB series modules which operate at the rated voltage of AC50V DC75V or above are also developed to conform the above standard 7 2 2 XGB Series PLC Selection 1 Power and CPU There are dangerous voltages voltages higher than 42 4V peak inside the power supply modules of the AC110 220V...

Страница 98: ... 1 1 Programming Method The XBC high performance basic unit supports programming method of repetitive operation interrupt operation fixed operation 1 Repetitive operation mode Scan It means the basic programming method of the PLC It is the method that performs the written program repetitively from the first step to the last one and a series of such procedures is called program scan A series of suc...

Страница 99: ...ase the internal device value is matched with the set occurrence condition High speed counter In case the high speed counter current value is matched with the set value 3 Fixed Cycle Operation mode It is the mode that executes the scan program every fixed time After executing all scan programs it stands by until the fixed cycle time and then the next scan will resume at the specified time At this ...

Страница 100: ...uption occurred 2 If instantaneous interruption is canceled execution will resume 3 In case execution is suspended due to instantaneous interruption timer measurement and one for fixed cycle interrupt will be continuously run 1 If instantaneous interruption exceeds 10ms the PLC will execute restart like the time when power is supplied The below figure shows the PLC s execution processing flow char...

Страница 101: ...ion service processing time processing XG5000 service and embedded communication Model MPU processing time Expansion interface processing time Scan program running 32K PLC internal Processing time Digital I O module 32 points 1 EA Analog module 8 channels 1EA Communication module 200 byte 1 block XEC DN32Ux 9 7 0 8 0 3 2 0 0 8 The high performance XGB basic unit performs the control operation base...

Страница 102: ...ers with XG5000 it requires converting the program changed during RUN into executable machine code in the PLC or other internal processing operations for changed communication parameters so the scan time may be temporarily increased by several ms or more 3 Verification of the scan time The PLC s scan time can be verified by using XG5000 or flag as below a How to use XG5000 Click Online Diagnosis P...

Страница 103: ...rupt external contact interrupt high speed counter interrupt occur during execution of the scan program it will stop the scan program and return to the scan program after executing the relevant interrupt program Fixed cycle interrupt program Executed at every set cycle regardless of the scan program It can be applied to execute the following time conditions Execution at the shorter time interval t...

Страница 104: ...ime the early set interrupt will be executed first In case interrupt 1 and interrupt 2 occur at the same time interrupt1 will be executed first 2 If the interrupt with higher priority occurs during execution of interrupts the interrupt with higher priority will be executed first 3 All interrupts are allowable Enable when the power is On If you want to run by interrupt program or prohibit them you ...

Страница 105: ...16 23 Designated without overlapped users in the range of 24 39 Designated without overlapped users in the range of 40 47 3 Processing method of the task program It describes the common processing methods and instructions for the task program a Characteristics of the task program In contrast with the scan program the task program runs only when the execution conditions occur without repetition pro...

Страница 106: ...onditions of tasks proper If tasks occur frequently beyond necessity or if several tasks occur in one scan the scan time may be extended or become irregular If you cannot change task settings check the maximum scan time b Are the priorities of tasks arranged well The task program with low priority may be delayed and fail to be executed in time due to the task program with high priority in some cas...

Страница 107: ...le interrupt so the scan program is interrupted and the program 1 runs 12 20 The execution of the program 1 is completed and the scan program that was interrupted runs continuously 20 Although there are the requests on 10 _fixed cycle interrupt and the external contact interrupt at the same time the external contact interrupt has higher priority so the program 3 runs and the program 1 stands by fo...

Страница 108: ...uting the scan program 1 1 6 Initialization task 1 How to set up the task You can add initialization tasks in the project window of XG5000 as below and add the programs to be executed For more details refer to the XG5000 manual You cannot add tasks on online After disconnecting the PLC add tasks a Adding task Select Project Add Items Task or after clicking with the right mouse button on the projec...

Страница 109: ...se button on the registered task and click Add Items Program d Make the necessary initialization program and make sure to include the INIT_DONE command to the initialization task program If the operation conditions of INIT_DONE runs the initialization task is ended and the scan program runs ...

Страница 110: ...ect Add Items Task as shown in the below figure b The screen for registering the task will be displayed Click Fixed cycle in the execution conditions and after entering the task name input the items required for setting as below Items Input range Description priority 2 7 Designates the priority of tasks Task No 0 15 Designates the task number The numbers overlapped with are not available cycle 1 4...

Страница 111: ... of Programs 1 14 c Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items Program d Register the task program name and comment e If the program window for writing the task program is displayed you can make the task program here ...

Страница 112: ...ogram with fixed cycle works only when the operation mode is RUN mode Ignore all the blackout time When setting up the running cycle of the task program with fixed cycle the request on running several task programs should not occur If you apply 4 task programs with the fixed cycle of 2 seconds 4 seconds 10 seconds 20 seconds 4 execution requests occur simultaneously every 20 seconds and 4 tasks ru...

Страница 113: ...ms required for setting as below Items Input range Description Priority 2 7 Designates the priority of tasks Task No 16 23 Designates the task number The numbers overlapped with are not available Contact No 8 15 Designates the task start contact number Starting conditions rising falling transition Sets up starting conditions of tasks c Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and cli...

Страница 114: ...task program runs currently or stands by for execution if the request on running the same input task program occurs the newly occurred task will be ignored The input contact monitoring for the external contact tasks is executed only when the operation mode is RUN mode The input contact monitoring for task startup is not executed in STOP mode The detection delay time of the external contact task is...

Страница 115: ... overlapped with are not available Internal device BIT WORD Selects the device type that will start the task Device Direct input Input directly the device that will start the task and set the startup conditions Startup conditio ns Bit Rising falling transition On Off Rising Starts the task in case of rising edge Falling Starts the task in case of falling edge Transitio n Starts the task in case of...

Страница 116: ...Main Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs 1 19 c Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items Program d Register the task program name and comment ...

Страница 117: ... the scan program is completed Accordingly although the execution conditions of the internal device task program occur in the scan programs or task programs fixed cycle external contact high speed counter it will run at the time of completing the scan program instead of running immediately In the case of the internal device task the execution conditions are searched when the scan program is comple...

Страница 118: ...asks Select Project Add Items Task or after clicking with the right mouse button on the project name of the project tree select Add Items Task as shown in the below figure b The screen for registering the task will be displayed Click High speed counter in the execution conditions and after entering the task name select the channel ...

Страница 119: ... to use the high speed counter task When the high speed counter s current value in the selected channel becomes equal to the comparative output set value of 0 of the relevant channel in the below Fig the high speed counter task will be detected and the task program will run You can check whether the conditions of the high speed counter task occur at every 250us cycle so detection delay may occur u...

Страница 120: ...is the mode executing the program normally 1 When changing the mode from other into RUN Initialize the data area at the beginning stage and check the validity of the program to determine whether it can be executed or not 2 Execution processing details I O Refresh and program operation are executed a The interrupt program is executed by detecting the startup conditions of the interrupt program b No...

Страница 121: ...ocessing 1 2 3 DEBUG Mode It is the mode to find errors of the program or track the operation processes You can convert the mode into Debug in STOP mode only Though this mode you can verify the program by checking the execution status of the program and details of each data 1 When changing the mode from other into DEBUG a Initialize the data area at the beginning stage of changing the mode b Elimi...

Страница 122: ...cted to the network e Change by the STOP command during execution of the program 2 Kinds of operation modes The following operation modes are set by the mode setting key of the basic unit and XG5000 s commands Operation mode switch XG5000 command Operation mode Remarks RUN Unchangeable Local RUN When the operation mode switch is located in RUN position the mode change by XG5000 is impossible STOP ...

Страница 123: ...ommunicationmoduleparameterarea Userevent trace parameter area Program saving area 1024 Scanprogram area1 2 Variable comment area System area 156 Userevent trace data area System logarea Devicebackuparea Program backup area 1 362 Scanprogram area Task program area Uploadarea Parameter initialization area Retainparameter assignmentarea 1 3 2 Data memory Datamemory is shown as in below 항 목 용량 Data m...

Страница 124: ...Main Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs 1 27 1 Memory block diagram ...

Страница 125: ...P service address area of communication module Retain is available R X O Flash memory dedicated area Retain is available Remark 1 K N R devices are retained basically 2 K L N devices can be deleted through Clear PLC of XG5000 online menu 3 For more detail refer to Online of XG5000 user manual 1 Initialization of data according to restart mode There are three variable related with restart mode Defa...

Страница 126: ...ious value Hold previous value Remark 1 Terms on three types of variable are as follows 1 Default variable variable not set as INIT or Retain variable 2 INIT variable initial value is set 3 Retain variable Holds previous value 3 Initialization of data If PLC becomes Clear Memory status memory of all devices are deleted as 0 When you want to specify initial value use initialization task At CPU modu...

Страница 127: ...Remarks XGB XGB XECE IEC language Economic XEC R10 14 20 30E XEC DN10 14 20 30E XE DP10 14 20 30E Compact type XGB XECH IEC language Deluxe XEC DR32 64H XEC DN32 64H XEC DP32 64H Compact type XGB XECS IEC language Standard XE DR20 30 40 60SU XE DN20 30SU 40 60SU Compact type XGB XEC IEC language high performance XECDN32U XEC DN32UP XBC DN32UA Compact type ...

Страница 128: ... operations Fixed cycle operation Set the fixed cycle operation time 1 999 Watchdog timer Set the scan Watch Dog s time 10 1000 Standard input filter Set the standard input filter s time 1 3 5 10 20 70 100 Restart method Set the restart mode Cold warm Output during debugging Set whether allowing the actual output during debug operation Allowable Prohibited Output Hold when errors occur Determine w...

Страница 129: ...n for each I O If you click I O Parameter in the project window the below setting window will be displayed If you click the Module in the slot position the list of each module will be displayed Then choose the module that is matched with the actual system to be configured The selected slot will be displayed as below ...

Страница 130: ...base window as below the window for setting the filter emergency output will be displayed Notice In case each set details are different from the actually accessed I O module Module Type Mismatch Error occur and the error will be displayed If there is no setting the CPU reads each I O module s information for operation ...

Страница 131: ...arameters as below Initial value 500ms 2 The Watchdog timer monitors the scanning time during operation and when set detection time is exceeded it stops the PLC s operations immediately At this time the output status is maintained or cleared based on the details of Output Hold when errors occur 3 If it is expected that the ScanWatchdog Time is exceeded since it takes more time to process the speci...

Страница 132: ...rning window all the saved error history will be deleted In case the error histories exceed 100EA the histories are deleted in order from the one that occurred first and the 100EArecent histories are saved 2 3 3 Failure Management 1 Failure Types The troubles are caused by failure of the PLC itself system configuration s error error detection of operational results etc Theycan be divided into thef...

Страница 133: ...he failure of the external control device can be detected by the PLC s user program in case of detecting failures the system will be stopped in case of detecting minor failures only the detection status will be displayed and the operation will be continued For the detailed use of the function to detect external device s failures refer to the 2 3 6 Failure Diagnosis Function for the External Device...

Страница 134: ...cycle error Fixed cycle error F011 _LOGIC_RESULT Logic result Displays the logic result FX176 _ERR Operational error It Is On during 1 scan in case of operational error FX179 _ALL_Off All outputs Off It is On when all outputs are Off FX181 _LER Operational error latch It maintains 0 in case of operational error FW15 _PUTGET_ERR0 PUT GET error 0 main base PUT GET error FW23 _PUTGET_NDR0 PUT GET com...

Страница 135: ...external device connected to the PLC to realize stoppage of the system and warning easily Through this function you can detect the external device s failure without complex programming and can monitorthefailureposition withoutspecialdevices XG5000 etc orprograms You can use thefailure diagnosis functionfortheexternal devices as below 1 Failure types of external devices The failures of external dev...

Страница 136: ...r status and will stop the operation Then FX38 _ANNUM_ER is ON and FX3202flag is automatically Off All outputs works based on IO parameter s emergency output settings e When failures occur through XG5000 a user can figure out the causes of failures by monitoring FW202 _ANC_ERR flag f The below figure describes the example of the program detecting the external device s serious failures with operati...

Страница 137: ...hed by external device s minor failures in FW203 _ANC_WAR through the FWRITE command as below Input the values excluding 0 b In case the external device s minor failures occur FX3203 _CHK_ANC_WAR flag will be On c When the scan program is completed the PLC checks whether FX3203 _CHK_ANC_WAR is ON and detects minor failures d If the external device s minor failures occur the ERR LED will be flicker...

Страница 138: ...ning code is the value saved in _motor warning When the device 1 is warned IX0 5 2 is ON The warning code is the value saved in device 1 warning In the above programming when IX0 5 0 is On in case of sensor failure the value is saved in FWF203 _ANC_WAR and FX3203 _CHK_ANC_WAR will be On If FX3203 is ON it is detected by the scan end and the external device s serious failures are generated You can ...

Страница 139: ...m XG5000 and setting 1 Click Online Diagnosis PLC information 2 Click the PLC clock tab of PLC information 3 If you want to send the time of the PC to the PLC click Synchronization with PC clock button 4 If you want to set up the user defined time after changing set values of the data and time box click Send to PLC b Reading with the special relay You can monitor the data by the special relay as s...

Страница 140: ...the clock data in the below area and turning on FX3200 _RTC_WR without using function blocks Word Flag Name Name Setting range FW210 _MON_YEAR_DT Clock information data month year 2000 2099 Jan Dec FW211 _TIME_DAY_DT Clock information data hour day 1st 31th 0 00 23 00 FW212 _SEC_MIN_DT Clock information data second minute 0 59 minutes 0 59 seconds FW213 _HUND_WK_DT Clock information data century d...

Страница 141: ...the function to execute RUN STOP through communication modules through the outside This convenient function can be helpfully used when the PLC is installed in the bad palace to operate or you need to RUN STOP the CPU modules of a control panel from the outside 3 Remote DEBUG It is the function to execute DEBUG when the operation mode switch is on STOP position DEBUG is the function to execute the ...

Страница 142: ...r the condition that the whole I O areas are On DeleteAll You can delete the forced I O Enable under the condition that the whole I O areas are Off Set device It displays the I O area where even one bit is set 2 6 2 Time to process the forced I O On Off and processing method 1 Forced input When the forced input is set among the data read from the input model at the time of Refresh the data of the ...

Страница 143: ...ers In case of error occurrence if you select the emergency output as Clear after setting Output Hold when errors occur the output is off when errors occur if you choose Hold the output status will be maintained In case Output Hold when errors occur is not set in the output control setting of the basic parameters the output is Off 2 7 Direct I O Operation Function I O contact s Refresh is executed...

Страница 144: ...hereoutputmodule is equipped 2 Sincedata to outputis 16bitduringscan enable lower 16bitamong value of MASK_L 16 FFFF0000 3 If execution condition IX0 0 0 is On DIREC_O Immediate refresh of output module is executed and data of output module is setas 2 0111_0111_0111_0111 ...

Страница 145: ...besavedupto 1008 EA Itis automaticallycanceled when thememorybackup is cleared duetothebattery s lowvoltage etc 2 9 2 Mode conversion history Itsaves theinformationonthechangedmodeandtimewhenchangingtheoperationmode Itsaves the data time modeconversiondetails The historiescanbesavedupto 100EA 2 9 3 Power down history On orOfftimeof thepoweris saved as theON OFF information ON OFF information date ...

Страница 146: ...functions input IX0 1 0 IX0 1 63 output QX0 1 0 QX0 1 63 2 XBE DC32A input IX0 2 0 IX0 2 63 output QX0 2 0 QX0 2 63 Actual input IX0 2 0 IX0 2 31 3 XBE TN32A input IX0 3 0 IX0 3 63 output QX0 3 0 QX0 3 63 Actual output QX0 3 0 QX0 3 31 4 XBL C21A input IX0 4 0 IX0 4 63 output QX0 4 0 QX0 4 63 5 XBF AD04A input IX0 5 0 IX0 5 63 output QX0 5 0 QX0 5 63 6 XBF DV04A input IX0 6 0 IX0 6 63 output QX0 6...

Страница 147: ... the PLC The below describes the basic modification method For more details on Modification during RUN refer to the XG5000 manual The items that can be modified during RUN are limited to programs network parameters You cannot modify adding tasks deletion parameters etc during RUN 2 11 1 Modification Procedures during RUN 1 It shows the currently running program 2 Click Online Start Modification Du...

Страница 148: ...en the background color of the program window changes and it is converted into the mode of modification during RUN 4 You can modify the program 5 When the modification of the program is completed click Online Write Modification During RUN ...

Страница 149: ...program window changes into the original one and modification during RUN is completed Notice For Modification of communication parameters during RUN after changing the network configuration items of XG5000 in the RUN status without going into the Modification during RUN menu click Online Write and choose Network Parameter to execute Write ...

Страница 150: ...to monitor each module s information comprising the XGB PLC system 1 If you click Online I O Information the information of each module of connected systems will be monitored 2 If you click Detailed Information after choosing the module the details on the module will be displayed ...

Страница 151: ...etting It is the function to suspend the monitor when the set device s value ismatched withtheconditions Restarts when you click RestartMonitor Changing the current value Changes thecurrentlyselecteddevice s current value System monitor Monitors thecurrentsystem s general information Devicemonitor It is thefunctiontomonitoreachdevice Trendmonitor Monitors theset device s trend For more details ref...

Страница 152: ... function to represent the set device value in a graphic form The value represented on the graph is not the data collected by the PLC at the right timing but the value read from XG5000 through the communication function Accordingly communication delay can occur so it may not be matched with the actual data collected at the right cycle You are recommended to use the Trend Monitor function to check ...

Страница 153: ...Main Chapter 2 CPU Function 2 27 e Custom event 1 It is the function to monitor the detailed information when the event set by a user occurs Register the user event additionally ...

Страница 154: ...ce occur the Alarm message Tank 1 Error Please Confirm is recorded with the then values of MW100 and DATA 3 Set up the associated device 4 It monitors the user event history 5 If you double click the occurrence number the detailed value of the device at the time of occurrence will be monitored with the details as below ...

Страница 155: ...Main Chapter 2 CPU Function 2 29 Notice For more details on the monitor refer to the XG5000 manual ...

Страница 156: ... be deleted is created c After choosing the connection method with the PLC to be deleted if you click Access or OK all PLC programs parameters data passwords will be deleted Notice Although the initial PLC is not connected the function is executed You can connect to the PLC after assess setting If you use the function to delete all of PLC all PLCs internal data including passwords will be complete...

Страница 157: ... that open close frequency is high or it is used for conductive load open close use Transistor output module or triac output module as the durability of Relay Output Module shall be reduced 5 For output module to run the conductive L load max open close frequency should be used by 1second On 1 second Off 6 For output module in case that counter timer using DC DC Converter as a load was used Inrush...

Страница 158: ...life of Relay output module is shown as below Max life of Relay used in Relay output module is shown as below Open Close times 10000 100 50 30 20 10 100 10 5 3 2 1 0 5 Open Close current A AC 250V Resistive load DC 30V Resistive load AC 125V Resistive load ...

Страница 159: ... M3 screw 66 89 N 11 Relay life graph is not written based on real use This is not a guaranteed value So consider margin Relay life is specified under following condition a Rated voltage load 3 million times 100 million times b 200V AC 1 5A 240V AC 1A COS 0 7 1 million times c 200V AC 0 4A 240V AC 0 3A COS 0 7 3 million times d 200V AC 1A 240V AC 0 5A COS 0 35 1 million times e 200V AC 0 3A 240V A...

Страница 160: ...Main Chapter 3 Input Output Specification 3 4 a Setting input filter 1 Click I O Parameter in the project window of XG5000 2 Click Module at the slot location ...

Страница 161: ...Main Chapter 3 Input Output Specifications 3 5 3 Set I O module really equipped 4 After setting I O module click Input Filter ...

Страница 162: ...Main Chapter 3 Input Output Specification 3 6 5 Set filter value b Setting output status in case of error 1 Click Emergency Out in the I O parameter setting window ...

Страница 163: ...Main Chapter 3 Input Output Specifications 3 7 2 Click Emergency Output If it is selected as Clear the output will be Off and if Hold is selected the output will be kept ...

Страница 164: ...Off current DC6V or lower 1 or lower Input resistance About 5 6 P00 P07 about 4 7 Response time Off On 1 3 5 10 20 70 100 Set by I O parameter Default 3 On Off Insulation pressure AC560Vrms 3 cycle altitude 2000m Insulation resistance 10 or more by MegOhmMeter Common method 16 point COM Proper cable size 0 3 0 75 Operation indicator LED On when Input On External connection method 8 point terminal ...

Страница 165: ...rge absorber Zener diode Response time Off On 1 or less On Off 1 or less rated load resistive load Common method 16 point COM Proper wire size Stranded wire 0 3 0 75 external diameter 2 8 or less External power Voltage DC12 24V 10 Ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 10 or less When connecting DC24V Operation indicator LED On when Output On External connection method 8 point terminal block connec...

Страница 166: ...ge current 100 000 times or more AC200V 1 5A AC240V 1A COSΦ 0 7 100 000 times or more AC200V 1A AC240V 0 5A COSΦ 0 35 100 000 times or more DC24V 1A DC100V 0 1A L R 7 100 000 times or more Response time Off On 10 or less On Off 12 or less Common method 1point COM P20 23 4point COM P24 2B Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption Output On LED On Ex...

Страница 167: ...5 6 Response time Off On 1 3 5 10 20 70 100 set by CPU parameter Default 3 On Off Insulation pressure AC560Vrms 3Cycle altitude 2000m Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded pair 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 30 when all point On Operation indicator Input On LED On External connection method 10 point terminal...

Страница 168: ...ff On 1 3 5 10 20 70 100 set by CPU parameter Default 3 On Off Insulation pressure AC560Vrms 3Cycle altitude 2000m Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter Common method 16 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 40 when all point On Operation indicator Input On LED On External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector 10 ...

Страница 169: ...ter Common method 32 point COM Proper cable size 0 3 Current consumption 50 when all point On Operation indicator Input On LED On External connection method 40 pin connector Weight 60g Circuit configuration No Contact No Contact Type B20 00 A20 10 B19 01 A19 11 B18 02 A18 12 B17 03 A17 13 B16 04 A16 14 B15 05 A15 15 B14 06 A14 16 B13 07 A13 17 B12 08 A12 18 B11 09 A11 19 B10 0A A10 1A B09 0B A09 1...

Страница 170: ... or more Electrical Rated load voltage current 100 000 times or more AC200V 1 5A AC240V 1A COSΨ 0 7 100 000 times or more AC200V 1A AC240V 0 5A COSΨ 0 35 100 000 times or more DC24V 1A DC100V 0 1A L R 7 100 000 times or more Response time Off On 10 or less On Off 12 or less Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 230 whe...

Страница 171: ...C200V 1 5A AC240V 1A COSΨ 0 7 100 000 times or more AC200V 1A AC240V 0 5A COSΨ 0 35 100 000 times or more DC24V 1A DC100V 0 1A L R 7 100 000 times or more Response time Off On 10 or less On Off 12 or less Common method 1 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 230 when all point On Operation indicator Output On LED On External connectio...

Страница 172: ...re AC200V 1 5A AC240V 1A COSΨ 0 7 100 000 times or more AC200V 1A AC240V 0 5A COSΨ 0 35 100 000 times or more DC24V 1A DC100V 0 1A L R 7 100 000 times or more Response time Off On 10 or less On Off 12 or less Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 420 when all point On Operation indicator Output On LED On External conne...

Страница 173: ...ff On 1 or less On Off 1 or less Rated load resistive load Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 40 when all point On External power supply Voltage DC12 24V 10 ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 10 or less DC24V connection Operation indicator Output On LED On External connection method 10 point terminal block connec...

Страница 174: ...Common method 16 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 60 when all point On External power supply Voltage DC12 24V 10 ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 10 or less DC24V connection Operation indicator Output On LED On External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector 10 pin terminal block connector Weight 54 g Circuit confi...

Страница 175: ...n 120 when all point On External power supply Voltage DC12 24V 10 ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 20 or less DC24V connection Operation indicator Output On LED On External connection method 40 pin connector Weight 60g Circuit configuration No Contac t No Contac t Type B20 00 A20 10 B19 01 A19 11 B18 02 A18 12 B17 03 A17 13 B16 04 A16 14 B15 05 A15 15 B14 06 A14 16 B13 07 A13 17 B12 08 A12 18...

Страница 176: ...me Off On 1 or less On Off 1 or less Rated load resistive load Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 external diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 40 when all outputs are on External power Voltage DC12 24V 10 ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 10 or less when connecting DC24V Operation indicator LED on when output on External connection method 10 pin terminal b...

Страница 177: ...d Common method 16 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 external diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 60 When all outputs are on External power Voltage DC12 24V 10 ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 10 or less connecting DC24V Operation indicator LED On when output On External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector 10 pin terminal block connector Weight 40g Circuit ...

Страница 178: ...ption 120 When all outputs are on External power Voltage DC12 24V 10 ripple voltage 4 Vp p or less Current 20 or less connecting DC24V Operation indicator LED On when output On External connection method 40 pin connector Weight 60g Circuit configuration No Contact No Contact Type B20 00 A20 10 B19 01 A19 11 B18 02 A18 12 B17 03 A17 13 B16 04 A16 14 B15 05 A15 15 B14 06 A14 16 B13 07 A13 17 B12 08 ...

Страница 179: ...nce About 5 6 Response time Off On 1 3 5 10 20 70 100 set by CPU parameter Default 3 On Off Insulation pressure AC560Vrms 3Cycle altitude 2000m Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 External diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 280 When all inputs and outputs are on Operation indicator LED on when input on External c...

Страница 180: ...ctrical Rated load voltage current 100 000 times or more AC200V 1 5A AC240V 1A COSΨ 0 7 100 000 times or more AC200V 1A AC240V 0 5A COSΨ 0 35 100 000 times or more DC24V 1A DC100V 0 1A L R 7 100 000 times or more Response time Off On 10 or less On Off 12 or less Common method 8 point COM Proper cable size Stranded cable 0 3 0 75 external diameter 2 8 or less Current consumption 280 When all inputs...

Страница 181: ...ut filter function Under the environment with serious noise or in the case of the equipment that is greatly affected by the input signal s pulse width the system may receive incorrect input depending on the input signal status To prevent such incorrect input the input filter function does not regard the signal that is shorter than the set time by a user as input In the case of the XGB PLC you c an...

Страница 182: ...status of the output module or clearing it when the PLC is stopped due to errors You can set the emergency output by 8 points For more details on how to set the emergency output refer to the below 1 Output condition when an error occur 1 Click I O module when error occurs 2 Click emergency output If setting Clear output wil l go off when error occurs while If setting Hold output will go on ...

Страница 183: ...ort pulse signal that is input during scan and is off before the scan is finished cannot be recognized as input If you need to recognize and process such short pulse signal you can use the Pulse Catch function If you apply this function the short pulse of the minimum of 50 can be recognized The below timing chart represents the operations of the Pulse Catch function Step Processing details Scan 1 ...

Страница 184: ...Main Chapter 3 Input Output Specification 3 28 2 Select Main in slot 3 Select Module 4 Double Click I O Module Select Pulse Catch output ...

Страница 185: ... 32 Bit 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Count mode Program setting Linear count if 32 bit range exceeded Carry Borrow occurs Counter max and min value is indicated Ring count repeated count within setting range Input mode Program setting 1 phase input 2 phase input CW CCW input Signal type Voltage Up Down setting 1 phase input Increasing decreasing operation setting by B phase input Increasing decreas...

Страница 186: ...etting Output type Transistor output Count Enable To be set through program count available only in enable status Preset function To be set through terminal contact or program Auxiliary mode Program setting Count Latch Frequency Measure Count per unit time time setting value 1 60 000ms Count pause 2 Counter Preset input specification Classification Spcification Input voltage 24V DC 20 4V 28 8V Inp...

Страница 187: ... phase input counter input terminal B phase input terminal IX0 0 6 Ch6 counter input Ch6A phase input counter input terminal A phase input terminal IX0 0 7 Ch7 counter input Ch6 B phase input counter input terminal B phase input terminal IX0 0 8 Ch0 preset 24V Ch0 preset 24V preset input terminal preset input terminal IX0 0 9 Ch1 preset 24V preset input terminal No use IX0 0 10 Ch2 preset 24V Ch2 ...

Страница 188: ...V Off 6V or less IX0 0 6 Ch 6 pulse input Ch 6 A phase input On 20 4 28 8V Off 6V or less IX0 0 7 Ch 7 pulse input Ch 6 B phase input On 20 4 28 8V Off 6V or less IX0 0 8 Ch 0 preset input Ch 0 preset input On 20 4 28 8V Off 6V or less IX0 0 9 Ch 1 preset input On 20 4 28 8V Off 6V or less IX0 0 10 Ch 2 preset input Ch 2 preset input On 20 4 28 8V Off 6V or less IX0 0 11 Ch 3 preset input On 20 4 ...

Страница 189: ... Increasing operation if B phase is LOW with A phase input and Decreasing operation if A phase is LOW with B phase input d Auxiliary modes are as follows Latch counter Count function about the number of revolution per unit time Frequency measure function Count prohibited function e Pulse input mode 1 1 phase count mode a Increasing decreasing count operation by program setting 1 phase 1 input 1 mu...

Страница 190: ...hase input is antecedent to B phase input increasing operation starts and if B phase input is antecedent to A phase input decreasing operation starts Operation example Up Down B phase input pulse A phase input pulse Count 10 11 15 19 13 17 21 23 22 12 16 20 14 18 22 21 17 13 19 15 11 20 16 12 18 14 10 3 CW Clockwise CCW Counter Clockwise operation mode A phase input pulse counts at rising or B pha...

Страница 191: ...KW330 KW360 KW390 KW2220 KW2250 KW2280 KW2310 0 linear 1 ring a Linear counter Linear Count range 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 If count value reaches the maximum value while increased Carry will occur and if count value reaches the minimum value while decreased Borrow will occur If Carry occurs count stops and increasing is not available but decreasing is available If Borrow occurs count stops and ...

Страница 192: ...in value KD154 KD169 KD184 KD199 KD1114 KD1129 KD1144 KD1159 Ring counter max value KD155 KD170 KD185 KD200 KD1115 KD1130 KD1145 KD1160 Range of Ring counter user defined min value user defined max value Counter display in case of using ring counter user defined max value is not displayed 1 During increasing count Even if count value exceeds user defined maximum value during increasing count Carry...

Страница 193: ...value exceeds user defined range when setting Ring Count Error code no 27 is occurred and it operates linear counter If present count value is within user defined range when setting Ring Count Present count value starts to increase up to the user defined maximum value and down to the user defined minimum value and keeps counting after Carry occurs Not the maximum but the minimum value only is disp...

Страница 194: ...efined minimum value and up to the user defined maximum value and keeps counting after Borrow occurs Remark 1 Based on count value within or out of user defined range count will be decided to be within or out of the range when setting Ring Count 2 Ring Count setting when count value is out of the range is regarded as user s mistake The count is not available within the Ring Count range 3 Use prese...

Страница 195: ... condition Memory address word Value 2 Comp output 0 Comp output 1 Present Value Compared Value Ch 0 KW302 Ch 1 KW 332 Ch 2 KW 362 Ch 3 KW 392 Ch 4 KW 2222 Ch 5 KW 2252 Ch 6 KW 2282 Ch 7 KW 2312 Ch 0 KW 303 Ch 1 KW 333 Ch 2 KW 363 Ch 3 KW 393 Ch 4 KW 2223 Ch 5 KW 2253 Ch 6 KW 2283 Ch 7 KW 2313 Set to 0 Present Value Compared Value Set to 1 Present Value Compared Value Set to 2 Present Value Compar...

Страница 196: ...327 KX4487 KX4647 KX3488 7 KX3504 7 KX3520 7 KX3536 7 0 disable 1 enable In order to make external output the compared coincidence output signal P20 P2F must be set If Compared output contact is Off at Special Module Parameter Setting of XG5000 Compared coincidence output signal internal device is only output Classification Area per channel Operation Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Compare...

Страница 197: ...0 output is sent out and if count value increases to be greater than the minimum set value of compared output 0 output is not sent out 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462 123460 Count Comparator output 0 Min value Compared output 0 Enable Compared output 0 Output Signal External output in case of Enabled 3 Mode 2 Count value Compared value If present count value is equal to the minimu...

Страница 198: ...nt value decreases to be less than or equal to the minimum set value of compared output 0 output is not sent out 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462 Count Comparator output 0 Min value Compared output 0 Enable Compared output 0 Output Signal External output in case of Enabled 123458 6 Mode 5 Section comparison Min set value of Compared Output 0 Count value Max set value of Compared Ou...

Страница 199: ...er defined maximum value of Ring Count changed to the minimum value during Ring Count b Count when Carry Signal occurs 1 Count stops if Carry occurs during Linear Count 2 Count does not stop even if Carry occurs during Ring Count c Carry reset 1 The Carry generated can be cancelled by turning off the associated device area in the program Classification Device area per channel bit Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch...

Страница 200: ...etting range Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Unit time KW322 KW352 KW382 KW412 KW2242 KW272 KW2302 KW2332 1 60000 Pulse Rev value KW323 KW353 KW383 KW13 KW2243 KW2273 KW2303 KW2333 1 60000 2 In case of using Rev unit time function enable the following special K area Class Device per each channel Word Operation Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Rev unit time command KX4165 KX4325 KX44...

Страница 201: ...wn below Current count Revolution per unit time Count starting point 600 400 0 Revolution per unit time function enabled 0 Setting time Setting time Setting time Setting time 700 350 190 100 300 25 10 30 21 7 Latch counter function Latch counter function latches the current counter value when the power is turned off in case of that latch counter enable signal is On Setting If present counter value...

Страница 202: ...et value KD153 KD168 KD183 KD198 KD1113 KD1128 KD1143 KD1158 Preset command is specified through the following special K area external preset is used by executing the designated input contact point after allowance bit is on Type Area per each channel Bit Ref Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Internal preset command KX4161 KX4321 KX4481 KX4641 KX34881 KX35041 KX35201 KX35361 External preset a...

Страница 203: ...requency Measuring Period KW32 4 KW35 4 KW38 4 KW41 4 KW22 44 KW22 74 KW23 04 KW23 34 1 10 100 1000 Hz 2 Set Frequency measurement enable flag to Enable when using frequency measurement function Class Device per each channel Word Operation Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Frequency measurement enable command KX416 8 KX4328 KX4488 KX4648 KX3488 8 KX3504 8 KX3520 8 KX3536 8 0 disable 1 enable...

Страница 204: ...put frequency Count starting point Current count 600 400 0 Frequency Measurement enable 0 Revision Cycle Revision Cycle Revision Cycle Revision Cycle 700 350 190 100 300 250 100 300 210 10 Count pause Count operation is not executed even if pulses are input when count pause flag is On Set the count pause signal to On when using count pause function Class Device area per channel Operation Ch 0 Ch 1...

Страница 205: ...e are wired at the same time the induced interruption is caused So it can be a reason for abnormal operation or malfunction 6 When using pipe for wiring grounding for pipe is necessary 7 Use shielded twisted pair cable for wiring pulse input to high speed counter If it is speculated that there is a noise source for wiring between high speed counter and connected devices 8 Connect onlyA phase in ca...

Страница 206: ...2 Magnitude h0003 Magnitude h0004 Magnitude KW2222 KW2252 KW2282 KW2312 h0005 Range Include h0006 Range Exclude Comp Output 1 mode setting h0000 Magnitude KW303 KW333 KW363 KW393 Word h0001 Magnitude h0002 Magnitude h0003 Magnitude h0004 Magnitude KW2223 KW2253 KW2283 KW2313 h0005 Range Include h0006 Range Exclude Internal preset value setting 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 KD152 KD167 KD182 KD197 DW...

Страница 207: ...02D h000E P002E h000F P002F Comp output 1 point designation HFFFF No use KW321 KW351 KW381 KW411 Word h0000 P0020 h0001 P0021 h0002 P0022 h0003 P0023 h0004 P0024 h0005 P0025 h0006 P0026 h0007 P0027 h0008 P0028 KW224 1 KW227 1 KW230 1 KW233 1 h0009 P0029 h000A P002A h000B P002B h000C P002C h000D P002D h000E P002E h000F P002F Unit time ms 1 60 000 ms KW322 KW352 KW382 KW412 Word KW2242 KW2272 KW2302...

Страница 208: ...lution time per unit time KX4165 KX4325 KX4485 KX4645 KX3488 5 KX3504 5 KX3520 5 KX3536 5 Designation of latch counter KX4166 KX4326 KX4486 KX4646 KX3488 6 KX3504 6 KX3520 6 KX3536 6 Frequency measurement enabling KX4168 KX4328 KX4488 KX4648 KX3488 8 KX3504 8 KX3520 8 KX3536 8 Carry signal Bit KX4176 KX4336 KX4496 KX4656 KX3489 6 KX3505 6 KX3521 6 KX3537 6 Borrow signal KX4177 KX4337 KX4497 KX4657...

Страница 209: ...ue is set out of counter range 27 Ring counter setting is set out of range Note ring counter setting should be 2 and more 28 Compared output min value is set out of permissible max input range 29 Compared output max value is set out of permissible max input range 30 Error of Compared output min value Compared output max value 31 Compared output is set out of the default output value 34 Set value o...

Страница 210: ...ounter parameter How to set types of parameters to operate a high speed counter is described as follows a Set Internal Parameters in the basic project window b Selecting high speed counter opens a window to set high speed counter parameters as follows Every parameter settings are saved in the special K device area c Upon the setting download program and parameter to PLC ...

Страница 211: ... the flag allowing an operation command Refer to 4 3 1 SpecialArea for High speed Counter For instance turn on K2605 bit if among additional functions in order to use revolution time per unit time function 2 Monitoring and setting command Monitoring and command setting of high speed counter are described as follows a If starting a monitor and clicking a Special Module Monitor the following window ...

Страница 212: ... window of high speed counter Start Monitoring Start monitoring each item special K device area monitor Test Write each item setting to PLC Write the setting to special K device Close Close monitor c Clicking Start Monitoring shows the high speed counter monitor display in which you may set each parameter At this moment if any changed values are not saved if power off on or mode is changed ...

Страница 213: ...apter 4 Built in High speed Counter Function 4 29 d Clicking FLAG Monitor shows the monitor of each flag in high speed counter in which you may direct operation commands by flags clicking commands reverse turn ...

Страница 214: ...of run data thereby saving system costs In addition it eliminates problems that might be caused in network based data collection such as communication cutoff or cable disconnection 2 Precise Data Collection This function allows you to collect precise data for each scan by 1ms or in accordance with other various run conditions In addition you can use the trigger function to save data before after t...

Страница 215: ...ows 1 Enter parameter values using XG5000 then perform data log function 2 Data saved by the PLC is saved into the SD memory in CSV format 3 The saved files can be remotely read through FTP 4 When XG5000 is remotely connected you can format the SD memory without going through the PC SD memory formatting only supported in PLC STOP ...

Страница 216: ...the internal Ethernet 2 LED Indications Names Description Specifications RUN Indicates high performance XGB PLC run Turns on during RUN and turns off at STOP ERR ERR Indicates high performance XGB PLC error status Flashes when error occurs STATE Indicates the status of SD memory mounted Turns on SD card mounted status normal Flashes SD card mounted error occurred flashes at 500ms interval Turns of...

Страница 217: ... 5 1 4 Operation Sequence Data log is performed in the following sequence Note 1 The SD memory should be formatted in FAT 32 format to be used for high performance XGB data log function 2 The maximum storage of SD memory supported is 16GB ...

Страница 218: ...5 Datalog Function 5 5 5 1 5 Control Signal Flow The data log function saves the PLC device values into the SD memory or exchanges the value with external device or software in accordance with the following data flow ...

Страница 219: ...on descent Word small big same different big or same small or same Operation Condition AND OR condition Trigger Save Range Up to 8192 data per group Files Conversion Conversion Timing Designate with File Size 10 16 384KB Designate with No of Save Lines 1 000 32 768 개 Maximum No of Files 256 per folder Event Save Single Condition Bit ON OFF elevation descent transfer Word small big same different b...

Страница 220: ... 5 Datalog Function 5 7 Note 1 SanDisk Transcend SD memories are recommended for internal data log Use of SD memory from other manufacturer may result in unexpected run Please choose your SD memory card with caution ...

Страница 221: ...e clock function is abnormal the time information is saved as the default value which is 1984 01 01 00 00 00 000 1 Data Type The data types and character strings that can be saved using the internal data log function of high performance XGB is as follows Data Type Output Size including BYTE BIT 0 or 1 2 BYTE 00 FF 3 WORD 0000 FFFF 5 DWROD 00000000 FFFFFFFF 9 LWORD 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF FFFFFF...

Страница 222: ...ication ASCII Code Value Indication ASCII Code Value Indication 0x20 SP 0x2A 0x3D 0x60 0x21 0x2B 0x3E 0x61 0x7A English lower case 0x23 0x2D 0x3F 0x7B 0x24 0x2E 0x41 0x5A English upper case 0x7C 0x25 0x2F 0x5B 0x7D 0x26 0x30 0x39 Number 0x5C 0x7E 0x27 0x3A 0x5D 0x28 0x3B 0x5E 0x29 0x3C 0x5F _ 2 DeviceAvailable for Saving The devices that can be used to save files using the internal data log functi...

Страница 223: ...nverts to 0x0000 0000 1234 2 2 WORD Data LWORD LINT ULINT LREAL Ex M0000 0x1234 M0001 0x5678 M0002 0x000 M0003 Converts to 0x000 0000 0000 5678 1234 3 Character String Conversion Unlike other types character strings are saved up to 32 characters and converted into 2 characters per word If a 0x0000 value exists during conversion conversion is performed up to that character string and further conver...

Страница 224: ... BIT 31 BIT 0 Sign S Exponent E Fixed Decimal Point F Sign S 1 BIT Exponent E 8 BIT Fixed Decimal Point F 23 BIT Conversion Value 1 S Х 1 FХ2 23 Х2 E 127 0 Exponent E 255 integer Exponent E 0 Fixed Decimal Point F 0 0 ZERO Exponent E 0 Fixed Decimal Point F 0 Conversion value close to 0 Exponent E 255 Fixed Decimal Point F 0 INFINITY Exponent E 255 Fixed Decimal Point F 0 NAN Note In case of REAL ...

Страница 225: ...s data at the time of save condition are saved without considering the status before or after the save condition This method is useful for collecting certain data at a certain interval 2 Trigger Save Trigger Save refers to saving a set number of data before and after the relevant point the number of data are set by parameter This method is useful when you want to view data from a certain period be...

Страница 226: ...refers to monitoring the device value collected and saving the the present data when a certain event condition is satisfied This method is useful for analyzing fluctuation of event values and timing by saving data from the event occurrence to the event termination ...

Страница 227: ...terval save method data are collected after END of each scan If the volume of stored data is large a scan watchdog timer error may occur Please be mindful of the scan watchdog setting of the basic parameter Collecting data exceeding 4 words 10ms or fast save time may cause data loss 2 Designation Cycle Save Save data when a set interval arrives An interval faster than the parameter set the same as...

Страница 228: ...vant bit when the set word device value is smaller than or the same as the input set value Elevation Large Saves data at the elevation edge of the relevant bit when the set word device value is larger than the input set value Descent Saves data at the descent edge of the relevant bit when the set word device value is larger than the input set value Elevation Large or Same Saves data at the elevati...

Страница 229: ...the input set value Transfer Saves data at the point where the condition conversion bit is transferred when the set word device value is smaller than the input set value ON Saves data at the point where the condition conversion bit is ON when the set word device value is smaller than the input set value OFF Saves data at the point where the condition conversion bit is OFF when the set word device ...

Страница 230: ... in the SD memory data log function does not show normal function Please be careful 2 Data Save Folder This folder saves log data generated by data log Each parameter setting group uses different folders The file names are created in accordance with the following rules The data folder name can be as long as 8 characters in case of English no space The folder name indicated in the folder structure ...

Страница 231: ...ta log files saved in the SD memory is as follows Remark Project Name Remark Save File Name Remark File Creation Time Remark PLC Type Remark Data Log Save Type Remark Data Conversion Type Items Description Separation Character Comma Line Change Code CR LF 0x0D 0x0A Character Code ASCII Code Field Data Decimal Hexadecimal Exponent character string File Size Up to 16Mbyte Header Data File ...

Страница 232: ...5 Datalog Function 5 19 2 Data File Structure The internal structure of data log files saved in the SD memory is as follows Note 1 Index indicates the number of saved data 2 Data 0 Data 1 Data 31 indicate data names ...

Страница 233: ...ndex Column Outputs counted numbers starting from 0 and up 10 Data Column BOOL 0 or 1 2 BYTE 00 FF 3 WORD 0000 FFFF 5 DWORD 00000000 FFFFFFFF 9 LWORD 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 17 SINT 128 127 5 INT 32 768 32 767 7 DINT 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 12 LINT 576 460 752 303 423 488 576 460 752 303 423 487 21 USINT 0 255 4 UINT 0 65 535 6 UDINT 0 4 294 967 295 11 ULINT 0 1 152 921 504 606 846...

Страница 234: ...e size exceeds 16 384KB Automatically converts to CSV files 2 Operation in Case of Exceeding the Number of Save Files When the number of maximum saved files set by the parameter is exceeded the following run occurs in accordance with the set runs in case of file excess Operation Setting in Case of Excess Operation Note Maintains the latest history Overwrites and saves new data over the oldest file...

Страница 235: ... file in the SD memory In accordance with the set sampling condition the collected data are stored in the buffer memory first and then saved in to the temporary memory of the SD memory card when data log condition occurs The size of buffer memory is fixed at up to 500KB per group Therefore setting too fast data sampling condition or sampling too much data data loss can be caused by buffer memory e...

Страница 236: ...converted to CSV file to create a new temporary file Meanwhile the buffer memory values cannot be saved into the temporary file Therefore too frequent occurrence of file conversion condition may cause the buffer memory storage to be exceeded and thus leading to data omission 3 Operation While data log file is accessed through FTP the buffer memory values cannot be saved into the temporary file The...

Страница 237: ... of data to collect is not large it takes a lot of time to save data into the SD memory If collected data are saved only in the buffer before sudden shutoff or reset occurs the saved data are all lost To prevent this the collected data need to be saved into the data at certain intervals regardless of the storage The data saved into the SD memory is not lost even in case of sudden power change Back...

Страница 238: ...lected data are accumulated in the PLC internal buffer When a certain amount is accumulated these are saved into the SD memory If the set interval is too short or the data to collect is too large a scan watchdog timer error may occur due to increased data volume Please be mindful of the scan watchdog setting of the basic parameter 2 Setting Method 1 Choose XG5000 Project Window internal parameter ...

Страница 239: ...er 5 Data Log Function 5 26 3 Choose Save at Every Scan at the Data Collection Method 4 Set the path history setting and file conversion point at Save Setting 5 Set the data conversion type storage device and name ...

Страница 240: ...ata save Note When using Scan Save set the data log parameters by referring to PLC scan Setting too much data and too fast interval may cause data loss Scan time can be verified from the following menu On line Diagnosis PLC Information Performance Tab Item Type Description KW4000 WORD Data Log Enable Flags KX64000 BIT Group 0 Enable Flag 1 Operation 0 Stop KX64001 BIT Group 1 Enable Flag 1 Operati...

Страница 241: ...mer collects data at certain intervals and is capable of saving data that change at certain intervals at more accurate points The collected data at each set cycle are scan END processed and saved into the SD memory as a CSV file 2 Setting Method 1 Choose XG5000 Project Window internal parameter data log This activates the data log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log par...

Страница 242: ...Setting too fast interval faster than data log save performance may cause data loss data log 4 words 10ms data log FTP web server 4 words 20ms data log FTP web server 4 words 30ms 2 Set the path history setting and file conversion point at Save Setting 3 Set the data conversion type storage device and name ...

Страница 243: ...STOP progress can be verified though LOG STOP Progress flag When the flag value is 100 it indicates completion of all data save Item Type Description KW4000 WORD Data Log Enable Flags KX64000 BIT Group 0 Enable Flag 1 Operation 0 Stop KX64001 BIT Group 1 Enable Flag 1 Operation 0 Stop KX64002 BIT Group 2 Enable Flag 1 Operation 0 Stop KX64003 BIT Group 3 Enable Flag 1 Operation 0 Stop KX64004 BIT ...

Страница 244: ...eful when you want to view data from a certain period before and after a certain event When Event Save method is used data are saved after END of each scan where the set bit condition occurred Note After selecting Trigger Save if the first trigger condition occurs and another trigger condition occurs while collecting data the new trigger is ignored and the trigger reoccurrence flag value increases...

Страница 245: ...acter string is inserted into the first data string to indicate the trigger starting point 1 Single Condition Single Condition runs under BIT Condition WORD Condition 1 BIT Condition BIT condition checks the set device BIT value and collects data by detecting trigger when the value is either elevation or descent 2 WORD Condition Word Condition compares the set device with the input value and conve...

Страница 246: ... data at the descent edge of the relevant bit when the set word device value is larger than the input set value Descent Saves data at the descent edge of the relevant bit when the set word device value is larger than the input set value Elevation Large or Same Saves data at the elevation edge of the relevant bit when the set word device value is larger than or the same as the input set value Desce...

Страница 247: ...g the operations that fit the conditions At least two Single Conditions should be set Trigger Save begins when operation with the set single conditions satisfy the result Multiple Condition runs underAND Calculation OR Calculation Note When less than 2 single conditions are set for trigger multiple condition the following error message is displayed ...

Страница 248: ...single scan The following figure shows an example of trigger save activated by trigger elevation and descent occuring at one scan When setting only with BIT condition Condition Set Device Trigger Occurrence Condition Condition 0 BIT MX1010 Elevation Condition 1 BIT IX0 0 1 Condition 2 BIT MX2010 Condition 3 BIT QX0 2 2 ...

Страница 249: ... Data Log Function 5 36 When setting with combination of BIt and WORD conditions Condition Comparison Condition Set Value Set Device Trigger Occurrence Condition Condition 0 Word 50 MW10 Elevation Condition 1 BIT MX15 ...

Страница 250: ... Save if the Trigger Condition is again satisfied before data saving is complete the new trigger is ignored and the trigger reoccurrence flag value increases When setting only with BIT condition Condition Set Device Trigger Occurrence Condition Condition 0 BIT MX1010 Elevation Condition 1 BIT IX0 0 1 Condition 2 BIT MX2010 Condition 3 BIT QX0 2 2 ...

Страница 251: ... Data Log Function 5 38 When setting with combination of BIt and WORD conditions Condition Comparison Condition Set Value Set Device Trigger Occurrence Condition Condition 0 Word 50 MW10 Elevation Condition 1 BIT MX15 ...

Страница 252: ...ated as follows No of sample blocks Trigger Buffer Space 1 No of set data 2 size of set data 3 RTC data size 4 No of stored samples sample block No of set data 1 Trigger Buffer Space 8960 Word Group 2 No of Set Data 32 Maximum 3 Size of Set Data Data Type Data Size BIT 1 BYTE 1 WORD 1 DWORD 2 LWORD 4 INT 1 SINT 1 DINT 2 LINT 4 UINT 1 USINT 1 UDINT 2 ULINT 4 REAL 2 LREAL 4 STRING 16 Ex No and Type ...

Страница 253: ...t by the parameter The saving interval is as follows Scan interval 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 2000 ms 5 5 5 Trigger Sample Save Section 1 If Trigger occurs after the number of previous data set by the parameter Saves data in the number set by the parameter 2 If Trigger occurs before the number of previous data set by the parameter Saves data in the number of transfer data collected and then coll...

Страница 254: ...G5000 Project Window internal parameter data log This activates the data log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log parameter window 3 4 5 3 Select Trigger Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left 4 ...

Страница 255: ...ct either Elevation or Descent as the Trigger Occurrence Condition 5 Select the condition setting menu to activate the following setting window Select BIT Condition and input device values into the device window in BIT types When setting is complete the window closes and the conditions initially set at the Trigger Setting Condition menu are displayed as follows ...

Страница 256: ...nterval total number of samples and number of samples after trigger then finish Trigger setting See 5 5 2 Trigger Sample Block Calculation for operation of number of sample blocks 8 Device values set at the Data Log Basic Setting window are collected and saved into the SD memory after type conversion ...

Страница 257: ...ject Window internal parameter data log This activates the data log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log parameter window 6 7 8 3 Select Trigger Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left ...

Страница 258: ...on 5 Select the condition setting menu to activate the following setting window Select Word Condition and input device values into the device window in BIT types and input comparison condition and comparison values Comparison Condition Large Large or Same Same Small Small or Same Not Same When setting is complete the window closes and the conditions initially set at the Trigger Setting Condition m...

Страница 259: ...ples after trigger then finish Trigger setting See 5 5 2 Trigger Sample Block Calculation for operation of number of sample blocks 8 Device values set at the Data Log Basic Setting window are collected and saved into the 3 after type conversion 3 4 5 Caution When inputting single word condition set values set device type as BIT and WORD respectively ...

Страница 260: ...ct Window internal parameter data log This activates the data log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log parameter window 3 9 10 11 3 Select Trigger Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left ...

Страница 261: ...urrence Condition 5 Select Trigger Condition and Multiple Condition to activate the condition setting window which allows for up to 4 inputs 6 Select each condition setting menu one by one inputting specific set values Multiple Condition activates Trigger Condition by combining Single Conditions through operation to save data As described below the basic setting method is the same as that of Singl...

Страница 262: ...selecting Calculation Condition before finishing the setting the following phrase is displayed and the setting is not complete 7 Input sampling interval total number of samples and number of samples after trigger then finish Trigger setting 8 Device values set at the Data Log Basic Setting window are collected when the Trigger Condition occurs converted into the set type and saved into the SD memo...

Страница 263: ...e by one inputting specific set values Multiple Condition activates Trigger Condition by combining Single Conditions through operation to save data As described below the basic setting method is the same as that of Single Condition When setting is complete the window closes and the conditions initially set at the Trigger Setting Condition menu are displayed as follows ...

Страница 264: ...g the following phrase is displayed and the setting is not complete 2 Input sampling interval total number of samples and number of samples after trigger then finish Trigger setting 3 Device values set at the Data Log Basic Setting window are collected when the Trigger Condition occurs converted into the set type and saved into the SD memory ...

Страница 265: ...s method is useful for analyzing fluctuation of event values and timing by saving data from the event occurrence to the event termination Event Save refers to saving data when the event occurs until the conditions are not satisfied Note After selecting Trigger Save if the first trigger condition occurs and another trigger condition occurs while collecting data the new trigger is ignored ...

Страница 266: ...ing is inserted into the first data string to indicate the trigger starting point 1 Single Condition Single Condition runs under BIT Condition WORD Condition 1 BIT Condition BIT condition checks the set device BIT value and collects data by detecting trigger when the value is either elevation descent transfer ON or OFF 2 WORD Condition Word Condition compares the set device with the input value an...

Страница 267: ...s data until the condition is met after event occurrence MW0 100 MW0 100 Release Value Cannot be Set MW0 100 Release Value 120 Saves data until the setting value after event occurrence is 120 MW0 100 MW0 100 Release Value Cannot be Set Note Release value can be set as follows If the following is not complied with an error window will appear and data input will not work Check it when setting the pa...

Страница 268: ...a at the point where the condition conversion bit is ON when the set word device value is smaller than the input set value OFF Saves data at the point where the condition conversion bit is OFF when the set word device value is smaller than the input set value Same as Above Small or Same Saves data if the condition conversion bit satisfies the set condition when the set word device value is smaller...

Страница 269: ...ion PerformsAND run with the set conditions and saves data when the result is 1 OR Condition Performs OR run with the set conditions and saves data when the result is 1 1 AND Calculation Event occurs when all relevant conditions are satisfied at a single scan The following is an example of activating Event Save When setting only with BIT condition Condition Set Device Event Occurrence Condition Co...

Страница 270: ... 5 57 When setting with combination of BIt and WORD conditions no release value set Condition Comparis on Condition Set Value Release Value Set Device Event Occurrence Condition Condition 0 Word 50 MW100 Elevation Condition 1 BIT MX15 ...

Страница 271: ... 5 58 When setting with combination of BIT and WORD conditions release value set Condition Comparison Condition Set Value Release Value Set Device Event Occurrence Condition Condition 0 Word 50 100 MW100 Elevation Condition 1 BIT MX15 ...

Страница 272: ...selecting Trigger Save if the Trigger Condition is again satisfied before data saving is complete and the trigger reoccurrence flag value increases When setting only with BIT condition Condition Set Device Event Occurrence Condition Condition 0 BIT MX1010 ON Condition 1 BIT IX0 0 1 Condition 2 BIT MX2010 Condition 3 BIT QX0 2 2 ...

Страница 273: ...n 5 60 When setting with combination of BIT and WORD conditions no release value set Condition Comparison Condition Set Value Release Value Set Device Event Occurrence Condition Condition 0 Word 50 MW10 Elevation Condition 1 BIT MX15 ...

Страница 274: ...tion 5 61 When setting with combination of BIT and WORD conditions release value set Condition Comparison Condition Set Value Release Value Set Device Event Occurrence Condition Condition 0 Word 50 100 MW10 ON Condition 1 BIT MW15 ...

Страница 275: ...ose XG5000 Project Window internal parameter data log This activates the data log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log parameter window 3 Select Event Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left ...

Страница 276: ...ndition as the Event Condition 5 Select the condition setting menu to activate the following setting window Select BIT Condition and input device values into the device window in BIT types When setting is complete the window closes and the conditions initially set at the Event Setting Condition menu are displayed as follows ...

Страница 277: ...timing of data change depending on the set value 7 Mail Transmission allows the user to receive the relevant information via e mail Select Mail Transmission to enable the mail address box A mail address can be as long as 64 characters English A warning window will be activated if the mail address format is not complied with ...

Страница 278: ...ct Window internal parameter data log This activates the data log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log parameter window 12 13 14 3 Select Event Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left ...

Страница 279: ...ndition as the Event Condition 5 Select the condition setting menu to activate the following setting window Select WORD Condition and input device values into the device window in BIT types When setting is complete the window closes and the conditions initially set at the Event Setting Condition menu are displayed as follows ...

Страница 280: ...iming of data change depending on the set value 7 Mail Transmission allows the user to receive the relevant information via e mail Select Mail Transmission to enable the mail address box A mail address can be as long as 64 characters English A warning window will be activated if the mail address format is not complied with ...

Страница 281: ...a log parameter setting window 2 Set the group to use on the data log parameter window 15 16 17 3 Select Event Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left 4 Select Event Condition and Multiple Condition to activate the condition setting window which allows for up to 4 inputs ...

Страница 282: ...he number and timing of data change depending on the set value 6 Select each condition setting menu one by one inputting specific set values Multiple Condition activates Event Condition by calculating Single Conditions using the set run method The basic setting is performed in the same way as Single Condition ...

Страница 283: ...ow closes and the conditions initially set at the Event Setting Condition menu are displayed as follows If only one Condition Setting is input after selecting Calculation Condition before finishing the setting the following phrase is displayed and the setting is not complete ...

Страница 284: ...71 Multiple OR Condition 1 The same sequence as AND Calculation Condition applies up to the Event Setting menu 2 Select Event Logging at Data Collection Method to activate Setting menu on the left Then select the Setting menu on the left ...

Страница 285: ...the timing of data saving at the Event Occurrence Condition The number and timing of data change depending on the set value 5 Select each condition setting menu one by one inputting specific set values Multiple Condition activates Event Condition by calculating Single Conditions using the set run method The basic setting is performed in the same way as Single Condition ...

Страница 286: ...ow closes and the conditions initially set at the Event Setting Condition menu are displayed as follows If only one Condition Setting is input after selecting Calculation Condition before finishing the setting the following phrase is displayed and the setting is not complete ...

Страница 287: ...tory Saves data in the maximum number of saved files 256 files folder and then goes back to the beginning to delete old files and save the latest history When the maximum files are saved after selecting Overwrite with Latest History the file save excess flag value increases See 5 10 Flag List If the 10 or less of the SD memory storage is free the data are written over the file first saved The over...

Страница 288: ...iving information at the pre entered E mail address when the event set at Event Save occurs The E mail address should comply with the e mail address format and can be as long as 64 characters English Upon Event Occurrence The transmitted information consists of the following Please make sure to select Send E mail at the Event Settings parameter setting window Caution If an event occurs again while...

Страница 289: ...MOTE available Formatting Mode 7 Fast Formatting 1 File System Rules of Saving Files into Disk 2 Supported SD memory Capacity MMC card not supported 2GByte 16GByte SD memory supported SD SDHC supported Micro SD not supported 3 Allotted Cluster Size Minimum Unit for File Saving 4 Sector Minimum Unit for Data Saving Default 512 Byte 5 Volume Label SD memory Card Name 6 PLC Operation Mode Operates on...

Страница 290: ... and allotted unit size are Default values that are read when connecting the SD memory Also only fast formatting is supported Volume label should be in English and can be as long as 10 characters After setting as indicated above press Start to begin formatting The status bar indicates the current progress Ex when a 8G memory is connected Caution Detaching the SD memory with force power off or rese...

Страница 291: ...changed during SD memory formatting 2 Completion Phrase FOO321 Bit turns ON when formatting is complete In this case the following completion window appears If formatting failed an error window appears along with the relevant code SD Detachment File System Damage PLC Mode Change F Area Address Flag Name Description FW0032 _SD_FMT_INFO SD memory formatting information BIT FX0512 _SD_FMT_RUN SD memo...

Страница 292: ...r When this happens format the memory before connecting it 3 SD Memory LOCK Status Check If the lock slide switch on the top left side of the SD memory is set to Lock an error occurs when connecting the SD memory for the first tie and the data log function does not run 4 Memory Diagnosis after Power On Off In case a sudden power off or reset stops data saving into the SD memory while data log is r...

Страница 293: ...data log function after selecting a certain group the file sequence progresses from Number 0 When executing data log function on multiple groups files are first created for Group 0 and progresses sequentially to Group 9 Selecting Do Not Use at the Group Setting will stop fie saving in the current group and files creating will move into the next group Group Name Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Grou...

Страница 294: ...erform a separate file conversion files are saved after the existing saved files Setting Save Data Parameter First Parameter Data TypeLINT No of Settings1 Save Method Regular Save History Setting Overwrite with the latest history File Conversion Point File Size 100KB Change Parameter Data TypeLINT No of Settings1 Save Method Regular Save History Setting Overwrite with the first history File Conver...

Страница 295: ...sfy IEC61000 4 2 Number of Detachments Up to 10 000 times Current Consumption Up to 100mA when reading writing Number of Read Writes Up to 100 000 times for SLC Size 32mm 24mm 2 1mm Writing Prevention Use the lock switch on the SD memory card Recommended Products SanDisk Transcend Note Data log function of high performance XGB is capable of using all SD memories that satisfy the specifications abo...

Страница 296: ...h which response data of the SD memory is transmitted upon request from PLC VSS Signal Ground SCLK Sync CLK signal of DO DI signal VCC 3 3V supply socket VSS Signal Ground DI A signal line through which the data requested by PLC is transmitted to the SD memory CS SD Memory Selection Signal Line LOCK SW Slide Lock ...

Страница 297: ...fying that the SD memory writing is not being performed 2 Time Required when Suspending SD Memory Writing In cases of using K area flag to turn off the data log permission flag while data saving is in progress all data collected before reception of the relevant flag command are saved into the SD memory and then the data log operation stops Therefore a small time is required until the data log func...

Страница 298: ...y cause abnormal data saving Also the file system may be damaged and not recognized the SD memory and the files In cases of power off during data saving the SD memory diagnosis function is activated and other PLC functions are not performed during that time approximately 15 seconds ...

Страница 299: ...ta Log Function 5 86 4 Use of Cover to Prevent SD Memory Detachment When connecting SD memory to the high performance PLC se the direction properly Also please use a cover to prevent SD memory detachment due to vibration ...

Страница 300: ...for SD memory access Note SD memory state may affect scan time and saving performance SD memory should be formatted before use When using the SD memory for a long time formatting on a regular basis is required to maintain performance SD Memory Capacity Actual Capacity Capacity Used by Data Log 2G 1 83G About 1 5GByte 4G 3 76G About 3 3GByte 8G 7 39G About 6 6GByte 16G 14 8G About 13 2GByte ...

Страница 301: ... Code KW4022 WORD _DL_0_File_Index Group 0 Save File Index Save File Index Range 0 255 KW4023 WORD _DL_0_File_Overwrite_Cnt Group 0 File Overwrite Count File Overwrite Count Address Data Type Variable Function Description KW4000 WORD _DL_En Data Log Setting Data Log Setting Flag Sets the BIT that corresponds to the set group Ex Group 3 in use Bit 3 ON Group 3 not in use Bit 3 OFF KX64016 BIT _DL_R...

Страница 302: ...DL_0_Trig_ReCnt Group 0 Trigger Condition Reoccurrence Count Count of ignoring triggers that reoccurred before Trigger Save is complete KX64528 BIT _DL_0_Evt_State Group 0 Trigger Event Condition Occurrence State Trigger Event Condition Occurrence State 0 Stop 1 Running KW4034 WORD _DL_0_Evt_Cnt Group 0 Event Condition Occurrence Count Event Condition Occurrence Count KW4035 KW4039 RESERVED 2 Para...

Страница 303: ...y is damaged Please format the memory before use Power off before STOP 0x0010 DATALOG Folder Comparison Error Format in FAT32 format and connect SD memory Another folder exists apart from DATALOG folder 0x0011 Group Folder Comparison Error Format in FAT32 format and connect SD memory Folder of another group than the parameter exists 0x0020 Sector Error Format in FAT32 format and connect SD memory ...

Страница 304: ...e 0x000C Shut Down Error Power off may lead to data loss If data is not saved it means the file system inside the SD memory is damaged Please format the memory before use Power off before STOP 0x1000 Group No X Folder Creation Error Format in FAT32 format and connect SD memory 0x2000 Group No X File Open Error Format in FAT32 format and connect SD memory 0x3000 Group No X File Save Location Search...

Страница 305: ...f setting data log for a 100ms scan program the scan time may increase up to 130ms 5 11 2 Save Performance by Scan time The following figures are save performance measurement by save intervals and number of set data saved These measurements represent relative values The actual vales may vary depending on the program setting parameter and SD memory applied You can use it as a reference when using d...

Страница 306: ...me Index information included File Save 16MByte SD MEMORY CARD SanDisk 2G 2 Results Measurement taken under the conditions above showed the following results The table below does not represent absolute values in actual use please consider the scan time and settings Number of Devices Unit 4 WORD 4 WORD 1 Group 8 WORD 8 WORD 1 Group 32 WORD 32 WORD 1 Group 64 WORD 32 WORD 2 Group 320 WORD 32 WORD 10...

Страница 307: ... 129ms 644ms 1 000ms BYTE 16ms 65ms 128ms 643ms 1 000ms WORD 15ms 66ms 128ms 643ms 1 000ms DWORD 15ms 65ms 128ms 643ms 2 000ms LWORD 16ms 66ms 129ms 645ms 4 000ms INT 15ms 65ms 128ms 642ms 1 000ms DINT 16ms 66ms 129ms 644ms 2 000ms LINT 17ms 66ms 130ms 645ms 4 000ms UINT 15ms 65ms 129ms 644ms 1 000ms UDINT 16ms 67ms 129ms 645ms 2 000ms ULINT 16ms 66ms 130ms 646ms 4 000ms USINT 16ms 66ms 129ms 645m...

Страница 308: ...ure represents the flow from data log function performed by high performance XGB to saving into SD memory Details are as follows Stage Operation Note 1 Data Collection High performance XGB collects data and saves them into the buffer inside PLC Although data are collected under the conditions scan designated interval set by the parameter data may not be collected as per the set conditions dependin...

Страница 309: ...ing interval Decrease the amount of data collected at each sampling Disable FTP file transmission 3 Verification of Data Collection Processing Time Verify the items below to check whether the collected data are being properly saved into the SD memory Verification Description and Solution Note Buffer Excess Count Flag Description Verify whether buffer excess count inArea K is 0 If it is not 0 it me...

Страница 310: ...of other control methods since control device can be applied to the system after mathematical analysis of system if system or the requirement of the user changes the analysis of system is done again But in case of PID control PID device copes with change of system or requirement of the user with simple auto tunings without analysis of system rapidly The figure 6 1 is example indicating system conf...

Страница 311: ...ascade operation realizing quick and precise PID control It can increase quickness of response to disturbance through cascade loop 8 Various additional functions PID control can be achieved by various methods a user wishes because set value ramp the present value follow up limiting change of values and types of alarm functions are provided 6 2 Basic Theory of PID Control Heredescribes basic theory...

Страница 312: ...Process value At this system we assume that the PID parameter is specified as shown below to describe the PID control operation Items Value Items Value Output temperature of heating system PV 0 Proportional coefficient KP 5 Target temperature SV 50 Integral time Ti 3s Cycle of operation 0 01s Derivative time Td 0 19s Table 6 1 example of control of heating system At this system if we assume that t...

Страница 313: ... 50 5 0 50 1 50 5 44 98 5 02 2 50 5 53 08 3 08 3 50 5 50 15 0 15 4 50 5 48 42 1 58 5 50 5 48 28 1 72 6 50 5 48 44 1 56 7 50 5 48 49 1 51 8 50 5 48 49 1 51 9 50 5 48 49 1 51 Table 6 2 example of Proportional control Figure 6 2 simulation of proportional control b Concerning the result of simulation it has themaximum overshoot of about 23 4 at 0 62s and after 7s it converges at 48 49 with offset of ...

Страница 314: ... 0 1 50 45 02 63 46 46 67 2 50 53 11 42 52 46 77 3 50 50 15 47 93 41 38 4 50 50 22 47 25 41 60 5 50 48 27 46 96 43 30 6 50 48 35 46 92 43 25 7 50 48 44 46 90 43 21 8 50 48 53 46 90 43 18 9 50 48 53 46 90 43 18 Table 6 3 Temperature time table according to P coefficient Figure 6 3 Temperature time graph according to P coefficient c Consideringtable6 3 as Pcoefficient decreases offset increases buto...

Страница 315: ...et temp Proportional coefficient Integral time P Control PI Control 0 50 2 5 1 5 0 0 1 50 2 5 1 5 63 46 74 41 2 50 2 5 1 5 42 52 40 63 3 50 2 5 1 5 47 93 52 99 4 50 2 5 1 5 47 05 49 67 5 50 2 5 1 5 46 96 49 70 6 50 2 5 1 5 47 12 50 38 7 50 2 5 1 5 47 03 49 76 8 50 2 5 1 5 47 07 50 14 9 50 2 5 1 5 47 06 49 94 10 50 2 5 1 5 47 06 50 02 11 50 2 5 1 5 47 06 49 99 12 50 2 5 1 5 47 06 50 00 13 50 2 5 1 ...

Страница 316: ...ershoot is larger According tosystem large overshootcanbeproblem In ordertosolve this PID control is used 5 Proportionalintegralderivative control PIDcontrol In Dcontrol whenstatus of system changes rapidly D control yields theoutputtoreducetheerror Namely Dcontrol yields the outputproportionaltochangevelocityofcurrentstatus Soif Dcontrol is used responsespeed ofcontroller aboutstatuschange of sys...

Страница 317: ...9 52 50 4 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 49 67 50 92 5 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 49 70 50 34 6 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 50 38 50 12 7 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 49 76 50 05 8 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 50 14 50 02 9 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 49 94 50 01 10 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 50 02 50 00 11 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 49 99 50 00 12 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 50 00 50 00 13 50 2 5 1 5 0 3 50 00 50 00 Table6 5comparison of PIcontrol andPIDcontrol Figure6 6comparisonof PIcontrol and PIDcontrol d Con...

Страница 318: ...PID Error Flag Off by loops Error PID Error Flag On Error code occurrence by loops Warning Normal PID Warning Flag Off by loops Error PID Warning Flag On Warning code occurrence by loops Control operation Control of P PI PD and PID control of forward reverse operation Control interval 10 0ms 6 553 6ms 0 1msUnit Additional functions PWM output Supportable Mixed forward reverse output Supportable Li...

Страница 319: ...s Here it explains parameters to use PID control functions and how to set them 1 PID parametersettings Followthestepsbelowtosetthe PIDcontrolfunctionparameters ofXGBseries a If selectingthebuilt inparameters in Parameterof theprojectwindow itshows the built in parametersettingwindowas in belowfigure Figure 6 7 Parameters setting window b If selectingPIDControl itshows the PIDcontrol parametersetti...

Страница 320: ...filter value Set the filter coefficient of differential operation 0 65 535 PWM junction Set the junction to which PWM output is out P20 P3F PWM output cycle Set the output cycle of PWM output 100 65 535 Set value ramp Set the frequency of set value ramp 0 65 535 Present value follow up Set the follow up frequency of the present value follow up function 0 65 535 Min present value Set the min value ...

Страница 321: ...ngsaturatedfor a longwhile untilthe drift becomes negative and the integralterm turns smallenough Duetothe operation thePVmayhave a large over shoot asseenin thefigure Sucha wind upphenomenonmayoccur if the initial drift is large orbya large disturbanceorduetomalfunction of a device The PIDfunction ofXGBseries is basicallywith the integralaccumulationpreventionfunction cutting offanyintegral accum...

Страница 322: ...gral operation is getting weaker The scopeisrealnumberattheunitof second i Differentialtime Itsets the differential timeof PIDloop in question Td As larger the differentialtime thedifferential operation is gettingstronger Thescope is realnumberattheunit ofsecond j Limitingchangeof presentvalue Itsets the limitofchange inpresent value of PID loop inquestion If PVsuddenlychanges duetosignalcomponent...

Страница 323: ...ningCodes m Min MV Itsets themin valueofcontroloutputthatmaybe outputbytheresult of PID operation Theavailablescopeis between 32 768 32 767 If it is smallerthan themin output valuedesignatedbyPID operationresult itoutputs thesetmin MV and alerts themin outputshortagewarning Forthetypes anddescription of warnings referto Error WarningCodes n Manual MV Itsets the outputwhen the operationmode ismanua...

Страница 324: ...s thefrequencyof PID operationcycle taken from when SVstarts changingto when itreaches tothefinal SV Forinstance if SV is tobechangedfrom 1000 to 2000 during operationas PID operation cycle is 10msandits SVrampis 500 SVmayreachto 2000after 500X10ms 5seconds thatis as it increases each2 per operationcycle and afterthe500th operationscans The availablescopeof setting is between 0 65 535 and itis set...

Страница 325: ... _PID_PAUSE Bit RUN PID pause 0 RUN 1 pause K12020 F KX19232 47 _PID_REV Bit Forward Control direction 0 forward 1 reverse operation control K12030 F KX19248 63 _PID_AW2D Bit Disabled Dual integral accumulation Prevention 0 enabled 1 disabled K12040 F KX19264 79 _PID_REM_RUN Bit Disabled PID remote operation 0 disabled 1 enabled K1205 K1207 KW1205 KW1207 Reserved WORD Reserved area K12080 F KX1932...

Страница 326: ... INT 0 PID SV of current cycle K1251 1255 KW1251 1255 Reserved WORD Reserved area Loop 1 K1256 K1295 KW1256 KW1295 PID Loop1 control parameter Loop16 K1816 K1855 KW1816 KW1855 PID Loop16 control parameter Table 6 8 K area flags for PID control continued K1200 K1211 areas are the common bit areas of PID loops while each bit represents the status of each PID control loop Therefore each 16 bits the m...

Страница 327: ... a longer time until the PV is going to SV once system status is largely changed during pause If the bit is off it cancels pause if on it operates as paused 3 _PID_REV PIDRUN directionsetting It sets the RUN direction of PID control of n th loop For more information about run direction refer to 7 2 3 PID control parameter setting If the bit is off it operates normally if on it operates reversely 4...

Страница 328: ...ring PID control operation of a loop it is on while if it is normal it is off At the moment despite of warning PID control continues without interruption but it is desirable to check warning information and take a proper measure Once a warning occurs the warning code is also indicated in warning code area of a loop For more information about the types of warning codes and measures refer to 6 5 In ...

Страница 329: ...rmation about SV refer to 6 2 3 PID control parameter setting The available scope is between 32 768 32 767 2 _PIDxx_T_s PID xx Loop operation cycle It sets indicates the operation cycle of PID control of xx th loop For more information about operation cycle refer to 6 2 3 PID control parameter setting The available scope is between 100 65 535 3 _PIDxx_K_p PID xx Loop proportional constant It sets ...

Страница 330: ...control parameter setting If it is set as 0 the PV change limit function does not work 7 _PIDxx_d_MV_max MV change limit It sets the MV change limit of xx th loop For more information about MV change limit refer to 6 2 3 PID control parameter setting If it is set as 0 the MV change limit function does not work Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope _PIDxx_T_i PID xx Loop integral time K1220...

Страница 331: ...re the xx th PID control loop The flag as a dedicated monitoring flag would be updated by PLC although a user directly enters it 11 _PIDxx_MV Control MV The area shows the MV of xx th PID control loop As the area in which XGB built in PID operation result is output every PID control cycle it delivers the value in the area to U device every scanning by using commands like MOV in the program and out...

Страница 332: ...t 14 _PIDxx_DB_W DeadBand setting It sets the deadband of xx th loop For more information about Deadband function refer to 6 2 3 PID control parameter setting If it is set as 0 the function does not work 15 _PIDxx_Td_lag Differential filter coefficient It sets the differential filter coefficient of xx th loop For more information about differential filter coefficient refer to 6 2 3 PID control par...

Страница 333: ...nformation about PV follow up refer to 6 2 3 PID control parameter setting If it is set as 0 the function does not work 20 _PIDxx_PV_MIN _PIDxx_PV_MAX Min PV input Max PV input It sets the min max PV of xx th loop Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope _PID00_PWM PWM output junction setting K1242 16 xx KW1242 16 xx WORD H 20 H 3F Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope _PIDxx_PWM_Prd ...

Страница 334: ...SV SV of the present cycle It indicates SV currently running of xx th loop If SV is changing due to SV ramp or PV follow up function it shows the currently changing PV The flag as a dedicated monitoring is updated although a user directly enters it It describes PID control commands used in XGB series The command type of PID control used in XGB series built in PID Flag name Address IEC type address...

Страница 335: ..._MAX_ERR Maximum manipulated value is set to be smaller than minimum manipulatedvalue 16 0200 PV_MIN_MAX_ERR Maximum current value is set to be smaller than current manipulated value 16 0300 PWM_PERIOD_ERR PWMoutputcycleissettobesmallerthan100 10ms 16 0400 SV_RANGE_ERR In case of forward operation set value at start of auto tuning is smaller than current value In case of reverse operation set valu...

Страница 336: ...ade control Looking at the figure it is found that cascade control contains slave loop control within external control loop That is the control output of external loop PID control is entered as SV of the internal loop control Therefore if steam valve suffers from disturbance in the figure single loop PID control may not be modified until PV y s appears while cascade control is structured to remove...

Страница 337: ...a Commencement of mixed run If PIDHBC command starts first it starts reverse run when PV is higher than SV it starts forward run if PV is lower than SV b Conversion of RUN direction The conversion of run direction is executed according to the following principles In case of forward operation run it keeps running by converting to reverse operation once PV is over SV DeadBand value At the moment the...

Страница 338: ...kes critical oscillation by force and uses the width and period of oscillation to specify the PID coefficient It applies max output and min output to control system for auto tuning Then oscillation with steady period and steady width occurs around the Set value like figure 6 15 and it can calculate the boundary gain by using it like expression 6 3 1 Figure 6 15 Relay auto tuning width output Min o...

Страница 339: ...on PWM output Supportable Hysteresis Supportable Table 6 10 Spec of built in PID auto tuning function 6 6 3 Auto tuning Parameter Setting To use the XGB series auto tuning function it is necessary to start it by using a command after setting auto tuning parameters by loops in the parameter window It explains the parameters to use auto tuning function and how to set them 1 Auto tuning parameter set...

Страница 340: ...uning MV 0 65 535 Table 6 11 Auto tuning function parameter setting items 2 Description of auto tuning parameters and how to set them a RUN direction RUN direction is to set the direction of auto tuning run of a loop The available option is forward or reverse The former forward means that PV increase when MV increases while the latter reverse means PV decreases when MV increases For instance a hea...

Страница 341: ...t at a unit of integer per 0 1ms e Max min MV It sets the max min value of output for auto tuning The available scope is between 32 768 32 767 If the max MV is set lower than min MV the auto tuning function of a loop generates an error and does not work f Hysteresis setting Looking at relay tuning in Figure 6 15 it shows it outputs the max MV as auto tuning starts but it converts to min output as ...

Страница 342: ...rmal 1 error K1859 KW1859 Reserved WORD Reserved area Loop0 K1860 KW1860 _AT00_SV INT 0 ATSV loop 00 K1861 KW1861 _AT00_T_s WORD 100 AToperation cycle T_s 0 1msec K1862 KW1862 _AT00_MV_max INT 4000 AT MV max value limit K1863 KW1863 _AT00_MV_min INT 0 AT MV min value limit K1864 KW1864 _AT00_PWM WORD 0 ATPWM junction setting K1865 KW1865 _AT00_PWM_Prd WORD 0 ATPWM output cycle K1866 KW1866 _AT00_H...

Страница 343: ... the MV is output as the min output set in the parameter Also if an error occurs it indicates the error code in the error code area of a loop For more information about error code types and measures refer to 6 5 The area as a dedicated monitor area is updated although a user directly enters it B Auto tuning flag area by loops The auto tuning flag areas by loops are K1860 K2179 and each 20 words pe...

Страница 344: ...e is between 100 65 535 at the unit of 0 1ms 6 _ATxx_HYS_val Hysteresis setting It sets the hysteresis of xx th loop For more information about hysteresis function refer to 6 3 3 Auto Tuning Parameter Setting If it is set as 0 it does not work Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope _PIDxx_T_s Auto tuning xx Loop operation cycle K1861 16 xx KW1861 16 xx WORD 100 65 535 Flag name Address IEC ...

Страница 345: ... PID control the entry from a sensor is saved into U device through input devices such asA D input module and it moves the value to _ATxx_PV by using commands such as MOV every scanning executing auto tuning 11 _ATxx_MV Auto tuning MV It is the area to output MV of xx th auto tuning loop Every auto tuning cycle it saves XGB auto tuning and it delivers the value in the area by using commands like M...

Страница 346: ...ons The commands used in XGB series auto tuning are as follows 1 PIDAT PIDAT is a command to execute auto tuning by loops Operand S means the loop no to execute auto tuning and avaiable only for constant 0 15 If start signal contact is on the PID control of a loop starts ...

Страница 347: ...s explained as follows 1 XGB basic unit The XGB basic unit operates by PID control operating PID control operation It receives PV fromA D input module XBF AD04A executes the built in PID control operation output the MV to D A XBF DV04A and executes PID control 2 A D input module XBF AD04A It functions as receiving PV of an object to control from a water level sensor and delivering it to basic unit...

Страница 348: ...ts control input between 0 10V 6 7 2 Example of PID Auto tuning Here with examples it explains how to calculate proportional constant integral time and differential time by using PID auto tuning function 1 PID auto tuning parameter setting a If double clicking Parameter Built in Parameter PID Auto tuning parameter in the project window it opens up the auto tuning parameter setting window as illust...

Страница 349: ...ry to set it because the example does not use PWM output Hysteresis setting 10 2 A D input module parameter setting a If double clicking Parameter I O parameter it opens up the setting window as illustrated in figure 6 19 Figure 6 19 I O parameter setting window b If selecting A D module for a slot in A D input module it opens up the setting window as illustrated in Figure 6 20 Figure 6 20 A D inp...

Страница 350: ...and delivers it to basic unit In the case the resolving power of digital value 1 is 10 4000 2 5mV Filter process averaging disabled The example sets the input values in order that filter process and averaging are not available For more information about each function refer to 12 Analog I O Module 3 D A Output Module Parameter setting a Set the parameter of D A output module XBF DV04A that output M...

Страница 351: ...ch PV is entered for LOOP 0 auto tuning KW1876 INT Device to which auto tuning MV of LOOP 0 is output KW1863 INT Min MV of auto tuning designated in parameter b Program explanation 1 Since F0099 always on is ON if PLC is converted form STOP to RUN CH0 of A D and D A starts operating 2 At the moment PV entered to CH0 is moved to K1875 the input device of PV and saved accordingly 3 Once M0000 juncti...

Страница 352: ...itor window Variable Device Selection window appears Select Item as PID deselect ViewAll and enter 0 means loop number in Parameter No K area device list to save every setting and status of loop 0 appears as shown Figure 6 22 Then if selecting a variable to monitor and clicking OK a selected device is registered to variable monitor window as illustrated in Figure 6 23 Through the monitor window a ...

Страница 353: ...nitor the operation status of auto tuning clearly a If selecting Monitor Trend monitor menu it shows the trend monitor widow as illustrated in Figure 6 24 Figure 6 24 Trend Monitor window b If right clicking trend setting a user can select a variable to monitor as illustrated in Figure 6 25 Figure 6 25 window to register trend monitor variable c For more information about trend monitor refer to XG...

Страница 354: ...tuning 3 PID parameter setting a If double clicking Parameter Built in Parameter PID PID Parameter it shows the built in PID parameter setting window as seen in Figure 6 26 Figure 6 26 Auto tuning parameter setting window b Set each parameter and click OK In the example Loop 0 is set as follows RUN mode automatic Set as automatic in order that PID control is executed as the built in PID operation ...

Страница 355: ... is 4000 XBF DV04A outputs 10V DeadBand 0 It is set as 0 because the example does not use DeadBand function Differential filter setting 0 it is also set as 0 because the example does not use differential filter Min MV 0 Min MV is set as 0 If MV is 0 XBF DV04A outputs 0V PWM junction PWM output cycle It is not necessary to set them because the example does not use PWM output SV ramp PV follow up 0 ...

Страница 356: ...D input module U03 02 0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 3 D A output module U02 02 INT PV entered to A D input module U03 03 INT MV entered to D A output module K1875 INT Device to which PV is entered for LOOP 0 auto tuning K1876 INT Device to which auto tuning MV of LOOP 0 is output K18677 BIT Junction that is on once auto tuning is complete K18580 BIT Junction that is on once auto tuning ...

Страница 357: ... PV entered to CH0 is moved to K1875 the PV input device of loop 0 and saved accordingly c The auto tuning MV of Loop 0 output by PIDAT command is output to D A output module by line 11 MOV command d Once auto tuning is complete it moves P I D coefficients generated from auto tuning to the input devices of P I and D K1218 K1220 and K1222 sets M001 and starts the operation of PID loop 0 3 In case o...

Страница 358: ...o tuning is reverse H 0005 PWM_ADDRESS_ERR It occurs when the junction designated as PWM output junction is beyond between P20 P3F H 0006 P_GAIN_SET_ERR It occurs when proportional constant is set lower than 0 H 0007 I_TIME_SET_ERR It occurs when integral time is set lower than 0 H 0008 D_TIME_SET_ERR It occurs when differential time is set lower than 0 H 0009 CONTROL_MODE_ERR It occurs when contr...

Страница 359: ... is desirable to set PID operation cycle longer than PLC scan time H 0003 PID_dPV_WARN It occurs when the PV change of PID cycle exceeds PV change limit H 0004 PID_dMV_WARN It occurs when the PV cycle MV change exceeds MV change limit H 0005 PID_MV_MAX_WARN It occurs when the calculated MV of PID cycle exceeds the max MV H 0006 PID_MV_MIN_WARN It occurs when the calculated MV of PID cycle is small...

Страница 360: ... positioning address and operation method operation pattern is available to set up to 400 for each axis With this operation data positioning for each axis is available a Various sing axis operations are available 1 Position Control 2 Speed Control 3 Feed Control 4 Multi axis Synchronous Start 5 Point Operation b Various Multi axis Operations are available 1 Circular arc Interpolation up to 2 group...

Страница 361: ...rocess The start time of positioning is less than 5 1 when continuous operation is not used In addition there is no delay time between axes in synchronous start and interpolation start 4 Easy maintenance Various data such as operation data operation parameter are saved on FLASH Memory in PLC Therefore data will be saved permanently Max writing count of the flash memory is 100 000 5 Self diagnosis ...

Страница 362: ...l driving devices such as servo driving devices or stepping motor In application it can be used widely with engineering machine semiconductor assembly machine grinder small machine center lifter etc Fig 1 2 Overview of Position Control for Servo Motor Fig 1 1 Overview of Position Control for Stepping Motor CPU Module XBC DN32UP Program Setting Data Deviation Counter D A Speed order Servo Servo Mot...

Страница 363: ... PM External Signal Encoder Writing sequence Program Working by Servo drive Setting for control Operation parameter Operation data Cam data Common parameter Test Operation Indirect Start Direct Start Jog Operation etc Monitoring operation of XPM module Servo drive and executing test Command position pulse output Upper Lower Limit DOG HOME EMG STP External Signal Servo on Servo alarm reset ...

Страница 364: ...starting position and goal position Starting Position Goal Position Forward Positioning Operation Starting Position Goal Position Reverse Positioning Operation Example Starting Position 1000 Goal Position 8000 Value of Forward movement is 7000 7000 8000 1000 1000 Starting Position Goal Position 0 8000 Movement Value 7000 2 Control by Incremental Coordinates a Execute positioning control from start...

Страница 365: ...signated by positioning data 2 Positioning control is executed based on origin designated in homing 3 Movement direction is designated by starting position goal position of each axis Starting position Goal position Positioning operation with forward direction Starting position Goal position Positioning operation with reverse direction Y axis Forward direction X axis Forward direction Y1 Y2 X1 X2 X...

Страница 366: ...ection Y axis Forward direction X axis Forward direction Y1 Y2 X1 X2 X axis mo2ement 2al1e Y axis mo2ement 2al1e X axis Re2erse direction Y axis Re2erse direction Linear interpolation end position X2 Y2 Starting position X1 Y1 Mo2ement by Linear interpolation Example Starting position 1000 4000 Goal position 9000 3000 In this condition operation is as follows 0 Linear in0erpola0ion end posi0ion Y ...

Страница 367: ...ar interpolation through the designated middle point 2 There will be a circular arc whose center point is crossing point of perpendicular bisection between starting position and middle point or middle point and goal position Reverse direction Forward direction Forward direction Origin Center point of circular arc Goal position Middle point position Starting point Reverse direction 3 Control unit d...

Страница 368: ...osition Goal position Operating by circular interpolation Reverse Direction 3 Control unit degree is not available to be used for circular interpolation control 4 Direction is determined in setting of Cir int mode Center point CW Center point CCW c Circular interpolation with radius designation form 1 Starts operating from starting position and execute circular interpolation along trace of circula...

Страница 369: ...rpolation synchronously 2 It is available to execute helical interpolation of more than 360 depending on Circular interpolation turns setting 3 The combination of axis that used for helical interpolation control is unlimited 3 axes among axis1 4 are used Z X Y Straight interpolation Part Center Position Starting Position Circular interpolation part Helical Interpolation End position ...

Страница 370: ...signated speed until Dec stop command 2 Speed control has forward operation and reverse operation a Forward operation Position value 0 b Reverse operation Position value 0 3 In case of speed control M code will be on only when M code mode is With 4 Operating Timing It will not be ON even though stop Time Speed Operation Command In Operation Signal of positioning complete Stop command ...

Страница 371: ...uch as movement value already set 2 Movement direction is decided by movement value 3 Feed control has forward direction operation and reverse direction operation a Forward direction Position value 0 b Reverse direction Position value 0 4 Operation timing is as follows Time Speed Start In operation Position Current position value is 0 when start Time ...

Страница 372: ...NG Positioning method Absolute method Incremental method Position address range Absolute Incremental Speed Position Position Speed Switching control 214748364 8 214748364 7 214748364 8 214748364 7 214748364 8 214748364 7 Inch 21474 83648 21474 83647 21474 83648 21474 83647 21474 83648 21474 83647 degree 21474 83648 21474 83647 21474 83648 21474 83647 21474 83648 21474 83647 pulse 2147483648 214748...

Страница 373: ...DN32UP Control Period 1 5 when continuous operation is used Max output speed 2 Mpps PHASE 2500kpps Max connection distance 10m Error indication Indicated by LED Connector 40 Pin connector 2EA Size of use cable AWG 24 Current consumption Max 800mA Weight 660g ...

Страница 374: ... 4 26 4V DC 16V 3mA DC 4V 1mA Approx 5 15 1 Home DC 5V 5mA DC 4 25 5 5V DC 3V 3mA DC 1V 1mA Approx 1 73 0 2 Manual pulse generator Encoder input DC 5V 10mA DC 4 25 5 5V DC 3V 5 0mA DC 1V 0 3mA Approx 300Ω 1us 이하 Encoder input based on RS 422ALine Driver Level Am26LS31 Active Low 1 Pulsewidth 2 Phase difference 1 The response timeis associated with the control period response timecan beup to 1ms wh...

Страница 375: ... be selected from pulse output mode of basic parameterfor program and XG PM S W Package Pulseoutput mode settable in basic parameter of XG PM or program Pulse output level settable infrom common parameter of XG PM or program is as follows Pulse outputmode Outputsignallevel High Active Low Active Forward Reverse Forward Reverse CW CCW CW CCW PLS DIR PULSE Dir PHASE A B Servo On Servo Alarm Reset DC...

Страница 376: ...G B Manualpulsegenerator Encoder B input 20C 19C 20D 19D NC Not used 18D 18C 18B 18A FP Forward Pulse output Differential 17D 17C 17B 17A FP Forward Pulse output Differential 16D 16C 16B 16A RP Reverse Pulse output Differential 15D 15C 15B 15A RP Reverse Pulse output Differential 14D 14C 14B 14A OV Upper Limit 13D 13C 13B 13A OV Lower Limit 12D 12C 12B 12A DOG DOG 11D 11C 11B 11A EMG Emergency Sto...

Страница 377: ...Phase B 15D 15C 15B 15A RP Pulse R CC DIR Phase B b Input signal External Circuit Pin No Internal circuit Signal AX4 AX3 AX2 AX1 14A 14B 14C 14D OV Upper limit signal B contact point 13A 13B 13C 13D OV Lower limit signal B contact point 12A 12B 12C 12D DOG DOG 11A 11B 11C 11D EMG STOP EmergencyStopSignal External Stop Signal 10A 10B 10C 10D COM Common 0V 0V DOG EMG STOP 9A 9B 9C 9D DR Drive readys...

Страница 378: ...ervo On output 6A 6B 6C 6D ARMRST ServoAlarmReset output 5A 5B 5C 5D SVON RSTCOM Servo On output AlarmReset Common d Manual pulse generator input encoder input Low Active Classification Pin No Internal circuit Signal 20A MPGA EncoderA input 20B MPGA EncoderA input 19A MPG B Encoder B input 19B MPG B Encoder B input Line driver DC5V A 0V 5V A B B Encoder ...

Страница 379: ...on LED AX1 AX4 1 Operating indication On during operation of the corresponding axis Off when the corresponding axis stops 2 Error indication On or Off No Error Blinking error of the corresponding axis LED of axis having error would be blinking External connector Connector for drive input encoder ...

Страница 380: ...te and Parameters of Positioning Module in XG PM and Download to Module Write Positioning Program with XG5000 Operate Positioning Program END Connect computer and USB port of PLC Upper limit signal Lower limit signal DOG signal HOME signal Emergency stop Dec stop signal Drive ready signal Servo On output Signal Servo Alarm Reset output signal Basic Parameter Extended Parameter Home Parameter Manua...

Страница 381: ...put the wiring remnants to PLC inside Install on the good place to operate Do not install the high voltage machine on the same Panel The distance from duct or surrounding module shall be more than 50mm Ground to the place where surrounding noise environment is good enough 3 2 2 Notices in Handling Here describes the notices in handling the positioning module from opening to installation 1 Do not f...

Страница 382: ...re machine or material or it is directly contacted to the oil for a long time the short circuit will occur that may cause the damage or malfunction 5 Make sure to check the polarity before applying the external contact signal to the terminal board 6 In case of wiring the high voltage cable and power cables together the induction noise occurs that may cause the malfunction or failure 7 In case of w...

Страница 383: ...8 21 38 10 SG SG EMG SON RES TL LSP LSN VIN VDD CR SG PP PPR NP NPR RD LZ LZR VDD ZSP ALM LG N15R TLAN LG SD 28 26 27 30 50 29 TLAP 4 3 1 MO1 MO2 MOG X C DN32UP CN3 CN2 Power 3PhaseAC200V MR H A DC24V Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DEC Stop 5V A B 0V MPG DR 8 DR_COM 9 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 SVON ALMRST COM 5 RP RP 15 18 FP 17 FP 16 4 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STP 10 COM 13 12 ALMRST SVON 6 7 20A MPG A 20B ...

Страница 384: ...4 PC 8 TL 9 LSP 16 LSN 17 SG 10 SG 20 VDD 3 COM 13 ALM 18 ZSP 19 TLC 6 P15R 11 TLA 12 LG 1 SD Plate CN1E TE11 MR J2S A U V W PE PE HC MF HA FF Series motor U V W E EMG 24VDC CN2 B1 B2 SM Electronicbrake Detecto 2 1 12 TxD RxD LG 11 5 15 LG LG LG 4 3 14 13 Plate GND RS CS DR ER CN3 A A Monitoroutput Max 10mA 10k 10k Personal computer Within2m Within2m MC DR 8 DR_COM 9 RP RP 15 18 FP 17 FP 16 SVON R...

Страница 385: ... MC Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop 5V A B 0V MPG X C DN32UP CutoffbyOFFalarmsignal ofServoONsignal N P1 P2 4 DOCOM 46 DICOM 20 Interface DC24V OPC 12 PP 10 PG 11 NP 35 NG 36 RD 49 CR 41 LZ 8 LZR 9 LG 3 SD Plate EMG 42 SON 15 RES 19 PC 17 TL 18 LSP 43 LSN 44 DOCOM 47 DICOM 21 ALM 48 ZSP 23 TLC 25 INP 24 P15R 1 TLA 27 LG 28 SD Plate CN1 8 TRE 4 3 5 SDP SDN RDP 6 1 7 RDN LG LG RDP RDN SDP SD...

Страница 386: ...3 SG SVON RST COM 5 DR 9 RP RP 15 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 8 DR_COM 4 ARMRST 6 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 13 12 SVON 7 DC24V Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop 20A MPG A 20B MPG A 19A MPG B 19B MPG B 5V A B 0V MPG RA1 RA2 Zerospeed Error MonitorMax 1mA X C DN32UP Within10m Within2m Power 3phaseAC200V ServoMotor SM Detector Within30m Regenerativeoption MR J A CN1 CN1 CN2 SVON ALM...

Страница 387: ...AC Atype or Singlephase100VAC A1type RegenerativeOption NF MC L1 L2 TE1 U V W MR C A or MR C A1 CN1 CN2 EMG 24VDC CutoffbyOFFalarmsignal ofServoONsignal Electronicbrake Detector SM U V W W HC PQ Series motor RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 ARMRST 6 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 13 12 SVON 7 Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop SVON RST COM 5 20A MPG A 20B MPG A 19A MPG B 19B MPG B 5V A B 0V MPG SERVO...

Страница 388: ...PG B MPG B MPG A MPG A 20B PULSE2 PULSE1 SIGN2 SIGN1 OZ OZ S RDY 21 9 22 10 37 23 35 S RDY SRV ON CCWL CWL COM 34 29 9 8 7 X C DN32UP Max 10m 5V A B 0V 5V 5G Manualpulsegenerator 24G P24V MINAS A RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 13 12 Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop ...

Страница 389: ... CW CCW CCW H OFF H OFF TIMING COM O H P24V 24G 5G P5V RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 20A 20B MPG A MPG A 19A 19B MPG B MPG B 5V A B 0V MPG 13 OV DOG OV 10 EMG STOP 9 COM 12 11 Upperlimit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop Max 10m X C DN32UP VEXTA UDX2107 Connect when required 2 2 1 4W ...

Страница 390: ...CCW CCW H OFF H OFF TIMING COM O H X C DN32UP P24V 24G P5V 5G Connect when required Max 10m VEXTA UPO HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 20A MPG A 20B MPG A 19A MPG B 19B MPG B 5V A B 0V MPG 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 13 12 Upperlimit Lowerlimit DOG EMG DECstop 2 2 1 4W ...

Страница 391: ... 15 ENC B ENC Z P END ALARM ENC A 13 23 29 25 16 ENC B 14 ENC Z P END ALARM GND COMMON 24 30 26 2 1 P24V 24G P5V RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 20A 20B MPG A MPG A 19A 19B MPG B MPG B 5V A B 0V Manualpulsegenerator 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 13 12 Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop 5G X C DN32UP Max 10m VEXTA FX ...

Страница 392: ...D BRAKE ALARM A_CODE0 A_CODE1 47 48 20 45 19 A_CODE2 44 GND24 GND24 CCWLIM 24 25 SVONEN CLR 18 38 15 P24V 24G RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 7 8 20A 20B MPG A MPG A 19A 19B MPG B MPG B 5V A B 0V Manualpulse generator 13 OV DOG OV 10 EMG STOP 9 COM 12 11 Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop X C DN32UP Max 10m FDA 5000 6000 CWLIM 40 ESTOP 39 ALMRST P P1 38 41 TLIM 14 24VIN 49 ...

Страница 393: ...ALM RST 21 9 22 10 37 8 43 N OT P OT 24VIN 26 41 7 1k 4 HOME 5V RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM 3 SVON 6 ARM_RST 7 P24V 24G SVON RST_COM 5 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 13 12 Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop 20A 20B MPG A MPG A 19A 19B MPG B MPG B 5V A B 0V Manualpulsegenerator Max 10m CACR R Series Servopack X C DN32UP 2 2k 1 4W ...

Страница 394: ...phase100VAC Btype NF MC R T U V W SGDA BP 1CN M U V W E RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 CPM 7 SVON 13 12 ARM_RST 6 EMG DECstop SVON RST_COM 5 20A MPG A 20B MPG A 19A MPG B 19B MPG B 5V A B 0V Manualpulsegenerator 24V power supply 24V 0 2A Servo On Forward Limit Reverse Limit PG 30 31 32 ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 SG AL 33 20 21 22 PAO PAO PBO PBO 23 Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG Alarm Reset ...

Страница 395: ...IN TGON 26 27 TGON 28 S RDY S RDY 29 30 ALM 31 ALM 32 BAT 21 BAT 22 SEN 4 SG 2 ALO1 37 ALO2 38 ALO3 39 PAO 33 PAO 34 PBO 35 PBO 36 PCO 19 PCO 20 PSO 48 PSO 49 SG 1 CLR CLR 15 14 P24V 24G 20A 20B MPG A MPG A 19A 19B MPG B MPG B 5V A B 0V MPG Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 SVON RST_COM 5 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 7 SVON 13 12 ARM_RST 6 X C ...

Страница 396: ...COIN TGON 26 27 TGON 28 S RDY S RDY 29 30 ALM 31 ALM 32 BAT 21 BAT 22 SEN 4 SG 2 ALO1 37 ALO2 38 ALO3 39 PAO 33 PAO 34 PBO 35 PBO 36 PCO 19 PCO 20 SG 1 CLR CLR 15 14 P24V 24G 20A 20B MPG A MPG A 19A 19B MPG B MPG B 5V A B 0V MPG Upper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 SVON RST_COM 5 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 7 SVON 13 12 ARMRST 6 X C DN32UP Max 10...

Страница 397: ...pper Limit Lower Limit DOG EMG DECstop RP 15 RP 18 FP 17 FP 16 HOME COM HOME 5V 3 4 SVON RST_COM 5 14 OV DOG OV 11 EMG STOP 10 COM 7 SVON 13 12 ARMRST 6 X C DN32UP Within 10m 24G P24V PF PF PR PR GAIN2 T_LMT 9 10 11 12 MODE SGDH 24V IN STOP CCWLIM 50 48 EMG CWLIM 18 19 20 DIR 46 ALMRST 17 EGEAR1 INPOS 45 ALO0 16 PULCOM PCON 49 ABS_RQ ZCLAMP SPD3 21 SPD2 22 SPD1 23 ALO1 15 ALO2 14 GND24 25 GND24 24...

Страница 398: ...t type wiring example of positioning module is as follows In case that pulse generator is totem pole output which is used as voltage output wiring method is same with above A Phase A Phase B Phase B Pahse OUTA OUTB 5V DC F G 0V 5V Twisted shield cable X C DN UP Pulse Generator Notes Before Wiring please consider maximum output distance of pulse generator ...

Страница 399: ... 3 20 3 3 4 Encoder Input 5V Line Driver Output Wiring Example A Phase A Phase B Phase B Phase OUTA OUTB 5V DC F G 0V 5V Twisted shield cable X C DN UP Pulse generator OUTA OUTB Notes Before Wiring please consider maximum output distance of pulse generator ...

Страница 400: ...eter shall be applied to all axis 4 1 Parameter Operation data This picture describe process of parameter and operation data saved in the PLC Sequence Program XG PM I F X C DN32UP PC XG PM XG5000 Internal Buffer Embedded Positionig 메인 CPU Data Command Current Status Operation Parameter Operation Data CAM Data Common Parameter Command Buffer Status Buffer Flash Memory Operation Parameter Operation ...

Страница 401: ...Inch 1 200 000 000 X10 5 Inch degree 1 200 000 000 X10 5 degree Control word unit bit 2 3 0 Pulse 1 mm 2 Inch 3 Degree Unit multiplier bit 4 5 0 x 1 1 x 10 2 x 100 3 x 1000 Speed unit bit 6 0 unit time 1 rpm Pulse output mode 0 CW CCW 1 PLS DIR 2 PHASE Bias speed 2 1 2 147 483 647 X10 2 min Inch 1 2 147 483 647 X10 3 Inch min degree 1 2 147 483 647 X10 3 degree min pulse 1 2 000 000 pulse Sec 1 Th...

Страница 402: ... 1000um 0 5 Revolution 100pls Pulse output speed is 100pls sec when driving 60mm min speed 3 Travel per rotation and unit multiplier a Onlyin case of using mm inch degree asa positioning command unit you should set travel per revolution and multiplier b Actual Machine stravel distance per revolutionof motor isdetermined bythe structure of machine If the leadof ball screw mm rev isPB and the rateof...

Страница 403: ...on should be set to belower than speed limit b AccelerationTime AccelerationTime isthe time required to reach the limit speed which is set byparameter from zero speed stop state It doesn t mean the time require toreach theTarget speed c DecelerationTime DecelerationTime isthe time required to reach zero speed stop state fromthe limit speed which is setbyparameter It doesn t mean the time require t...

Страница 404: ...g figure shows pulse output diagram in caseActive low mode CW 정방향 출력 CCW 역방향 출력 FP RP b PLS DIR mode Pulse is outputted from one terminal and the forward reverse signal is outputted from the other terminal The following figure shows pulse output diagram in caseActive low mode CW Forward Output CCW Reverse Output FP RP c PHASE mode Forward pulse and reverse pulse will be outputted with 90degree pha...

Страница 405: ...0 0um Pulse per revolution Ap 1000pls Trael per pulse Travel per revolution Al Pulse per revolution Ap 10000 0um 100pls 10 0um pls 0 6mm min Note 1 If Bias speed is set as high total operation time shall be reduced but if the setting value is too high it may cause the occurrence of impact sound in the start end time and forces the excessive effect to the machine Cares shall be taken in using 2 The...

Страница 406: ...sation amount mm 0 65 535 X10 4 0 65 535 X10 1 inch 0 65 535 X10 5 Inch degree 0 65 535 X10 5 degree pulse 0 65 535 pulse Position completion time 0 65 535 ms S Curve ratio 1 100 Arc insertion position in 2 axis linear interpolation continuous operation mm 0 2 147 483 647 X10 4 0 2 147 483 647 X10 1 Inch 0 2 147 483 647 X10 5 Inch degree 0 2 147 483 647 X10 5 degree pulse 0 2 147 483 647 pulse Ser...

Страница 407: ...ay by incorrect operation position setting and incorrect operation by user program fault b External input upper lower limit can be also set besides the software upper lower limit c The range check of software upper lower limit is done at the start of operation and during operating d If the software upper lower limit is detected error Software upper limit error 501 Software lower limit error 502 oc...

Страница 408: ...7 483 647 X10 5 degree 3 Infinite running repeat a It sets whether to enable or disable Infinite running repeat b When you set Infinite running repeat as 1 enable command position and current position refreshes within the range set in Infinite running repeat position periodically c When you don t use Infinite running repeat function set as 0 disable 4 Backlash CompensationAmount a In case that a g...

Страница 409: ...nt output pulse within speed limit In case backlash compensation amount is bigger than Max output Pulse Speed limit ⅹ Control cycle for one control cycle distribute compensation amount to several control cycles Bachlash 1m movement right side Forward 1m movement left side Reverse TransferamountincludingBacklashcompensationamount Gear Backlash compansation Bachlash D 1500 Speed A 1000 B 500 P0 1000...

Страница 410: ...ioning Completion Time a Positioning completion signal shall be OFF after sustaining ON for Positioning Completion Time after positioning is completed and positioning completion signal becomes ON in single operation repeat operation keep operation continuous operation linear interpolation operation circular interpolation operation speed position switching control operation inching operation At thi...

Страница 411: ...he action of Keep operation mode is as follows e The action of Continuous operation mode is as follows Speed Start Busy Position Completion Dwell Time Dwell Time Time Position Completion time Speed Start Busy Position Completion Dwell Time Time Position Completion time ...

Страница 412: ...s set correctly c If pulse output direction is set as CW and machine moves reverse direction in case of forward direction op eration it is not set correctly Set the pulse output direction as CCW In case of forward direction operation if machine moves forward direction it is set correctly d In the following figure pulse output level is set as Low Active CW Setting CCW Setting RP FP CW CCW Forward R...

Страница 413: ...execute the next step after the positioning is completed and M code signal is ON the next operation step no does not work and the error code 233 will occur Therefore in order to execute the positioning of the next operation step number M code signal should be OFF by MOF command f There are two kinds of M code mode according to the output timing of M code signal With mode andAfter mode In case of s...

Страница 414: ...culated by PLC Synthetic speed Main axis Mode Calculated by PLC Main axis Data Main AXIS Sub AXIS 9 External stop selection Selects external stop type between EMG stop and Dec stop 10 Software limit detect a Selects whether to stop the operation or not when detecting software limit b If the software upper lower limit is set as default value upper limit 2 147 483 647 lower limit 2 147 483 648 or sa...

Страница 415: ...t is available to protect the motor from the load effect at the point that the motor starts to move the moving object and stopsit 12 S curve rate a In case of selecting S Curve operation as an acceleration deceleration pattern S Curve rate 1 100 should be set b According to S Curve rate S Curve operation pattern shall be formed in accordance with Sinusoidal curve c If S Curve rate is 1 it becomes ...

Страница 416: ...ing 2 axis linear interpolation continuous operation Here describesArc insertion during 2 axis linear interpolation continuous operation Setting item Setting Value Content Arcinsertion during 2 axis linear interpolation continuousoperation 0 Don t insert When executing 2 axislinear continuousinterpolation doesn t insertsarc 1 insert arc When executing 2 axislinear continuousinterpolation insertsar...

Страница 417: ...speed control changes into position control and executes position control with the value set in target position At this time this sets whether to consider the target position as absolute position value or incremental position value This is the setting of Speed Position switching coordinate Item Setting value Content Speed position switching coordinate 0 INC Executes positioning as far as the set v...

Страница 418: ...fer to 8 3 1 JOG Operation c JOG high speed operation has operation pattern as acceleration constant speed deceleration section Therefore acceleration section and deceleration section is controlled by JOG acceleration deceleration time d Jog high speed setting range All of control by embedded positioning is made within speed limit Therefore jog high speed also couldn t exceed the speed limit and m...

Страница 419: ...ch Bias Speed Speed Limit Homing Low Speed Homing high Speed degree Bias Speed Speed Limit Homing Low Speed Homing high Speed pulse Bias Speed Speed Limit Homing Low Speed Homing high Speed Homing low speed HomingAcceleration time 0 2 147 483 647 ms Homing deceleration time Homing dwell time 0 65 535 ms Origin compensation amount 2147483648 2147483647 X10 3 2147483648 2147483647 X10 1 Inch 2147483...

Страница 420: ...E 6 HOME b For further information of homing method please refer to 8 1 homing of chapter 8 2 Homing direction a There are 2 kinds of homing direction forward direction and reverse direction b In case of homing command was set by forward begin to homing operation to currently increasing direction of position searching needed external signal for homing c In case of homing command was set by reverse...

Страница 421: ...g action Detecting Home Detecting Home area PLC stop moving immediately when detects the Home signal therefore when homing speed is fast there can be difference between the origin signal and the stopped postion of machine Therefore The moving speed must be low enough to stop in the correct home signal position and this speed is homing low speed But need to move as fast as possible until detecting ...

Страница 422: ...ate by the homing acceleration time and homing deceleration time b Available range is 0 2 147 483 647 ms if it is set by 0 It will be accelerate or decelerate according to acceleration deceleration time1 of basic parameter when homing 9 Homing dwell time a This is the time needed to maintain the precise stop accuracy of SERVO motor when using the SERVO motor for positioning b Practically Dwell tim...

Страница 423: ...per limit signal of input signal parameter by A contact and the lower limit signal by B contact the upper limit is detected when external upper limit signal is ON while the lower limit is detected when external upper signal is OFF 2 If selecting Emergency stop from External stop selection of extended parameter the external input signal is used by Emergency stop signal And if setting Emergency stop...

Страница 424: ... applied to all of the parameter 4 7 1 Common parameter Common Parameter Item Setting range Control word Pulse output level 0 LowActive 1 HighActive Encoder pulse input mode 0 CW CCW 1 multiplication 1 PULSE DIR 1 multiplication 2 PHASEA B 4 multiplication Speed override 0 designate 1 Speed designate Continous Operation 0 Disable 1 Enable Encoder 0 Max value 2147483648 2147283647 Encoder 0 Min val...

Страница 425: ...onization rate can take Encoder Motor or Encoder Motor what you want 1 CW CCW 1 multiplier Counts at the rising edge ofA phase input or B phase input Increase count value if B phase input is Low state at the rising edge of A phase input and decrease count value if A phase input is Low state at the rising edge of B phase input Increase Decrease Phase Ainput High Phase Ainput Low Phase B input High ...

Страница 426: ... manual pulse generator or encoder signal of Servo drive and display as encoder value the count range need to be set to Max Min value of encoder 1 When encoder value increase 1 When encoder value decrease 3 Speed override a When operate changing speed command Speed override Positioning speed override etc select speed will be changed or percentage of goal speed b In case of setting percentage can s...

Страница 427: ...ous operation is disabled Speed profile will be generated every 1ms and will be generated every 5ms if enabled b if Continuous Operation parameter is disabled Continuous operation command can not be executed Error Code 160 occurs c The figure below shows example of generated speed profile of trapezoidal acceleration Time Speed Control period Ideal Speed profile Generated Speed profile ...

Страница 428: ... ms M Code no 0 65 535 Setting the axis of ordinates Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 축4 축3 축2 축1 Helical interpolation axis 0 1 axis 4 axis Set 0 normal circular interpolation The number of circular interpolation turn 0 65 535 Control Word Coordinate bit 0 0 absolute 1 incremental Control method bit 1 3 0 Single axis positioning 1 Single axis speed control 2 Single axis Feed contro...

Страница 429: ...d goal position Start position Goal position forward direction positioning Start position Goal position reverse direction positioning Example When current position 1000 Goal position 8000 forward direction transfer amount is 7000 8000 1000 Notes Positioning byAbsolute method Absolute coordinate can start only in the state that the origin is determined If starting in the state that the origin is no...

Страница 430: ... step of operation data connect with next step and operate b Select one operation pattern from End Keep Continuous operation c For further information please refer to 8 2 2 operation mode of Positioning control of Chapter 8 Function 5 Operation Method Singular Repeat a Operating Method is an option for selecting a operating step after finish operating step from the driving data setting step b In c...

Страница 431: ...odule maintains ON of the Busy Flag and if dwell time proceeds Busy Flag becomes OFF and the positioning end signal becomes ON 11 Setting Axis of ordinates a This is an option for axis of ordinates of driving shaft when should operate at least over 2 axis such as linear interpolation or circular interpolation b Setting each bit from 1 axis to 4 axis Each bit is as follows Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 B...

Страница 432: ...he circular interpolation of midpoint method and central point method d For further information please refer to designating radius circular interpolation of 8 2 11 Notes Positioning software package set as follows at a time circular arc method circular interpolating direction circular arc size with Circular interpolating mode Software package Circular interpolating mode is as follows Midpoint Cent...

Страница 433: ...nt Operation Step 6 1A7 227 2A7 327 Point Operation Step 7 1A8 228 2A8 328 Point Operation Step 8 1A9 229 2A9 329 Point Operation Step 9 1AA 22A 2AA 32A Point Operation Step 10 1AB 22B 2AB 32B Point Operation Step 11 1AC 22C 2AC 32C Point Operation Step 12 1AD 22D 2AD 32D Point Operation Step 13 1AE 22E 2AE 32E Point Operation Step 14 1AF 22F 2AF 32F Point Operation Step 15 1B0 230 2B0 330 Point O...

Страница 434: ...Data8 UPPER 190 210 290 310 Teaching Data9 LOWER 191 211 291 311 Teaching Data9 UPPER 192 212 292 312 Teaching Data10 LOWER 193 213 293 313 Teaching Data10 UPPER 194 214 294 314 Teaching Data11 LOWER 195 215 295 315 Teaching Data11 UPPER 196 216 296 316 Teaching Data12 LOWER 197 217 297 317 Teaching Data12 UPPER 198 218 298 318 Teaching Data13 LOWER 199 219 299 319 Teaching Data13 UPPER 19A 21A 29...

Страница 435: ...8 238 2B8 338 Simultaneous Start 3axis Step Number 1B9 239 2B9 339 Simultaneous Start 4axis Step Number 2 Setting a The command for Step Data of Simultaneous Start setting is XSWR b References for XSST command of Simultaneous Start and XSWR Setting command for Step Data of Simultaneous Start are on Chapter 6 3 6 c In PLC program in order to carry out the normal action of Simultaneous Start the Ste...

Страница 436: ...ation 1 12 1CC 24C 2CC 34C Error information 2 13 1CD 24D 2CD 34D Error information 3 14 1CE 24E 2CE 34E Error information 4 15 1CF 24F 2CF 34F Error information 5 16 1D0 250 2D0 350 Error information 6 17 1D1 251 2D1 351 Error information 7 18 1D2 252 2D2 352 Error information 8 19 1D3 253 2D3 353 Error information 9 20 1D4 254 2D4 354 Error information 10 21 1D5 255 2D5 355 Encoder Value LOWER 2...

Страница 437: ...d 1 Fixed Bit 4 Bit 5 N A Stop State 0 Not stop state by stop command 1 stop state by stop command Bit 6 Bit 7 Variable Data Read Write 0 Variable Data access finished 1 Variable Data access is ongoing Upper Limit Detection 0 No Detection 1 Detection Bit 8 Bit 9 Lower Limit Detection 0 No Detection 1 Detection Emergency Stop State 0 Normal 1 Emergency Stop Bit 10 Bit 11 Direction 0 Forward 1 Rever...

Страница 438: ...ation in Operation 0 Circular Interpolation not in Operation 1 Circular Interpolation in Operation Homing Operating 0 Homing not in Operation 1 Homing in Operation Synchronous Start by Position in Operation 0 Synchronous Start by position not in Operation 1 Synchronous Start by position in Operation Synchronous Start by Speed in Operation 0 Synchronous Start by Speed not in Operation 1 Synchronous...

Страница 439: ...l 5 7 3 Axis Information Memory Address Information 1 axis 2 axis 3 axis 4 axis 1C2 242 2C2 342 Axis Information Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 15 Master Axis Information Axis State 0 Slave Axis 1 Master Axis 1 4 Axis1 Axis4 9 Encoder No Use 0 ...

Страница 440: ...External Emergency Deceleration Stop Signal 0 External Emergency Stop Deceleration Stop Signal OFF 1 External Emergency Stop Deceleration Stop ON Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 No Use 0 Upper Limit Signal 0 External Upper Limit OFF 1 External Upper Limit ON Lower Limit Signal 0 External Lower Limit OFF 1 External Lower Limit ON Home ...

Страница 441: ...is is the signal which transfers to positioning module from PLC CPU Signal Direction PLC CPU Positioning Axis Input Signal Description 1 axis Uxx 01 0 1 axis forward direction Jog Uxx 01 1 1 axis reverse direction Jog Uxx 01 2 1 axis Jog high low speed Uxx 01 3 No use 2 axis Uxx 01 4 2 axis forward direction Jog Uxx 01 5 2 axis reverse direction Jog Uxx 01 6 2 axis Jog high low speed Uxx 01 7 No u...

Страница 442: ...on PLC CPU Pos itioning Module Input Signal Description Uxx 00 0 No use Uxx 00 1 No use Uxx 00 2 No use Uxx 00 3 No use Uxx 00 4 No use Uxx 00 5 No use Uxx 00 6 No use Uxx 00 7 No use Uxx 00 8 No use Uxx 00 9 No use Uxx 00 A No use Uxx 00 B No use Uxx 00 C No use Uxx 00 D No use Common Uxx 00 E Flash Memory writing Common UXX 00 F Positioning Module ready ...

Страница 443: ...al Jog Operation Status On Off Forward Jog Operation Off On Reverse Jog Operation Off Off Stop On On Forward Jog Operation b If Jog direction is changed during Jog operation it slows down at first and then operates as the direction it changed c According to value of Jog low high Signals it could operate with low high speed When jog low high signals Off it operates with low speed and when they are ...

Страница 444: ...tion blocks 1 The errors that occur in STAT variables of the positioning function blocks are as follows STAT Details Description 0 Normal If function blocks are normally executed DONE 1 STAT 0 will be output 1 Base No setting error It occurs when the base No BASE s set values are out of the range 3 Slot No setting error It occurs when the slot No SLOT s set values are out of the range 1 11 4 Empty...

Страница 445: ... x 10 5 degree Spee d pulse second 1 2 000 000 pulse second mm minute 1 2 147 483 647 X10 2 minute inch minute 1 2 147 483 647 X10 3 Inch minute degree minute 1 2 147 483 647 X10 3 degree minute 3 For the type and size of the data mainly used for the positioning function blocks refer to the below table No Reserved word Data type Size Bit Range 1 BOOL Boolean 1 0 1 2 SINT Short Integer 8 128 127 3 ...

Страница 446: ...ge 6 10 2 23 XPM_PRS Current position preset Edge 6 8 11 24 XPM_EPRE Presetting encoder values Edge 6 8 12 25 XPM_ATEA Position speed teaching ROM RAM Array type Edge 6 4 8 26 XPM_SBP Basic parameters teaching Edge 6 4 1 27 XPM_SEP Extended parameters teaching Edge 6 4 2 28 XPM_SHP Homing parameters teaching Edge 6 4 3 29 XPM_SMP Manual operation parameters teaching Edge 6 4 4 30 XPM_SIP External ...

Страница 447: ...n of XPM_SRD XPM_CRD XPM_ENCRD the only one positioning function block should be executed for the axis within a single scan If you use the program as the below example the function block will not work properly When executing different function blocks When executing the same function blocks For the different axes you can simultaneously execute the same function blocks However in the case of XPM_VRD...

Страница 448: ...rque STEP Displaying the current operating data step No MCD Displaying the current M code value 1 The current operating state of the specified axis is read in theAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The read operating data is saved to the variables set in the output of function blocks 3 InAXIS you can set up the axis to command and select one among 1 4 1axis 4axis If the values other than set ones a...

Страница 449: ...Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks ST1 State 1 ST2 State 2 ST3 State 3 ST4 State 4 ST5 State 5 ST6 State 6 ST7 State 7 1 The command to read the bit information of the current operating state of the specified axis is sent to the AXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The read bit information of the current operating...

Страница 450: ...mergency Stop state 6 During deceleration 3 Direction 0 forward 1 reverse 7 During dwell ST3 0 During 1 axis position control 4 During circular interpolation operation 1 During 1 axis speed control 5 During homing operation 2 During linear interpolation operation 6 During position synchronous operation 3 7 During speed synchronous operation ST4 0 During JOG operation 4 In the process of returning ...

Страница 451: ...SLOT STAT BOOL BOOL USINT USINT UINT ENC_VAL DINT ENC BOOL Input REQ Request for executing function blocks BASE Setting up the numbers of the bases where modules are equipped SLOT Setting up the numbers of slots where modules are equipped ENC Encoder No set as 0 all the time 0 Encoder Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function...

Страница 452: ...for executing function blocks BASE Setting up the numbers of the bases where modules are equipped SLOT Setting up the numbers of slots where modules are equipped AXIS Specifying the axis to give commands 1 4 1 4axis BP_VAL Basic parameter values to change BP_NO Basic parameter items No to change RAM ROM Method on how to save parameters 0 SAVING TO RAM 1 SAVING TO ROM Output DONE Keeping 1 after th...

Страница 453: ...to the FLASH together with the previous parameters changed by RAM teaching including the parameters changed by the current commands However for different axes other than the relevant ones the previous data will not be saved to the FLASH 5 You can set up the values for basic parameter items No as below Set value Item Setting range 1 Speed limit 1 2 147 483 647 X10 2 minute Inch 1 2 147 483 647 X10 ...

Страница 454: ...tting up the numbers of the bases where modules are equipped SLOT Setting up the numbers of slots where modules are equipped AXIS Specifying the axis to give commands 1 4 1axis 4axis EP_VAL Extended parameter values to change EP_NO Extended parameter items No to change RAM ROM Method on how to save parameters 0 SAVING TO RAM 1 SAVING TO ROM Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Ou...

Страница 455: ...7 pulse 2 Soft lower limit 3 Compensation amount of backlash mm 0 65 535 X10 4 inch 0 65 535 X10 5 Inch degree 0 65 535 X10 5 degree pulse 0 65 535 pulse 4 Completion time of positioning 0 65 535 ms 5 S curve ratio 1 100 6 2 axis linear interpolated continuous operation with insertion position of a circular arc mm 0 2147483647 X10 4 Inch 0 2147483647 X10 5 Inch degree 0 2147483647 X10 5 degree pul...

Страница 456: ...9 Seleciton of interpolation speed 0 Major axis speed 1 Resultant speed 6 If you change the data through ROM teaching it will be saved to the FLASH together with the previous parameters changed by RAM teaching including the parameters changed by the current commands However for different axes other than the relevant ones the previous data will not be saved to the FLASH ...

Страница 457: ...value even while the power is Off set the RAM ROM as 1 and perform the homing parameter teaching commands or after teaching homing parameters save the changed parameter value to the Flash by using the commands for saving parameters operating data XPM_WRT 3 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command and select one among 1 4 If the values other than set ones are selected error6 will occur 4 The comm...

Страница 458: ...M Method on how to save parameters 0 SAVING TO RAM 1 SAVING TO ROM Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for teaching manual operation parameters is sent to the axis specified as AXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The parameter value that is set as 0 in RAM ROM and changed by the commands for teaching...

Страница 459: ...e degree 1 65 535 X10 3 degree minute pulse 1 65 535 pulse second 6 If you change the data through ROM teaching it will be saved to the FLASH together with the previous parameters changed by RAM teaching including the parameters changed by the current commands However for different axes other than the relevant ones the previous data will not be saved to the FLASH ...

Страница 460: ...er value even while the power is Off set the RAM ROM as 1 and perform the commands for teaching external signal parameters or after setting external signal parameters save the changed parameter value to the Flash by using the commands for saving parameters operating data XPM_WRT 3 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command and select one among 1 4 If the values other than set ones are selected err...

Страница 461: ...coder pulse input mode 0 CW CCW multiplied by 1 1 PULSE DIR multiplied by 1 2 PHASEA B multiplied by 4 3 Encoder maximum value 2147483648 2147283647 4 Encoder minimum value 5 Pulse output level 0 LowActive 1 HighActive 6 Whether allowing continuous operation 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed 5 If you change the data through ROM teaching it will be saved to the FLASH together with the previous parameters chan...

Страница 462: ...he initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for setting operating data is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The operating data that is set as 0 in RAM ROM and changed by the commands for teaching operating data is valid only while the power is On If you want to maintain the changed operating data even whil...

Страница 463: ... circular interpolation 8 Number of circular interpolation turns 0 65 535 9 Coordinate 0 Absolute coordinate 1 Relative coordinate 10 Control mode 0 Single axis position control 1 Single axis speed control 2 Single axis Feed control 3 linear interpolation 4 circular interpolation 11 Operation method 0 isolated 1 repetitive 12 Operation pattern 0 End 1 Keeping On 2 Continuous 13 Circular arc size 0...

Страница 464: ... value for a specific step s operating data 3 It is used when you want to change the target position or speed values up to 16EA at once by using the multiple teaching function blocks 4 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command and select one among 1 4 If the values other than set ones are selected error6 will occur 5 The teaching command can be executed only when all axes are in a stopped state 6...

Страница 465: ...d the desired data by specifying parameters and operating data CAM data s module internal memory address directly 3 Among parameters operating data CAM data of the embedded positioning the command is to read as much data as the SIZE in WORDs from the position set as S_ADDR in positioning module internal memory to the specified device of VAR In case CNT is more than 2 it reads the blocks one by one...

Страница 466: ...g parameters operating data CAM data of the embedded positioning internal memory the command is to write as much data as the SIZE in WORDs from the T_ADDR position of the PLC program to the specified device of VAR In case the number of blocks CNT is more than 2 it writes the data one by one to the blocks which are as distant as OFFSET from the ones located in T_ADDR position as many times as CNT 1...

Страница 467: ...it 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0Bit N A 4axis 3axis 2axis 1axis For example to select 2 axis and 3 axis you can set them as 16 06 5 If you modify the data with the command for writing variable data XPM_VWR the CAM data that changed during XPM_WRT will be saved to the Flash Function Block Type Details XPM_WRT DONE REQ BASE SLOT STAT BOOL BOOL USINT USINT UINT AXIS USINT WRT_AXIS USINT Input REQ Request for exec...

Страница 468: ...ion STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 It gives homing command to the positioning module 2 It is the operation command to find the origin of the machine based on homing mode with direction compensation amount speed high speed low speed address and dwell time that are set as homing parameters of each axis 3 The homing command is sent to the axis specified asAX...

Страница 469: ... DEC_SEL USINT Input REQ Request for executing function blocks BASE Setting up the numbers of the bases where modules are equipped SLOT Setting up the numbers of slots where modules are equipped AXIS Specifying the axis to give commands 1 4 1 4axis ADDR Setting up the target position address 2147483648 2147483647 SPEED Setting up the target speed DWELL Setting up dwell time 0 65535 ms M code Setti...

Страница 470: ...occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for indirect start up is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It can be used when you want to operate the machine by setting operation step No of the axis that is set as operating data 3 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command and select one among 1 4 If the values other than set ones are selected error 6 will oc...

Страница 471: ...the embedded positioning 2 For the specified step of STEP in the specified axis the ellipse interpolation is performed at the angle set in DEG in the ratio set in RATIO 3 The ellipse interpolation distorts the operating data of the step that is set as circular interpolation in the ratio of ellipse ratio RATIO and performs ellipse operation at the operating angle set in DEG Therefore the step of th...

Страница 472: ... No to start up A2_STEP 2axis step No to start up A3_STEP 3axis step No to start up A4_STEP 4axis step No to start up A5_STEP N A A6_STEP N A A7_STEP N A A8_STEP N A Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for synchronous start up is sent to the axis specified as SST_AXIS of the embedded positioning 2 I...

Страница 473: ...400 Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The start up command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command and select one among 1 4 If the values other than set ones are selected error 6 will occur 3 It can be used to operate continuously the machi...

Страница 474: ...2 If the stop command is given during running by operating data after deceleration stop the operation restarts by the start up command 3 If deceleration stop command is executed in speed synchronization or position synchronization CAM operation depending on the current operating control state speed synchronization or position synchronization CAM operation will be finished 4 The deceleration stop c...

Страница 475: ...ng 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The Emergency Stop command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used when you have to stop the operation immediately due to emergency The axis where this command is applied will be in a stopped state 3 During Emergency Stop the deceleration time is the valu...

Страница 476: ...e initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The restart up command is sent to theAXIS command axis of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to restart up the axis that went through deceleration stop during operation and the axis where the command is executed will restart with the previous operating data 3 If other operations are performed before re...

Страница 477: ...g executing function blocks 1 The JOG operation command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is the manual operation function for a test and is used to verify the system operations wiring state position address for teaching You can choose either high speed or low speed 3 The operating conditions of JOG function block are level type Namely when the access condition ...

Страница 478: ... Amount of travel to move through inching operation 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The inching operation command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 Inching operation is a kind of manual operations It is used to process minute movements as quantita...

Страница 479: ...ifying the axis to give commands 1 4 1axis 4axis Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for returning to the position of pre manual operation is sent to the axis specified as AXIS of the embedded positioning 2 When the position is changed by manual operation after positioning the command can be used to...

Страница 480: ... perform position synchronization 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for position synchronization is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The axis that gives command is regarded as the minor axis When the axis set as the major axis reaches the ...

Страница 481: ...ating speed between two axes at the set ratio 3 There is no rule about the size between the major axis s speed ratio and the minor axis s speed ratio Namely if the major axis s speed ratio is bigger than the minor axis s speed ratio the major axis moves faster than the minor axis if the minor axis s speed ratio is bigger than the major axis s speed ratio the minor axis moves faster than the major ...

Страница 482: ...between two axes at the set ratio If the minor axis s position reaches the point set by POS it will stop after finishing speed synchronization 3 There is no rule about the size between the major axis s speed ratio and the minor axis s speed ratio Namely if the major axis s speed ratio is bigger than the minor axis s speed ratio the major axis moves faster than the minor axis if the minor axis s sp...

Страница 483: ...d as During Operation the motor actually does not run When the axis set as the major one starts up the motor starts running to the position of the minor axis corresponding to the major axis s position based on CAM data blocks values set in CAM block CAM_BLK 4 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command based on the below setting range If the values other than set ones are selected error6 will occur...

Страница 484: ... blocks 3 When executing the CAM operation command although the minor axis one set in AXIS is displayed as During Operation the motor actually does not run After the axis set as the major one starts up and it moves as far as the travel amount of the major axis s offset position the motor starts running to the position of the minor axis corresponding to the major axis s position based on CAM data b...

Страница 485: ...tial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The position override command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to change the target position while the command axis is running 3 If you perform position override after passing the point for position override it will stop at the current position and then changes its ...

Страница 486: ...ide command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to change the operating speed while the command axis is running 3 SOR_SPD can be set as or speed value unit time based on the values set in speed override of the command parameters 4 In case the unit of speed override value is the setting area is 1 65 535 that indicates 0 01 655 35 5 In case the unit of speed...

Страница 487: ... value Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The speed override command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to change the operating speed after reaching a certain position in the state that the command axis is running 3 PSO_SPD can be set as or speed value unit time based...

Страница 488: ...xecuting function blocks 1 The command for switching position speed control is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 When the position speed control switching command is given to the axis where position control operation was applied with the determined travel amount the operation mode will be converted from position control into speed control It will run until the factors...

Страница 489: ...peration STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for switching speed position control is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 When the speed position control switching command is given to the specified axis where speed operation was applied the operation mode will be converted from speed control into position control and posi...

Страница 490: ...tion STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The positioning speed position switching command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 When the positioning speed position switching command is given to the specified axis where speed control operation was applied the operation mode will be converted from speed control into position control ...

Страница 491: ...ial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for skip operation is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to move to the next step without running the operation step Namely it stops and terminates the current operating step and continues the operation with the next step 3 Each time you run this command it wi...

Страница 492: ...nt to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to move to the next operating step without stopping the command axis in the currently operating step 3 When the continuous operation command is executed the currently operating step No is changed into the next step No and position operation will proceed with the next step s speed and target position The connection with the ne...

Страница 493: ... to run 1 400 Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command to change start up step is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 It is used to change the operation step of the command axis 3 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command based on the below setting range If the values other t...

Страница 494: ...during executing function blocks 1 The command to change repetitive step is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The command is used to start the operation in a certain operating step by specifying the start step No of repetitive operation when running the repetitive operation that the command is given during running with the operation data it returns to the repetitive o...

Страница 495: ...e 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command to preset the current position is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The command is used to change the current position into an arbitrary position If it is executed with the undetermined origin the signal ...

Страница 496: ...er s preset value Encoder s min value Encoder s max value 1 Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The encoder preset command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The command changes the encoder s current value into the set value of EPRE_VAL 3 In ENC you can set up the encoder to pres...

Страница 497: ...utput DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The error reset command is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command based on the below setting range If the values other than set ones are selected error 6 will occur Setting range 1 4 1axis 4axis 3 When paramet...

Страница 498: ...nds 1 4 1axis 4axis Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command to reset error history is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 In AXIS you can set up the axis to command based on the below setting range If the values other than set ones are selected error 6 will occur Setting rang...

Страница 499: ...is 4axis Output DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for setting the floating origin point is sent to the axis specified as AXIS of the embedded positioning 2 The command is used when you want to set up forcibly the current position as the origin without homing operation of the machine In this case the addr...

Страница 500: ... Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The command for clearing M code is sent to the axis specified asAXIS of the embedded positioning 2 In case the M code is set as With or After Mode in each axis s parameters when the command axis s M code signal is On it can be used to turn Off this signal Namely it changes the M code si...

Страница 501: ...utput DONE Keeping 1 after the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The Servo On signal is sent to the axis set as AX of the positioning module that is designated as BASE positioning module s base No fixed as No 0 and SLOT positioning module s slot No XEC embedded positioning is fixed as No 1 2 Among Servos connected to modules the Servo On si...

Страница 502: ...fter the initial operation STAT Outputting error No that occurred during executing function blocks 1 The Servo Off signal is sent to the axis set as AX of the positioning module that is designated as BASE positioning module s base No fixed as No 0 and SLOT positioning module s slot No XEC embedded positioning is fixed as No 1 2 Among Servos connected to modules the Servo Off signal is generated in...

Страница 503: ...The signal to reset Servo error is sent to the axis set as AX of the positioning module that is designated as BASE positioning module s base No fixed as No 0 and SLOT positioning module s slot No XEC embedded positioning is fixed as No 1 2 Among Servos connected to modules the Servo On signal is generated in the Servo corresponding on the selected axis 3 In case the command to reset Servo error is...

Страница 504: ...Position Chap 6 Commands 6 61 6 11 Function blocks related to Servo Drive ...

Страница 505: ...out Operation state Reading XPM_SRD a Module s ready After Turn On if there is no error occurred in Positioning Module it is ON meaning that modules are ready to operate b Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases c Axis of operation If you command each axis need to set Axis of command execution UP type can control max 4 axes and Axis of com...

Страница 506: ...Turn On if there is no error occurred in Positioning Module it is ON meaning that modules are ready to operate b Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases c Axis of operation If you command each axis need to set Axis of command execution UP type can control max 4 axes Axis of command execution1 4 means axis1 axis4 d The position for saving o...

Страница 507: ...erate b Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases c Encoder No Set the encoder no to read encoder value UP type must be set as 0 d Encoder value The current value of encoder is displayed e State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and maintain 1 until the next operation If error occurred 0 w...

Страница 508: ...nction d Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Floating Origin Setting is on If it is not set as ON the error 212 would be appeared e Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases f Axis of comman...

Страница 509: ...ill only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function e Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Jog Operation is on If it is not set as ON the error 413 would be appeared f Addre...

Страница 510: ...occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function c Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Inching Operation is on If it is not set as ON the error 403 w...

Страница 511: ...t to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Manual Operation is on If it is not set as ON the error 434 would be appeared e Address of Positioning Module In this example Pos...

Страница 512: ...Positioning Chapter 7 Program 7 8 manual operation 7 1 4 Parameter and Operation Data Setting 1 Parameter Setting ...

Страница 513: ...oning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 f Value of Changing Parameter You can set a value of changing parameter For more information about Paramete...

Страница 514: ...Time of basic parameter of axis1 as 1000ms XPM_SEP RAM Setting 2 axes linear interpolation continuous operation position that circular arc is added as 500 XPM_SHP RAM Setting position of origin of axis1 homing parameter as 100 XPM_SMP ROM Setting Jog speed of axis2 manual operation parameter as 5000 XPM_SIP ROM Setting axis2 I O signal parameter value as 16 13 High Low limit Emergency Dec Stop sig...

Страница 515: ...t is a signal of Error state for each axis It turns on when an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type suppo...

Страница 516: ...erpolation direction i ROM RAM Setting This function sets whether you save value of changing parameter to Rom or Ram If you choose Rom the data will be saved regardless of power and if you save in the ram the data will be vanished when powers off This parameter sets as 1 means Rom saved and sets as 0 means Ram saved There is no limitation of saving parameters in the Rom since parameter of Position...

Страница 517: ...to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 f First nu...

Страница 518: ... as below table Value Device No TeachingArray Data 1 Device 0 TeachingArray Data 1 2 Device 1 TeachingArray Data 2 3 Device 2 TeachingArray Data 3 4 Device 3 TeachingArray Data 4 5 Device 4 TeachingArray Data 5 6 Device 5 TeachingArray Data 6 7 Device 6 TeachingArray Data 7 8 Device 7 TeachingArray Data 8 9 Device 8 TeachingArray Data 9 10 Device 9 TeachingArray Data 10 11 Device 10 TeachingArray ...

Страница 519: ...s example Positioning Module is installed at the fixed 1th slot of 0 bases d Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 e Saving by axis Configure current data operation setting Choosing axis are configured follow by below table There...

Страница 520: ...rdless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Drive Ready is on If it is not set as ON the error 295 would be appeared e Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is installed at...

Страница 521: ...en an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Drive Ready is on If it is not set as ON the error...

Страница 522: ...tting Set the operating coordinates of direct start Followings are executed depending on setting value 0 Absolute coordinates 1 Relative coordinates m Acceleration No Set the acc No used in positioning control It operates by corresponding acc Time of basic parameter depending on setting value 0 Acc Time 1 1 Acc Time 2 2 Acc Time 3 3 Acc Time 4 n Deceleration No Set the dec No used in positioning c...

Страница 523: ...et as ON the error 235 would be appeared e Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases f Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 g Operating step number by Indirect Start Set t...

Страница 524: ...xis This command only works when this is the condition for Drive Ready is on If a Drive Ready of main axis is not set as ON the error 549 would be appeared and If a Drive Ready of subordinate axis is not set as ON the error 550 would be appeared and e Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases f Axis of command execution You can set an axis f...

Страница 525: ...ous Start This is the condition for Synchronous Start Command b Operating state by axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Operating for each axis It turns on when it is operating Operating Data Setting can not be configured while it is running hence configuration will only be configured when it is not running If you execute Axis1 Synchronous Start whi...

Страница 526: ... as a 1 for each axis Axis for each bits are as below 15 4 Bit 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0Bit N A Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis1 g Synchronous start step no per each axis Set the step no of each axis for synchronous start UP type can control 4 axes it doesn t use A4_STEP A8_STEP input h State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and maintain 1 until the next oper...

Страница 527: ... each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Drive Ready is on e Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases f Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the exe...

Страница 528: ... Point Operating Step Data 11 12 Device 11 Point Operating Step Data 12 13 Device 12 Point Operating Step Data 13 14 Device 13 Point Operating Step Data 14 15 Device 14 Point Operating Step Data 15 16 Device 15 Point Operating Step Data 16 17 Device 16 Point Operating Step Data 17 18 Device 17 Point Operating Step Data 18 19 Device 18 Point Operating Step Data 19 20 Device 19 Point Operating Step ...

Страница 529: ...em regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Drive Ready is on If a Drive Ready of main axis is not set as ON the error 354 would be appeared e Address of Positioning Module In this example Pos...

Страница 530: ...0 subordinate axis will be operating in speed of 5000 Set value MainAxis 1 Axis 1 2 Axis 2 3 Axis 3 4 Axis 4 5 6 7 8 9 Encoder j State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and maintain 1 until the next operation If error occurred 0 will be outputted k Error State This is the area that output error no if there are errors in operation of function blo...

Страница 531: ...re is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Ready signal for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Drive Ready for each axis This command only works when this is the condition for Drive Ready is on If a Drive Ready of main axis is not set as ON the error 354 would be appeared e Addre...

Страница 532: ... 2 3 Axis 3 4 Axis 4 5 6 7 8 9 Encoder j Goal Position Set goal of Position Assign Speed Synchronization Once Axis of command execution reaches the goal position Speed Synchronization ends and operation will be stop immediately k State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and maintain 1 until the next operation If error occurred 0 will be outputted...

Страница 533: ...e it is running the error 341 would be appeared c Error state for each axis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Error state for each axis It turns on when an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Ready signal for each axis According to ex...

Страница 534: ...e value as Axis of command execution and possible setting values are as below i Value of MainAxis Set value for Main Axis to execute Synchronous Start by Position Therefore main axis will be executed the command when the subordinate axis reaches this set value Set value MainAxis 1 Axis 1 2 Axis 2 3 Axis 3 4 Axis 4 5 6 7 8 9 Encoder j State of Operation complete If function block is completed witho...

Страница 535: ...ared e Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases f Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 g MainAxis Setting Setting of main axis to operate This setting is for main axis of...

Страница 536: ...an set a value for axis1 through axis4 f Deceleration time of Deceleration Stop Set a deceleration time of Deceleration Stop operation Unit of Deceleration Stop is ms Since this time refers deceleration time from the speed limit there might be little difference between Deceleration Stop set time and actual stop time The range of deceleration time is 0 2 147 483 674 1 2 147 483 674 means Decelerati...

Страница 537: ...eter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 d State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and maintain 1 until the next operation If error occurred 0 will be outputted e Error State This is the area that output error no if there are errors in operation of function block f Emergency Stop is operating by each axis Once Emergency Stop comm...

Страница 538: ... for execution is operation possible when it is On c Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases d Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 e State of Operation complete If func...

Страница 539: ...n set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 f Value Change for Speed Operation Set speed value According to Speed Override from common parameters it is a signal of or Speed Value depends on setting of category Also when Speed Override set as Speed Value it means Unit...

Страница 540: ...xample Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 f Change for Goal Position Value Setting Value Change for Goal Position Value The unit of this value depends on Unit category Onc...

Страница 541: ...g Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 f Position of Speed Change Execution Set the position of Speed Change Once the actual position located at set position with speed override command...

Страница 542: ...pter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Error state for each axis It turns on when an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Signal from Speed Control by eachAxis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Speed Control state for each ...

Страница 543: ...of 7 1 2 Read Current State is applied it is a signal showing Error State for each axis If any error takes place it becomes On A condition has been set to perform a control command only when there is no error with the relevant axis If the user wants to execute a command regardless of the occurrence of errors he she may remove this condition d Speed Control Signal for each axis In case that an exam...

Страница 544: ...ecuted convert from speed control to position control and moves by transfer amount h Completion state If any function block is completely executed without any error it displays and maintains 1 until the next execution while it displays 0 if any error takes place i Error state If any error takes place when any function block is executed this area generates its error number j For details on the oper...

Страница 545: ...inactivate the function d Signal from Position Control by eachAxis According to exercise from Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Position Control state for each axis It turns on when it is operating Position Speed Switching Control Setting can only be configured while it is running If you execute Position Speed Switching Control while it is not running the error 317 would be app...

Страница 546: ...Current State Reading it is a signal of Error state for each axis It turns on when an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Paramete...

Страница 547: ...om Chapter 7 1 2 Current State Reading it is a signal of Error state for each axis It turns on when an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an ...

Страница 548: ...or occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of ...

Страница 549: ...Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases d Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 e Change Step Number Set change step number by Current Step Change UP type support 400 step operation data for eachAxis Therefore the range of step ...

Страница 550: ... It turns on when an error occurred Operation will only work when there is no error If you want to operate a system regardless of errors you can just inactivate the function d Address of Positioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases e Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis fr...

Страница 551: ...on of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 d Changing Encoder Set Changing Encoder to execute a preset XPM always be 0 e Changing Encoder Position Set for Changing Encoder Position In the example the encoder position is changed to 2000 f State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and maintain ...

Страница 552: ...tioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases d Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis4 e Error setting of Error Common by axis Depending on the errors if it is set by 0 erase the errors in ope...

Страница 553: ...ioning Module In this example Positioning Module is fixed at the 1 slot of 0 bases c Axis of command execution You can set an axis for Parameter Setting UP type supports for 4 axes In the execution of axis from the configuration of Parameter Setting you can set a value for axis1 through axis 4 d State of Operation complete If function block is completed without error 1 will be outputted and mainta...

Страница 554: ... DOG On 1 DOG HOME On c Origin detection by DOG 3 DOG 2 Methods without using DOG signal a Origin detection by Home and upper lower limit 2 U L Limit Home b High speed Homing 4 High speed c Origin detection by upper Lowerlimit 5 Upper Lower limit d Origin detection by Home 6 Home is homing parameter selection item of XG PM software package 8 1 2 Parameters for Homing 1 Home position 2 Home high sp...

Страница 555: ...it decelerates and acts by homing low speed c If HOME signal is entered after the DOG signal has changed from On to Off the origin shall be determined and it stops pulse output Operating Pattern Speed Time Homing high speed Homing low speed HOME signal DOG signal Transfer amount after DOG ON 1 rotation of SERVO motor PG1 rotation Homing command Deceleration when DOG ON Homing processing Origin fix...

Страница 556: ...gnal is changed from Off to On from On to Off the origin will not be determined even if encounters the HOME input The origin is not determined in the deceleration section Speed Time DOG signal HOME signal 3 If the DOG signal is changed from Off to On from On to Off and encounters external upper lower limit while waiting the HOME input the action is as follow 시간 Forward DOG signal Lower Limit As th...

Страница 557: ...us ON Deceleration in DOG ON Homing low spee DOG signal Home signal Moving amount after DOG ON When the homing spee is ecelerate by near origin the origin is not eci e by origin signal waiting In homing waiting Motor s 1 spin PG s 1 spin Note 1 Once the DOG signal is On when the homing speed acts from high speed to low speed via deceleration section if the HOME is entered in the state that the DOG...

Страница 558: ... low speed is active the origin would be determined and it stops Operating Pattern Time ON Spee Homing comman State of Origin Fixe Homing high spee In homing Action status ON Change the irection when meet upper limit signal Homing low spee Upper limit signal HOME signal Waiting In homing Waiting Motor 1 turning PG 1 turning Note In case that HOME signal is ON before entering the Upper Lower limit ...

Страница 559: ...peed d If encounters the DOG signals again while the homing low speed is active the origin would be determined and it stops Operating Pattern Time ON Forwar Homing comman The state of origin eci e Homing at high spee In homing Action status ON Turn the irection at the rising e ge of DOG signal DOG signal Waiting In homing Waiting Homing at Low spee Turn the irection at the rising e ge of DOG signa...

Страница 560: ...tion of the mechanical homing 1 Operation a Once Homing command executes it operates positioning with high speed and homing from current position b When using High speed homing it should be carried out in the state that the positioning by 6 types of mechanical homing by floating origin or by the current position preset is completed in advance Operating Pattern Time ON Speed Homing command State of...

Страница 561: ...igh speed b If Upper Lower limit signal is entered it transferred to opposite direction and acts by homing low speed c If Upper Lower limit signal is turned off while the homing low speed is active the origin would be determined and it stops Operating Pattern Time ON Forwar Homing comman Origin eci e Homing at high spee In homing Action status ON Turn the irection when it meet with Upper Lower lim...

Страница 562: ... high speed c When it operates in opposite direction if HOME is entered again it decelerates and transferred to opposite direction and acts by homing low speed d If encounters the HOME signals again the origin would be determined and it stops Operating Pattern Time ON Forwar Homing comman State of origin eci e Homing at high spee In homing Action status ON Turn the irection at the rising e ge of H...

Страница 563: ... falling e ge of HOME signal 2 It acts as follows if Lower limit if homing direction is forward upper limit signal is entered before HOME signal is entered Time ON Forwar Homing comman State of Origin eci e Homing at high spee In homing Action status ON Turn the irection at the rising e ge of HOME signal HOME signal Wating In homing Waiting Homing at low spee Turn the irection when it meets with L...

Страница 564: ...Execute positioning control until goal position by the trajectory of arc and control sub axis as using axis 2 according to data of main axis Helical Interpolation Set by helical interpolation axis execute linear interpolation control until goal position by the trajectory of arc and control sub axis as using axis 3 according to data of main axis Ellipse Interpolation Execute positioning control unt...

Страница 565: ...number of operation control during deceleration time Deceleration Number is selected from basic parameters which are Deceleration Number1 2 3 and 4 M Code Set the M Code when using the code number for sub operation of positioning control Dwell Time After complete the positioning control set the time until servo drive complete positioning control SubAxis Setting Set the sub axis during interpolatio...

Страница 566: ...rol Single End Finish after the completion of the current step s FEED control Keep Continue to the next step after the completion of the current step FEED control Continuous Х Errors Repeat End Change the step No to the Repeat step No after the completion of the current step FEED control Keep Continue to the repeat step No after the completion of the current step FEED control Continuous Х Errors L...

Страница 567: ...parameter must be set to Enable if Continuous Operation parameter is disabled Continuous operation command can not be executed 1 End Operation Single a With one time start command the positioning to the goal position is executed and the positioning shall be completed at the same time as the dwell time proceeds b The positioning completion of this operation mode can be used as operation mode of las...

Страница 568: ...e ON Start command In operation In acc At constant speed In dec In dwell Positioning complete ON ON ON ON Dwell time Speed Time ON Start command In operation In acc At constant speed In dec In dwell Positioning complete ON ON ON When moving amount is very small When Acc time 0 Dec time 0 ...

Страница 569: ...000 1 1 0 0 2 Absolute Single axis Positioning Control Single End 15000 500 1 1 0 0 3 Absolute Single axis Positioning Control Single End 25000 1000 1 1 0 0 4 Absolute Single axis Positioning Control Single End 30000 500 1 1 0 0 Operation Pattern Speed Time ON Start command In operation ON ON ON ON ON ON ON stepdnord d1 stepdnord d2 stepdnord d3 stepdnord d4 Operationdmoded d SingularpdEnd Operati...

Страница 570: ...the current step no changed by Repeat operation mode e Operation direction shall be determined by position address f Repeat operation step no change command is available to execute during operation Example 1 When indirect start command is executed when Step No of command is set to 0 Starting command execute total four times Setting of XG PM Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls...

Страница 571: ...00 1000 1 1 0 0 2 Absolute Single axis Positioning Control Repeat End 15000 500 1 1 0 0 3 Absolute Single axis Positioning Control Single End 25000 1000 1 1 0 0 4 Absolute Single axis Positioning Control Repeat End 30000 500 1 1 0 0 Operation Pattern If it keeps operating by start command it will operates operation step no 3 and 4 repeatedly Speed Time ON Start command In operation ON ON ON step n...

Страница 572: ... Keep execute operation data of Repeat Step Number e Operation direction shall be determined by setting value of goal position Example When indirect start command is executed when Step No of command is set to 0 Starting command execute total two times Setting of XG PM Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls Operation Speed pls s Accel NO Decel NO M Code DwellTime 1 Absolute Singl...

Страница 573: ...sition and speed of next step before the current operation step reaches the goal position the operation by the Next Move continuous operation XNMV command is available 8 Next Move continuous operation XNMV command can be executes in the acceleration constant speed deceleration section of Continuous operation 9 when executing continuous operation The continuous operation item of common parameter mu...

Страница 574: ...ch calculate the available entry speed for next step by goal position of current and next step and change current speed if the moving amount of next operation step is smaller than the deceleration distance from current position it will decrease the current speed to make stop speed and bias speed equal 3 XBC DN32UP embedded positioning executes the Look Ahead using goal position of total 3 steps in...

Страница 575: ... goal position to the data set on goal position when changing from current step to next step In the interpolation control when execute a continuous operation from current step to next step there can be mechanical vibration caused by discontinuous operating speed because of remaining moving amount XBC DN32UP use the speed compensation It can solve mechanical vibration problem and execute Continuous...

Страница 576: ...scontinuous speed Passing by near point operation Passing by near point In the picture above during general Continuous Operation Occurring speed discontinuity because of remaining amount of movement at the last operation step NO 1 Near Passing Continuous Operation you can move the remaining amount of movement to next step and execute Continuous Operation without speed discontinuity Note When using...

Страница 577: ...tion Pattern Speed Time ON Start command In operation Operation mode Singular Continuous Operation step no 1 ON Operation mode Singular End Operation step no 2 Deceleration Stop 1000 300 The Step1 will be operated by the start command however because the goal position of next step is on opposite direction from the goal position of step1 it stops after deceleration and then operate Step2 to a oppos...

Страница 578: ...mple if the operation speed of next step is 0 or if the operation method of current step is Single axis Positioning Control but operation method of Next step is Single axis FEED Control it stops after deceleration after current step s operation and then completes operation Setting of XG PM Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls Operation Speed pls s Accel NO Decel NO M Code Dwel...

Страница 579: ...on data it may cause damages to machine because of rapid direction changing In this case use the operation method of Keep to prevent the damage for system Position of sub axis Position of main axis Operation step no 1 Operation step no 2 Speed Time Operation step no 1 Operation step no 2 Start command Main in operation ON ON Speed Time Operation step no 1 Operation step no 2 Sub in operation ON Ac...

Страница 580: ...shall be determined by start position and goal position Start position Goal position forward direction positioning Start position Goal position reverse direction positioning Example Set theAbsolute Coordinates as follow Operate single axis positioning control Start position 1000 Goal position 8000 The transfer amount to forward direction shall be 7000 7000 8000 1000 1000 Starting position Goal pos...

Страница 581: ...ecrease positioning Starting position Reverse Forward Amount of movement is Amount of movement is Example Set the Relative Coordinates as follow Operate single axis positioning control Start position 5000 Goal position 7000 This will be reverse direction and positioning will be at the point of 2000 2000 Goal position Starting position 0 5000 Positioning control in reverse direction Amount of movem...

Страница 582: ...s Operation method Dwell time Absolute single axis speed control Relative single axis speed control execute same operation c Accelerating operation of speed control operate with acceleration number and time on setting data decelerating operation operate with deceleration number and time of a command deceleration stop 2 Operation Timing Stop but not to be on Time Speed Start command In operation Po...

Страница 583: ...d Control S W Upper Lower limit 0 Not Detect During Speed Control do not operate to check the range of upper lower limit of software 1 Detect During Speed Control operate to check the range of upper lower limit of software 4 Setting of XG PM Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls Operation Speed pls s Accel NO Decel NO M Code DwellTime 1 Absolute Single axis Speed Control Single...

Страница 584: ...s of operation data do not affect Coordinates Absolute single axis speed control Relative single axis speed control execute same operation 2 Operation Timing Dwell time 100ms Speed Time ON Start command In operation Positioning complete ON ON 1000 ON Dwell time 100ms Position Time 500 The current position value is 0 when positioning starts 1000 700 ON In dwell 3 Restrictions a Set the operation pa...

Страница 585: ...tioning operation in reverse Y Forward X Forward Y1 Y2 X1 X2 Moving amount of X axis Moving amount of Y axis X Reverse Y Reverse Goal position X2 Y2 Starting positon X1 Y1 Action by linear interpolation c Restrictions Linear interpolation with 2 axes may not be executed in the case below Sub axis setting Error error code 253 Sub axis setting of main axis operating data is Axis undecided Sub axis s...

Страница 586: ... for linear interpolation Acc no No 1 Set acc no for acceleration no 1 no 4 Dec no No 2 Set dec no for deceleration no 1 no 4 M code 0 When need to execute auxiliary work synchronizing with linear interpolation Dwell time 500 Set dwell time ms to outputting the signal positioning completion Sub axis setting Axis2 Set an axis to be used as sub axis among settable axis in operating data of main axis...

Страница 587: ... End 10000 3000 1 1 0 100 Axis 2 Operating data of sub axis axis2 Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls Operation Speed pls s Accel NO Decel NO M Code DwellTime Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Single positioning control Singular End 1000 0 1 1 0 0 Axis undecided Operating pattern 0 Goal posi0ion Posi0ion of Sub axis Posi0ion of main axis S0ar0ing posi0ion u000 5000 u0000 Moving amo...

Страница 588: ...same as the main axis no Sub axis setting value of main axis operating data exceeds settable axis no d Setting example of operation data Items Main axis setting Sub axis setting Description Control method Relative Linear interpolation 1 When linear interpolation control is executed by the method of relative coordinates set Relative Linear interpolation on the main axis Operating method Singular En...

Страница 589: ...operation is as follows Setting example of XG PM Operating data of main axis axis1 Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls Operation Speed pls s Accel NO Decel NO M Code DwellTime Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Linear Singular End 9000 3000 1 1 0 100 Axis2 Operating data of sub axis axis2 Step NO Control Method Operation Method Goal Position pls Operation Speed pls s Accel NO Decel ...

Страница 590: ...axes linear interpolation Position of Y Position of X Y1 Y2 X1 X2 Mo2ing amo1nt of X Sx Mo2ing amo1nt of Y Sy Action by linear interpolation Goal position X2 Y2 Speed of S1b axis Vy Vx Speed of main axis Starting position X1 Y1 F Speed of interpolation Main of amount Moving Sub of amount Moving main of Speed sub of Speed x y x y S S V V Example Starting position 2000 1000 Goal position 6000 4000 O...

Страница 591: ... speed F Operating speed of main axis Interpolating moving amount S 2 y 2 x S S Speed of main axis Interpolating speed F amount S moving axis Synthetic amount S moving axis Main x Speed of sub axis Interpolating speed F amount S moving axis Synthetic amount S moving axis Sub y Example Starting position 2000 1000 Goal position 6000 4000 Synthetic speed 400 pls s Speed of sub axis and interpolating ...

Страница 592: ...Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Linear interpolation Singular Continuous 5000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis2 2 Absolute Linear interpolation Singular End 5000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis2 Operating data of Sub axis Step no Control method Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell...

Страница 593: ...nd the goal position Starting position of Linear trace 2 through checking the position circular arc will be interpolated at The position circular arc will be interpolation at may be set in Circular arc interpolating position of extended parameter Setting items Setting value Description 2 axes linear interpolating continuous operation with circulararcinterpolation 0 2147483647 Set the position circ...

Страница 594: ...o Control method Operating method Goal pos pls speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Linear interpolation singular continuous 0 3000 No 1 No 1 0 0 Axis2 2 Absolute Linear interpolation singular continuous 5000 3000 No 1 No 1 0 0 Axis2 3 Absolute Linear interpolation singular end 5000 3000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis2 Operating data of Sub axis Step no Control method Oper...

Страница 595: ...n to interpolate circular arc 2000 is smaller than line length of step no 2 5000 and no 3 3000 so recalculate the starting position Goal position of linear trace no 1 and the goal position Starting position of linear trace no 2 of circular interpolation After continue to execute linear interpolation to the recalculated goal position of operation step no 2 3000 1000 then execute circular interpolat...

Страница 596: ...nd the goal position for each axis Starting position Goal position Positioning operation in forward Starting position Goal position Positioning operation in reverse Y1 Y2 Reverse Reverse Z1 Z2 Forward axis3 Moving amount of axis3 Moving amount of axis1 Starting position X1 Y1 Z1 Reverse Moving amount of axis2 Goal position X2 Y2 Z2 Action by linear interpolation of axis1 2 3 Forward axis2 Forward ...

Страница 597: ...tedmethodofmainaxis forlinear interpolation Acc no No 1 Set acc no foracceleration no 1 no 4 Dec no No 2 Set dec no for deceleration no 1 no 4 M code 0 Whenneedtoexecuteauxiliary work synchronizing withlinearinterpolation Dwell time 500 Set dwell time ms to outputtingthesignal positioning completion Sub axis setting Axis2 Axis3 Set anaxis tobeusedas sub axis amongsettableaxis inoperatingdataofmain...

Страница 598: ...Step no Control method Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Single axis positioning control Singular End 6000 0 No 1 No 1 0 0 None Operating data of sub axis2 axis3 Step no Control method Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Single axis pos...

Страница 599: ...rse Y1 Y2 Re2erse Re2erse Z1 Z2 Forwar axis3 Mo2ing amo1nt of axis3 Mo2ing amo1nt of axis1 Starting position X1 Y1 Z1 Re2erse Mo2ing amo1nt of axis2 Action by linear interpolation of axis1 2 3 Forwar axis2 Forwar axis1 X1 X2 c Restrictions Linear interpolation with 3 axes may not be executed in the case below Sub axis setting error error code 253 Sub axis setting value of main axis operating data ...

Страница 600: ...ed method of main axis for linear interpolation Acc no No 1 Set acc no for acceleration no 1 no 4 Dec no No 2 Set dec no for deceleration no 1 no 4 M code 0 When need to execute auxiliary work synchronizing with linear interpolation Dwell time 500 Set dwell time ms to outputting the signal positioning completion Sub axis setting Axis2 Axis3 Set an axis to be used as sub axis among settable axis in...

Страница 601: ... no Control method Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Single axis positioning control Singular End 6000 0 No 1 No 1 0 0 None Operating data of sub axis2 axis3 Step no Control method Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting 1 Absolute Single axis positio...

Страница 602: ...ing amount of X Sx Moving amount of Y Sy Action by linear interpolation Goal position X2 Y2 Z2 Vx Starting position X1 Y1 Z1 F Vy Vz Y2 Moving amount of Z Sz Z Z1 Z2 Main of amount Moving Sub of amount Moving main of Speed sub of Speed x y x y S S V V main of amount Moving sub of amount Moving main of Speed sub of Speed x z x z S S V V 2 2 2 speed ing Interpolat z y x V V V F Example Starting posi...

Страница 603: ...ontinues to operate To prevent that errors arise operate it at the speed below limit 2 The speed when the distance main axis moved is 0 When the distance main axis moved is 0 the operating speed of main axis operating data becomes actual interpolating speed In case of linear interpolation with more than 3 axes the speed of sub axis is calculated by the formula below f y y S amount moving Merged S ...

Страница 604: ...tion Positioning operation in reverse 2 Linear interpolation control with relative coordinates Relative Linear Interpolation a Execute 4 axes linear interpolation from starting position to the goal position Positioning control is on basis of the current stop position b Moving direction depends on the sign of the goal position Moving amount The sign is positive or nothing Positioning operation in f...

Страница 605: ...idpoint position Start point Current stop position Acting by circular interpolation Forward of the axis of ordinates Reverse of main axis Reverse of main axis Forward of main axis d Restriction User can t draw circle which is starting point same with last point on the circular interpolation of midpoint designation method If you want to draw circle please use method of midpoint User cannot progress...

Страница 606: ...eceleration time No for deceleration No 1 4 M code 0 Set it for progressing auxiliary operation depends on circular interpolation operation Dwell time 500 set the dwell time taken until plc outputs the signal which informs users of finishing the position decision The axis of ordinates setting Axis 2 Set axis as sub axis among settable axes of module which is using for now on the main axis operatio...

Страница 607: ... 1 Absolute Circular interpolation Singleness End 13000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis 2 10000 Midpoint 0 Do notuse The axis axis 2 of ordinates operation data Step No Control Method Operation method Target position pls Operation Speed pls s Acc Speed Dec speed M code Dwell time Sub axis setting Circular interpolation Auxiliarypoint Circular interpolation mode The number of rotationsof Circular interpo...

Страница 608: ...in axis Forward of main axis Reverse of main axis Forward of sub axis Reverse of sub axis e Restriction Can not draw circle which starting point is the same with last point on the circular interpolation of the method of designating midpoint When want to draw circle should use midpoint method In this following case it will be error and can not working circular interpolation of method of designating...

Страница 609: ... taken until plc outputs the signal which informs users of finishing the position decision Sub axis setting Axis 2 Set axis among the settable axes of current module on the main axis operation for sub Circular interpolation auxiliary point 5000 5000 Set the middle point that the arc with mid point designating method would pass by as an increment from the current stop position Circular interpolatio...

Страница 610: ...1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis 2 5000 Midpoint 0 Do notuse Sub axis axis 2 Operation data Step No Control Method Operation method Target position pls Operation Speed pls s Acc Speed Dec Speed M code Dwell time Sub axis setting Circular interpolation Auxiliarypoint Circular interpolation mode The number of rotations of Circular interpolation Helical interpolation 1 Absolute Reduction positioning control...

Страница 611: ...idpoint Absolute Circular interpolation a Operate from start position and circular interpolate to target position with the trace of circle And the circle has radius which distance is to set midpoint position Circular interpolation auxiliary point is midpoint of this circle b Moving direction depends on set direction on circular interpolation mode of operation data Midpoint CW Circular interpolatio...

Страница 612: ...xis control Error code 282 Main axis 283 Sub axis In case of midpoint which is set as auxiliary point is same with starting target position Error code 284 In case of calculated radius of circle exceed 2147483647pls Error code 286 Note Should be careful during starting circular interpolation because 2 axes act at a time 1 Available auxiliary operation is as follows Speed override Deceleration stop ...

Страница 613: ...l plc outputs the signal which informs users of finishing the position decision Sub axis setting Axis 2 Set axis among the settable axes of current module on the main axis operation for sub Circular interpolation auxiliary point 5000 5000 Set the center point on the method of designating center point Circular interpolation mode Midpoint CW In case of using the method of designating center point se...

Страница 614: ... interpolation mode The number of rotationsofCircular interpolation Helical interpolati on 1 Absolute Circular interpolatio n Singleness End 0 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis 2 1000 Centerpoint CW 0 Do notuse Sub axis axis 2 operation data Step No Control Method Operation method Target osition pls Operatio n Speed pls s Acc Speed Decel eration Speed M code Dwell time Sub axis setting Circular interpolat...

Страница 615: ...erpolation that it is drawing circle The radius of the circle is distance from starting position to center point Centerpoint of circle Target position Acting by circular interpolation Radius Start position Forward of main axis Reverse of sub axis Forward of sub axis Reverse of main axis Target position Acting by circular interpolation Radius Forward of main axis Reverse of sub axis Forward of sub ...

Страница 616: ...arget position pls 10000 0 Set target position as the amount of increment of stop position for positioning on the main axis sub axis Operation speed pls s 1000 Circular interpolation use method of designating composition speed Set composition speed on the main axis Acceleration speed No 1 Set acceleration time No for acceleration No 1 No 4 Deceleration speed No 2 Set deceleration time No for decel...

Страница 617: ...terpolation mode The number of rotationsof Circular interpolation Helical Interpolati on 1 Relative Circular interpolation Singleness Continue 2000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis 2 1000 Center point CW 0 Do notuse 1 Relative Circular interpolation Singleness End 2000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis 2 1000 Center point CW 0 Do notuse Sub axis axis 2 Operation data Step No Control Method Operation method Targe...

Страница 618: ...te In case of Starting point radius Ending point radius the more operate circular interpolation the faster Sometimes exceed Speed limit of parameter When operate circular interpolation in case of starting point radius shorter than ending point radius lower speed for never exceeding Speed limit Can operate no exceed Speed limit even if it is near to target position Forward of sub axis Target positi...

Страница 619: ...on pls Operation Speed pls s Acc Speed Dec Speed M code Dwell time Sub axis setting Circular interpolation Auxiliary point Circular Interpolation mode The number of rotations of Circular interpolation Helical interpolati on 1 Absolute circular interpolation Singleness End 600 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis 2 600 Midpoint CW 3 Do not use Sub axis axis 2 operation data Step No Control Method Operation me...

Страница 620: ...ng direction CW CCW of Circular interpolation mode and size setting of circular arc Circular arc 180 Circular arc 180 Circular interpolation mode Description Radius CW Arc 180 Execute circular interpolation in clockwise and the arc is smaller than 180 Radius CW Arc 180 Execute circular interpolation in clockwise and the arc is bigger than 10 Radius CCW Arc 180 Execute circular interpolation in cou...

Страница 621: ...rror code 285 Radius value of circular interpolation of main axis operating data is smaller than half of the length from starting position to goal position Radius R x 0 8 Error error code 270 R x 0 8 Radius R Execute circular interpolation after reset the radius to R In other words execute circular interpolation by setting the center of the line from starting position to goal position as center po...

Страница 622: ...e radius on main axis Circular interpolation Radius CW Arc 180 If use radius designation method set Radius on main axis and set moving direction of arc and size of arc The No of Turns Set the no of turns of arc for making a circle bigger than 360 Helical Not use When using circular interpolation set it to Not use 1 It means that no need to be set Whatever value it is it dose not affect circular in...

Страница 623: ...mode The no of turns Helical interpolation 1 Absolute Circular interpolation Singular End 8000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 100 Axis2 5000 Radius CW Arc 180 0 Not use Sub axis Axis2 Operating data Step No Control method Operation Method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc No Dec No M Code Dwell Time Sub axis Setting Auxiliary Point Circular interpolation mode The no of turns Helical interpolation 1 Ab...

Страница 624: ...bigger than 180 in direction of CW Radius CCW Arc 180 Execute circular interpolation with center point of arc which smaller than 180 in direction of CCW Radius CCW Arc 180 Execute circular interpolation with center point of arc which bigger than 180 in direction of CWW Center point Degree of arc 180 Degree of arc 180 CW Arc 180 Circular interpolation action Staring position Radius Radius CW Arc 18...

Страница 625: ...oint c Setting example of Operating data Items Main axis setting Sub axis setting Description Control Method Relative Circular interpolation 1 When executing circular interpolation with absolute coordinates set Relative Circular interpolation on main Operating Method Singular End Set the method to execute circular interpolation Goal position pls 10000 0 Set the goal position to execute on Main Sub...

Страница 626: ...00 0 Auxiliary point 5000 0 Moving direction of arc CCW Size of arc Arc 180 The action is as follows in the condition above Setting example in XG PM Main axis Axis1 Operating data Step No Control method Operation Method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc No Dec No M Code Dwell Time Sub axis Setting Auxiliary Point Circular interpolation mode The no of turns Helical interpolation 1 Relativ...

Страница 627: ...coordinates setting and the goal position The case of Absolute Circular interpolation Starting position Goal position Positioning operation in forward direction Starting position Goal position Positioning operation in reverse direction The case of Relative Circular interpolation Positive sign or No sign Positioning operation in forward direction Negative sign Positioning operation in reverse direc...

Страница 628: ...ec no No 2 Set dec time no used in deceleration no 1 no 4 M code 0 Set it when user needs to synchronize another auxiliary operation with helical interpolation Dwell time 500 Set dwell time ms for outputting positioning complete signal Sub axis setting Axis2 Set an axis to be used as sub axis from settable axis on main axis operation data Auxiliary point of Circular interpolation 5000 5000 Set aux...

Страница 629: ...rol method Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time Sub axis setting Auxiliary point of circular interpolation Circular interpolation mode No of turn of circular interpolati on Helical interpolati on 1 Absolute single axis position control Singular End 1200 0 No 1 No 1 0 100 400 Middle point 0 Not use Operation data of sub axis axis2 Step no Control ...

Страница 630: ... Description Ratio of ellipse 0 65535 Set the ratio of horizontal axis and vertical axis with the ratio to the circle 1 0 01 Size Degree of ellipse 0 65535 Set the degree of ellipse s movement 1 0 1 b Moving direction of ellipse is decided by the direction set on circular interpolation mode of operation data Center point CW Execute ellipse interpolation in clockwise Center point CCW Execute ellips...

Страница 631: ...ly Exceeding settable axis no An axis of helical interpolation is set Control unit of main or sub axis is set as degree error code 551 main 552 sub The center point designated as auxiliary point is the same as starting position or goal position error code 553 The radius of circular arc that calculated exceeds 2147483647pls error code 554 The operating method is continuous or go on error code 556 I...

Страница 632: ...rt in ellipse interpolation Acc no No 1 Set no of acc time to use in acceleration no1 4 Dec no No 2 Set no of dec time to use in deceleration no1 4 M code 0 Set it when executing another auxiliary operation synchronizing with ellipse interpolation Dwell time 500 Set dwell time for outputting positioning complete Sub axis setting Axis2 Set an axis to use as sub axis among the axis available on main...

Страница 633: ...data of Sub axis axis2 Step no Controlmethod Operating method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc No Dec No M code Dwell Time Setting Sub axis Auxiliarypoint of circular interpolation Circular interpolation mode The no of turns Helical interpolation 1 Absolute Single axis position control Singular End 0 0 No 1 No 1 0 0 Undecided 400 Middle point 0 Not use Operating data Main axis Forward S...

Страница 634: ...he position value is Negative c For using External speed position switching control External speed position switching control must be set as 1 Allowed Item Setting value Description External speed position switching control 0 Not allowed External speed position switching control signal is ignored and it does not affect operation 1 Allowed External speed position switching control signal is operate...

Страница 635: ...ing speed position switching control set single axis speed control Operating method Singular End When executing speed position switching control set end or continuous Goal position pls 10000 After inputting speed position switching control set moving amount to position Operating speed pls s 1000 Set the operating speed of speed position switching control Acc no No1 Set acc no used in acceleration ...

Страница 636: ...b Set the speed position switching coordinate Item Setting value Description speed position switching coordinate 0 Incremental Operates as relative coordinates from the position at command executed 1 Absolute Operates as absolute coordinates regardless of executed position c In speed position switching control the value of coordinates has no affection In other words actions of Absolute single axis...

Страница 637: ...en executing speed position switching control set single axis speed control Operating method Singular End When executing speed position switching control set end or continuous Goal position pls 10000 After inputting speed position switching control set moving amount to position Operating speed pls s 1000 Set the operating speed of speed position switching control Acc no No1 Set acc no used in acce...

Страница 638: ...e position control to speed control with Speed Position Switching b Direction of movement depends on the sign of value and coordinates Absolute Single axis position control Starting position Goal position Positioning in forward direction Starting position Goal position Positioning in reverse direction Relative Single axis position control The value of goal position has positive sign Positioning in...

Страница 639: ...Items Setting value Description Control method Absolute Single axis speed control When executing position speed switching control set single axis speed control Operating method Singular End Set operating method for position control Goal position pls 10000 Set the value of goal position for position control Operating speed pls s 1000 Set the operating speed of position speed switching control Acc n...

Страница 640: ...ation time number for acceleration No 1 No 4 Reduction time No Set reduction time number for reduction No 1 No 4 Coordinate Set coordinate about target position of set control absolute relative Control method When command of converting position speed is not inputted and only operated by positioning control set dwell time ms that it is from positioning to outputting signal of positioning 0 Position...

Страница 641: ... current using module among the possible setting axes Example Set Simultaneous start of axis 1 axis 2 axis 3 is as follows Current position of axis 1 0 Operation step 1 Current position of axis 2 0 Operation step 3 Current position of axis 3 0 Operation step 10 Example of setting XG PM Operation data of axis 1 Step No Control method Operation method Target position pls Operation speed pls s Accele...

Страница 642: ...Deceleration stop command Axis 3 ON ON ON 1000 Operating Axis 2 ON Operating Axis 3 ON Signal of finishing positioning axis 2 Signal of finishing positioning axis 3 500 300 Operation step No of Axis 1 1 Operation step No of Axis 2 3 Operation step No of Axis 3 10 Only its axis decelerate and stop Operation step No of Axis 1 2 800 ON ON Dwelldtime uttms ...

Страница 643: ...hod Operation method Target position pls Operation speed pls s Acceleratio n No Deceleratio n No M code Dwell time 1 Absolute Shorten position control Singleness End 1000 1000 1 1 0 20 2 Absolute Shorten position control Singleness End 3000 2000 1 1 0 20 10 Absolute Shorten position control Singleness Keep 6000 3000 1 1 0 20 11 Absolute Shorten position control Singleness Keep 10000 4000 1 1 0 20 ...

Страница 644: ...Positioning Chapter 8 Functions 8 91 ...

Страница 645: ...stop When operate to reverse sudden stop Sudden stop Error Error493 No change External emergency stop On 8 Sudden stop Error Error491 prohibition output Off External stop On 9 Deceleration stop Deceleration stop Error322 Keep operation Deceleration stop Stop On No change XG PM Software Deceleration stop command Deceleration stop Deceleration stop Error322 Keep operation Deceleration stop Stop On N...

Страница 646: ...deceleration stop Internal external deceleration stop Internal deceleration stop command It decelerate and stop by XG PM and deceleration stop command of sequence program as set support data External deceleration stop signal In case of input signal of external emergency stop deceleration stop to be On it will be decelerated and stopped by set deceleration time in current positioning operation Have...

Страница 647: ...top command ON ON ON Complep Deceleration stop as setted time Internal deceleration stop command External stop command Speed limit Setting speed Time Deceleration of current operation If the deceleration distance is longer than distance to target position when input deceleration stop command during positioning control operation it will be stopped at the target position Target position Deceration s...

Страница 648: ...op to be On it will be decelerated stopped and error will be occurred as set time in deceleration time when it is suddenly stopped of basic parameter Have to set select external emergency stop deceleration stop of expansion parameter for using signal of inputting external emergency stop deceleration stop as external emergency stop command Item Setting value Contents Select external emergency stop ...

Страница 649: ...occur and in case of external input stroke low limit error error 493 will occur Setting related parameter basic parameter Item Setting value Content When sudden stop deceleration time 0 2147483647 ms Set deceleration time for using when detect hardware high low limit signal Deceleration time express needed time for deceleration as bias speed at speed limit when suddenly stop c Motion timing Time S...

Страница 650: ... low limit range will occur error 502 Setting related parameter expansion parameter Item Setting value Contents Software high limit 2147483648 2147483647 Set position of software high limit Software low limit 2147483648 2147483647 Set position of software low limit c Condition Software high low limit not to be checked in the following case In case of setting Software high low limits as maximum 214...

Страница 651: ...leration time bigger than deceleration stop time it will be decelerated and stopped as set deceleration stop time Note Process is as follows when factor of sudden stop is occurred during deceleration stop Positioning speed S t o p p o s i t i o n b y deceleration stop factor Deceleration stop command ON ON Emergency stop command Deceleration stop factor generation Sudden stop factor generation Sof...

Страница 652: ...or interpolation e Operation pattern Time Composition speed Starting command Be operating main axis Internal deceleration stop command ON ON ON Setting speed Deceleration stop as setted deceleration time Forward of main axis Forward of the axis of ordinates Decelerate and stop as the trace of the wheels of circular Starting point Target point Be operating the axis of ordinates ON 8 Restart after P...

Страница 653: ...igin b Acceleration Deceleration process and Jog speed The acceleration deceleration processing is controlled based on the setting time of Jog acceleration deceleration time from XG PM manual operation parameter setting Set the Jog speed on Jog high low speed of XG PM manual operation parameter setting If Jog speed is set out of the setting range error will occur and the operation does not work Pa...

Страница 654: ... Jog low high speed Signal ON Note Notices for setting Jog speed are as follows Jog Low Speed Jog High Speed Speed Limit Time Speed Jog High Speed Jog Low Speed Speed Limit 3 Restrictions You can not execute Jog operation in the case as follows a Value of Jog High Speed exceeds the speed limit of basic parameter Error code 121 b Value of Jog Low Speed exceeds the value of Jog high speed Error code...

Страница 655: ...ositioning module Output Signal Description Axis1 U01 01 0 Axis1 Forward Jog U01 01 1 Axis1 Reverse Jog U01 01 2 Axis1 Jog Low High Speed U01 01 3 Axis2 U01 01 4 Axis2 Forward Jog U01 01 5 Axis2 Reverse Jog U01 01 6 Axis2 Jog Low High Speed U01 01 7 Axis3 U01 01 8 Axis3 Forward Jog U01 01 9 Axis3 Reverse Jog U01 01 A Axis3 Jog Low High Speed U01 01 B Axis4 U01 01 C Axis4 Forward Jog U01 01 D Axis4...

Страница 656: ...Forward Jog Signal Uxx 01 0 In Operation Positioning complete signal ON ON Jog High Speed Change to Jog High Speed Jog Low Speed Jog High Low Speed Signal Uxx 01 2 ON Reverse Jog Signal Uxx 01 1 ON Jog Low Speed Jog High Speed Change to Jog Low Speed Forward Jog operation Reverse Jog Operation Stop but not turn ON Note Dec stop command will not be executed in Jog Operation Jog operation will stop ...

Страница 657: ...nge is 2147483648 2147483647 Pulse d The direction of moving depends on the amount of inching The amount is POSITIVE Positioning operation in forward direction The amount is NEGATIVE Positioning operation in reverse direction e Acc Dec process and Inching speed Use Jog acc dec Time of manual operation as acc dec time of Inching operation Set Jog acc dec time on Jog acc dec time of manual operation...

Страница 658: ...ter 8 Functions 8 105 2 Operation Timing Time Speed Inching operation command In operation Positioning complete Signal ON ON Inching Speed Accelerating at Jog acc time Decelerating at Jog dec time Amount of Inching ON ...

Страница 659: ... time on homing acc dec time of homing parameter of XG PM If returning speed is set out of the setting range error will occur and the operation does not work Related parameter setting Homing Parameter Item Setting value Description Homing speed 1 Speed limit Set returning speed Homing acc time 0 2147483647 Set acc time used in return Homing dec time 0 2147483647 Set dec time used in return 2 Opera...

Страница 660: ...remain in the state of speed sync operation before release of speed sync command d Auxiliary data of speed sync command The auxiliary data used in speed sync command is as follows Item Setting value Description MainAxis 1 axis1 4 axis4 9 Encoder Set the main axis of speed sync Ratio of Main axis 32768 32767 Set the ratio of main axis at speed sync ratio Ratio of Sub axis 32768 32767 Set the ratio ...

Страница 661: ...fore use b In the case that the axis set as main axis is not the axis can be set or the case that the setting of main axis is the same as the setting of command axis error code 355 arises Set the main axis among the axis available to be set c If the speed of main axis exceeds the speed limit error code 357 arises In the case the speed of main axis has to be down below the speed limit In the case t...

Страница 662: ...method Operation method Goal Position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code DwellTime 1 Relative Reduction position control Single End 10000 2000 No 1 No 1 0 0 Operating pattern Time Speed Main axis Start command Main axis in operation Main axis positioning complete signal ON ON 2000 Sub axis Speed sync command ON Sub axis In operation ON Ratio of main axis 2 Sub axis stop command ON Stop...

Страница 663: ...ositioning in reverse direction Input pulse of B phase is ahead ofA s The value of position increase when the input pulse of phase A is ahea of B s The value of position ecrease when the input pulse of phase B is ahea of A s Above 0 5 Phase A Phase B The operating direction of sub axis depends on MainAxis of Ratio SubAxis of Ratio sync speed of Ratio If it is positive operating direction will be f...

Страница 664: ...on of encoder is forward the operating direction of sub axis is reverse When the direction of encoder is reverse the operating direction of sub axis is forward Operating pattern Time Speed 2000 Speed sync for axis2 ON Axis2 in operation ON Stop command for axis2 ON Stop but not turn On Positioning complete signal of axis2 1000 Ratio of main axis Ratio of sub axis 1 2 Encoder phase A Input Encoder ...

Страница 665: ...ub axis become the goal position it stops speed sync and stay there For the details refer to Speed sync control e Auxiliary data of positioning speed sync command The auxiliary data used in speed sync is as follows Items Setting value Description Main axis 1 axis1 4 axis4 9 Encoder Set main axis Ratio of main axis 32768 32767 Set ratio of main axis Ratio of sub axis 32768 32767 Set ratio of sub ax...

Страница 666: ...of the position synchronous start e In case of cancellation after executing the SSP command at the subordinate axis if you execute the stop command the SSP command shall be released f The auxiliary data of position sync command The auxiliary data used in position sync is as follows Items Setting Value Description Position of position sync 2147483648 2147483647 Set the position of main axis in posi...

Страница 667: ...of main axis ON Dwell Time Time Position for position sync Position Position of sub axis 3 Restrictions Position sync control can be executed in the case below a If position sync command is executed in M code signal is On error code 343 arises Use it after making M code Off with M code release command XMOF b If the current main axis is not the axis can be set on the current module or main axis and...

Страница 668: ...n control Single axis End 2000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 0 Sub axis axis2 Operation data Step no Control method Operation Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time 10 Relative Single axis position control Single axis End 2000 2000 No 2 No 2 0 0 Operating pattern Time Speed Start command for axis1 Axis1 in operation Axis1 positioning complete signal ON ON 2000 1000 Position syn...

Страница 669: ...ts CAM operation Encoder can not be used as main axis You may set different CAM block no for each axis In addition it is possible to execute CAM operation with the same CAM block In order to use user CAM operation you have to set up CAM block number as 8 e You can make sub axis start the CAM operation at the specified position of main axis by setting the Main axis offset Main axis offset setting i...

Страница 670: ... of each CAM data step a Main Sub parameter setting 1 Unit Set the control unit of main sub axis Set the same as the value already set on Unit of basic parameter Item Setting Range Remarks Unit of main axis pulse mm inch degree Unit of sub axis pulse mm inch Degree may not be used 2 Transfer distance per 1 rotation Set the transfer distance per 1 rotation of main sub axis The unit of transfer dist...

Страница 671: ...r last set must be set as 0 CAM data Position En ing position of Sub axis Position of main axis Position in 1rotation of main axis Position of sub axis En ing position of main axis Time Time Time t 1 rotation of main axis 1 cycle 1 cycle 1 cycle Increase Feed mode Execute CAM operation from starting position of sub axis to ending position according to the position in 1rotation of main axis CAM dat...

Страница 672: ...e no of CAM data is so you may execute much smoother CAM operation However if point unit is small no of CAM data exceeds 2048 so there is a chance that user can not create CAM data CAM data Position of sub axis En ing position of sub axis t 1rotation of main axis Point unit Position of main axis Note When set CAM block data after point unit setting Ending position of main axis must be set as posit...

Страница 673: ... If control method is Repeat Two way mode the ending position of sub axis in the last section must be 0 If control method is Increase Feed mode the ending position of sub axis in the last section generally has to be set as much as the transfer distance per 1rotation set on main sub axis parameter 5 CAM curve Set CAM specific curve to create data ranging from starting position of sub axis to ending...

Страница 674: ...526 8 00947 0 98712 No Dwell Modified Trapezoid 1 00000 1 71788 4 19885 2 09942 One Dwell Modified Trapezoid 1 00000 1 91589 4 43866 55 77788 Modified Trapezoid 1 00000 1 99975 4 88812 0 30562 Asymmetrical Modified Trapezoid 1 00000 1 99982 6 11015 0 47620 One Dwell Cycloidal 1 00000 1 75953 5 52756 0 17345 Cycloidal 1 00000 1 99985 6 28273 0 19715 Asymmetrical Cycloidal 1 00000 1 99989 7 85304 0 ...

Страница 675: ...ing of CAM operation is 1000 the current position is 1073 and point unit is 10 the step no of CAM data is as follows t Point Uni Axis Main of 1rotation per Positio Current no Step Data Cam d Calculate update position of sub axis with CAM data step If main axis is forward direction calculate the position of sub axis with the position corresponding to the part of positive number of CAM data step no ...

Страница 676: ...1rotation of main axis Time Time 1 cycle Start command for main axis Main axis in operation Positioning complete signal for main axis ON ON CAM operation for sub axis ON Sub axis In operation ON Stop command for sub axis ON Stop but no turn On Positioning complete signal for sub axis ON 1 cycle Time Transfer distance per 1rotation of sub axis Starting position Goal position 0 0 ...

Страница 677: ...e per 1rotation of sub axis Master Axis starting Posr Goal Posr t t Offset CAM operation starting Posr Sub Axis starting Posr 5 Restrictions CAM operation command may not be executed in the cases below a If execute CAM operation command in being On of M code error code 702 arises Make M code OFF with M code release XMOF command before use b If the current main axis is not the axis can be set on th...

Страница 678: ... it operates CAM curve between CAM points with straight line CAM point data is set up at sub axis and as type of main axis position sub axis position CAM data point can be saved at the specified memory address of each axis by using Write Variable Data XVWR XPM_VWR command For memory address to save CAM data point of each axis refer to 3 10 User CAM data memory address Note Change of User CAM data ...

Страница 679: ... completion 2147483648 2147483647 Set the position after homing completion or floating origin setting Note Floating origin setting just executes forced origin decision from the current position to origin completion position So user need to take notice as follows 1 When error arose clear the cause of error and reset 2 set floating origin again 3 change the operation step no to operate with start st...

Страница 680: ...eration mo e Singular En Step no 2 Operation mo e Singular Continuous Step no 1 Time Spee ON ON A Position P2 Position P1 Position P2 Position P1 Position P1 P2 Position P1 Position P1 P2 Continuous operation comman Operation mo e Singular En Step no 2 Operation mo e Singular En Step no 2 Operation mo e Singular Continuous Step no 1 Operation mo e Singular Continuous Step no 1 Operation on absolut...

Страница 681: ...he current operation step no is the last step 400 of operation data error code 399 i The current axis in operation is executed by direct start command error code 400 j The continuous operation of common paramert is Disabled error code 160 Example Execute continuous operation on axis1 operating by absolute single axis position control Current position ofAxis1 0 Setting example in XG PM Operation da...

Страница 682: ...t In operation In operation ON Time Spee ON Position P2 Position P1 Position P2 Position P1 P2 Position P1 Position P1 P2 Skip operation comman Operation mo e Singular En Step no 2 Operation mo e Singular Continuous Step no 1 Operation on absolute coor inates Operation on relative coor inates N o t U s e C o n i n u o u s O p e r a t U s e C o n t i n u o u s O p e r a t i o n Operation mo e Singu...

Страница 683: ...r interpolation error code 338 Skip operation in circular interpolation operation must be executed on main axis Example Execute skip operation command on axis1 operating by absolute and single axis position control Current position of axis1 0 Setting example in XG PM Operation data of axis1 Step no Control method Operation method Goal position pls Operating speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell t...

Страница 684: ...ride at the moment of commanding position override is bigger than the position it stopped at the positioning direction would be forward If it is smaller the direction would be reverse d This command may be executed several times in operation 2 Operation timing Position ON Spee Start In operation ON Setting Spee Position overri e comman ON Positioning complete ON Overri e position2 Current position...

Страница 685: ... Setting spee 3 Restrictions In the cases below position override is not executed and previous operation is being kept a Execute position override in dwell error code 362 b Current operation is not positioning control single axis positioning Inching operation error code 363 c Execute position override on the axis operating linear interpolation error code 364 d Execute position override on the axis...

Страница 686: ...pattern Position ON Spee Start comman In operation ON Operation mo e Singular En Operation step no 2 Operation mo e Singular continuous Operation step no 1 2ttt uttt ON Positioning complete ON Pre2ious operation pattern of position o2erri e Operate the next step at o2erri e position uttt 5ttt t Position o2erri e 2ttt O2erri e position 2000 Goal position O2erri e position Note If operation pattern ...

Страница 687: ...on parameter Items Setting value Description Speed override 0 setting Set the speed override setting value by 1 speed setting Set the speed override setting value with exact number e Auxiliary data of speed override command setting Items Setting value Description Speed 1 65535 1 0 01 Set the speed override setting value with percentage If it is 100 set 10000 1 Speed limit Set the speed override se...

Страница 688: ...de in dec area error code 377 f In the case that acc dec pattern of extended parameter is S curve operation error code 378 Example Execute speed override 50 100 200 150 on axis1 operating by absolute single axis position control Current position of axis1 0 Speed override of common parameter Set Speed limit of basic parameter 3000 pls s Setting example of XG PM Operation data of axis1 Step no Contr...

Страница 689: ...te position or a relative position f Related parameter setting Common parameter Items Setting value Description Speed override 0 Set Set the value of speed override by 1 Set speed Set the value of speed override with exact number Extended parameter Items Setting value Description Coordinates of positioning speed override 0 Absolute Speed override is executed in the designated absolute position 1 R...

Страница 690: ...rride speed of linear interpolation for each axis need to be below speed limit c Execute positioning speed override on the sub axis of linear interpolation error code 384 In linear interpolation positioning speed override must be executed on main axis d Execute speed override on the sub axis of circular interpolation error code 385 In circular interpolation positioning speed override must be execu...

Страница 691: ...rride of extended parameter Absolute Setting example in XG PM Operation data of axis1 Step no Control method Operation method Goal position pls Operation speed pls s Acc no Dec no M code Dwell time 1 Absolute single axis position control Singular End 5000 2000 No 1 No 1 0 0 Operation pattern Position ON Spee Start comman In operation ON 2ttt ON Positioning complete ON O2erri e spee 4000 5ttt t 2tt...

Страница 692: ...ute homing command c The current position preset command may not be executed in operation d Auxiliary data setting of current position preset command Items Setting value Description Position 2147483648 2147483647 Set the position to change 2 Operation timing ON Current position preset command ON Origin deciding signal Position Time Current position Preset position Origin If the position to preset ...

Страница 693: ...not entered d Auxiliary data setting of encoder preset command Items Setting value Description Position 2147483648 2147483647 Set the encoder position to change on selected encoder Types 0 Encoder Select encoder to change Must be 0 2 Operation timing ON Encoder preset command Encoder Position Time Current position Position to preset Min value of encoder Max value of encoder 0 Encoder A phase input...

Страница 694: ...ly executed in stop motion or error arises c Auxiliary data setting of start step no change command Items Setting value Description Step 1 400 Set the step no to change 2 Operation timing Time ON Speed Start command IST Step 0 d In operation d d ON d d d Start step no change command ON d Positioning complete ON Operation step no 1 ON d d Operation step no n 1 2 n n 1 n 1 Stepdnord dn Current step ...

Страница 695: ...d can be executed during positioning operation c Auxiliary data setting of repeat operation step no change command Items Setting value Description Step 1 400 Set the repeat operation step no to change 2 Operation timing Time ON Speed Start command IST step 0 d In operation d d ON d d d Repeat operation step no change command ON d Positioning complete ON Operation step no 10 ON d d Operation step n...

Страница 696: ...osition control Singular Go on 1000 1000 No 1 No 1 0 0 2 Absolute single axis position control Singular continuous 2000 2000 No 1 No 1 0 0 3 Absolute single axis position control Singular continuous 4000 3000 No 1 No 1 0 0 4 Absolute single axis position control Repeat Continuous 2000 3000 No 1 No 1 0 0 5 Absolute single axis position control Singular End 5000 2000 No 1 No 1 0 0 Operation pattern ...

Страница 697: ...a positioning operation is not executed d If it is stopped by hardware high low limit detection move it into the controllable area with Jog operation in reverse direction of detected signal e Hardware high low limit is shown as follows Moving irection Start Start High limit Low limit Stopper Low limit swich Moving irection Controllable range of positioning mo ule Stopper When etecte high limit sto...

Страница 698: ... error 501 Low limit error 502 e User may set the position value of high low limit on extended parameter Related parameter setting Extended parameter Items Setting value Description Soft High Limit 2147483648 2147483647 Set the position of soft high limit Soft Low Limit 2147483648 2147483647 Set the position of soft low limit f Software high low limit is shown as follows Software Low limit Moving ...

Страница 699: ...software high low limit If the value of current position becomes 2147483647 in forward operation the current position becomes 2147483646 and keeps operating in forward direction If the value of current position becomes 2147483647 in reverse operation the current position becomes 2147483646 and keeps operating in reverse direction ...

Страница 700: ... execute continuous operation to the next step f User may turn M code signal off and set M code no to 0 with M code release command M code release command can be used even during operation g M code mode is set from M code output item of extended parameter 0 NONE 1 WITH 2 AFTER Related parameter setting Extended parameter Items Setting value Description M code mode 0 None Not to output M code signa...

Страница 701: ...sitioning control Singular continuous 1000 2000 No 1 No 1 100 100 2 Absolute single axis positioning control Singular continuous 3000 2000 No 1 No 1 200 100 3 Absolute single axis positioning control Singular continuous 5000 2000 No 1 No 1 300 100 Operation pattern Time ON Speed Start command d In operation d d ON d d Positioning complete d 0 M code no output ON M code ON d d ON 300 M code release...

Страница 702: ...ng repeat position 1 t is activated when the infinite running repeat parameter is enabled 1 Characteristics of Control a infinite running repeat position can be designated between 1 2 147 483 647 Operation pattern Time Speed Starting command ON Goal Position Starting Position Goal Position Time Position Infinite repeat running position 0 ...

Страница 703: ...r may change speed value or position value and operation data is saved permanently even in non power connection d The value of goal position being changed is position teaching the value of operating speed being changed is speed teaching e The axis in operation may be the subject of position teaching or speed teaching f If user changes the value of goal position or operating speed frequently this c...

Страница 704: ...ng array command may not be executed in the case as follows a The number of teaching array is out of the range 1 16 Error code 462 b Teaching step no is out of the range 1 400 Error code 465 Total number Teaching step no The number of Teaching must be below 400 ...

Страница 705: ...ot available in operation c RAM teaching and ROM teaching are available depending on the saving position RAM teaching When executing teaching to operation data of module and operating module in power connection user may change speed value or position value but the speed value and position value are not saved in non power connection ROM teaching When executing teaching to operation data of module a...

Страница 706: ...m to do execute teaching 2 Acc time 1 0 2147483647 3 Acc time 2 4 Acc time 3 5 Acc time 4 6 Dec time 1 7 Dec time 2 8 Dec time 3 9 Dec time 4 10 Emergent Dec time 11 Plse rotation 1 200000000 12 Transferring distance rotation 1 200000000 13 Unit 0 pulse 1 mm 2 inch 3 degree 14 Double precision of unit 0 x1 1 x10 2 x100 3 x1000 15 Speed unit 0 unit time 1 rpm 16 Bias speed 1 Speed limit 17 Pulse ou...

Страница 707: ...mode 0 None 1 With 2 After 9 Soft high low limit In speed control 0 Not to detect 1 Detect 10 Servo reset retention time 1 5000 ms 11 Positioning method of interpolation continuous operation 0 Pass the goal position 1 Pass near position 12 Circular interpoation of 2 axes linear interpolating continuous operation 0 No circular interpolation 1 Circular interpolating continuous operation 13 External ...

Страница 708: ...ute teching 2 High speed homing Bias speed Speed limit 3 Low speed homing Bias speed Speed of High speed homing 4 Acc time for homing 0 2147483647 5 Dec time for homing 6 Dwell time for homing 0 65535 7 Origin revision 2147483648 2147483647 8 Restart time for homing 0 65535 9 Homing mode 0 Near Origin Origin Off 1 Near Origin Origin On 2 High Low limit Origin 3 Near Origin 4 High speed origin 5 Hi...

Страница 709: ... about basic parameter items and setting value refer to Chapter 4 parameter and operation data 6 I O Signal Parameter Teaching a Change the setting value of designated item from I O signal parameter of module into teaching data b Auxiliary data setting of I O signal parameter teaching command Items Setting value Description Teaching data Bit 0 High limit signal Set the setting form of input signal...

Страница 710: ...g range Teaching items 1 Speed override 0 setting 1 speed setting Select the parameter item to execute teching 2 Encoder pulse input 0 CW CCW 1 multiplying 1 PULSE DIR 1 multiplying 2 PHASEA B 4 multiplying 3 Maximum value of encoder 2147483648 2147483647 4 Minimum value of encoder 5 Pulse output level 0 LowActive 1 HighActive 6 Continuous operation 0 Disable 1 Enable Teaching method 0 RAM teachin...

Страница 711: ...ly Operating step data will apply end of present step operation c RAM teaching and ROM teaching are available depending on the saving position RAM teaching When executing teaching to operation data of embedded positioning and operating embedded positioning in power connection user may change speed value or position value but the speed value and position value are not saved in non power connection ...

Страница 712: ...ular interpolation turn 0 65535 9 Coordinates 0 Absolute 1 Relative 10 Control method 0 single axis position control 1 single axis speed control 2 single axis Feed control 3 Linear interpolation control 4 Circular interpolation control 11 Operating method 0 Singular 1 Repeat 12 Operating pattern 0 End 1 Keep 2 Continuous 13 Size of circular arc 0 Circular arc 180 1 Circular arc 180 14 Acc no 0 3 1...

Страница 713: ...tion Read address 0 49586 Sets head address of Read Data Block offset 0 49586 Sets offset between blocks of Read Data Block size 1 128 Sets size of block No of block 1 128 Sets No of Read Block Block 1 Block 2 Block n Block 1 Block 2 Block n Data address Block size Block offset No of block Axis 1 operation data Common parameter Axis 4 operation data CAM data 0 49586 Operation parameter 128 word f ...

Страница 714: ...ta device 0 49586 Sets device where data to write to module is saved Write address 0 49586 Sets head address of positioning module internal memory Block offset 0 49586 Sets offset between blocks of Write data Block size 1 128 Sets size of block No of block 1 128 Sets No of Write block Block 1 Block 2 Block n Block 1 Block 2 Block n Data address Block size Block offset No of block Module internal m...

Страница 715: ... 111 Extended Parameter software upper lower limit range error S W upper limit of Extended Parameter should be greater than or equal to S W lower limit of Extended Parameter 112 M Code Mode value of Extended Parameter exceeds the range M Code output of Extended Parameter is 0 None 1 With 2 After Select one among three 113 S Curve rate of Extended Parameter exceeds the range Change S Curve rate of ...

Страница 716: ...arameter exceeds the range Set Encoder input signal of Common parameter to be between 0 and 2 148 Encoder max min value of common parameter Exceeds the range Set Encoder max value smaller than min value also set encoder max min value contains current position 6 Error Information of Operating Data Error Code Error Description Solutions 151 Not available to set operation speed value of Operation dat...

Страница 717: ...rt command execution while XG PM is sending operating data Once current operation is done eliminate error with error reset command then execute writing command again Do not execute start operation while operating data sending 174 Parameter writing command cannot be done because of start command execution while XG PM is sending CAM data Once current operation is done eliminate error with error rese...

Страница 718: ...o operate and the current origin determination state Available to carry out absolute coordinate operation after origin determination by Homing command or floating origin setting command 235 Not possible to carry out Indirect Start command in the state of Servo Ready OFF Check if Driver Ready signal of command axis is OFF when Indirect Start command is executed 236 Not possible to carry out Continu...

Страница 719: ...erpolation circular insertion are longer than goal position Set low for position of 2 axis linear interpolation continuous operating circular insertion from expanded parameter smaller than goal position 263 Not possible to insert the circular because two lines of 2axis continuous linear interpolation circular insertion are at the same position Set again for goal position or set 0 Not insert circul...

Страница 720: ...he operation as Drive Ready is OFF in main axis of circular interpolation Check if Driver Ready signal of main axis is OFF when circular interpolation command is executed 281 Not possible to carry out the operation as Drive Ready is OFF in subordinate axis of circular interpolation Check if Driver Ready signal of subordinate axis 1 is OFF when circular interpolation command is executed 282 Not pos...

Страница 721: ...and is executed 304 Not possible to carry out Speed Position control switching command if there is no goal position Check if the operation has the goal position when speed position control switching command is executed 306 For position specified speed position switching instruction when Unlimited length repetition enable and Speed position switching coordinate absolute the position value which mak...

Страница 722: ...ble to carry out Skip command for subordinate axis of Synchronous Start operation Check if the axis is in operation by subordinate axis of Synchronous Start operation when Skip command is executed 335 Not possible to carry out Skip command in the state of Jog operation Check if the axis is in Jog operation when Skip command is executed 336 Not possible to carry out Skip command in the state of Dir...

Страница 723: ...n the state of in operation of main axis Execute Synchronous Start by Speed command while main axis Is not operating when it is state of stop 351 Not possible to carry out Synchronous Start by Speed command in the state of in operation Check if the axis is in operation when Synchronous Start by Speed command is executed 353 Not possible to carry out Synchronous Start by Speed command in the state ...

Страница 724: ...xis is set as S Curve 381 Not possible to carry out Random position speed override command not in the state of in operation Check if the axis is stop state when Random position speed override command is executed 382 Not possible to carry out Random position speed override command not in positioning operation Check if the axis is in speed control operation when Random position speed override comman...

Страница 725: ...nd in the state that Drive Ready is OFF Check if Drive Ready signal of the axis is OFF when Inching command is executed 411 Not possible to carry out Jog Start command in the state of in operation Check if the axis is in operation when Jog Start command is executed 413 Not possible to carry out Jog Start command in the state that Servo Ready is OFF Check if Driver Ready signal of the axis is OFF w...

Страница 726: ... teaching list 474 Parameter Operation data saving commands cannot be done while the axis is operating Check if the axis is operating when Parameter Operation data saving commands are operating Execute Parameter Operation command when any axis are not operating 475 Error of value for teaching data is out of range Execute teaching command after setting value of parameter teaching or operating data ...

Страница 727: ...Positioning Chapter 9 Positioning Error Information Solutions 9 13 ...

Страница 728: ...ion when ellipse interpolation main axis is not positioned Execute Ellipse interpolation command after set main axis as a state of being origin with homing command or floating origin setting 546 Unable to execute the determine absolute coordinate position operation when ellipse interpolation sub axis is not positioned Execute Ellipse interpolation command after set sub axis as a state of being ori...

Страница 729: ...s by interpolated axis Check the error from subordinate axis of main axis by current axis whether it is occurred during the operation of interpolated axis 701 Not possible to carry out CAM command in the state of in operation Execute CAM command when main axis is not operating 702 Not possible to carry out CAM command in the state of M Code ON Execute CAM command after set M Code OFF from commandi...

Страница 730: ...the command that restart is not supported is used 722 Restart command can t be executed during operation Check whether any axis is under operation 801 Current module of command axis is set lager than number of possible operating axis Execute after set a possible operating number of command axis for current module 811 Previous command is not processed It is impossible to execute command additionall...

Страница 731: ...57 9D 227 E3 Dec time3 High 18 12 88 58 158 9E 228 E4 Dec time4 Low 19 13 89 59 159 9F 229 E5 Dec time4 High 20 14 90 5A 160 A0 230 E6 Dec time for EMG stop Low 21 15 91 5B 161 A1 231 E7 Dec time for EMG stop High 22 16 92 5C 162 A2 232 E8 Pulse per rotation Low 23 17 93 5D 163 A3 233 E9 Pulse per rotation High 24 18 94 5E 164 A4 234 EA Distance per rotation Low 25 19 95 5F 165 A5 235 EB Distance ...

Страница 732: ...124 7C 194 C2 264 108 Home high speed Low 55 37 125 7D 195 C3 265 109 Home high speed High 56 38 126 7E 196 C4 266 10A Home low speed Low 57 39 127 7F 197 C5 267 10B Home low speed High 58 3A 128 80 198 C6 268 10C Home acc time Low 59 3B 129 81 199 C7 269 10D Home acc time High 60 3C 130 82 200 C8 270 10E Home dec time Low 61 3D 131 83 201 C9 271 10F Home dec time High 62 3E 132 84 202 CA 272 110 ...

Страница 733: ...speed 1 synthetic speed Software limit detection during speed control bit 5 0 Don t detect 1 Detect Reserved bit6 External stop selection bit7 0 Emergency stop 1 Deceleration stop Speed Position switching coordinate bit 9 0 Incremental 1 Absolute Reserved bit 10 11 Infinite running repeat bit 12 0 Disable 1 Enable Interpolation continuous operation Type bit 13 0 Pass target position 1 Pass near po...

Страница 734: ... lower limit signal bit2 DOG bit3 HOME bit4 EMG signal bit6 Driver ready signal bit7 Servo On bit7 Servo Alarm Reset 5 Common parameter Control Word Bit position Contents Enc pulse input bit 0 2 0 CW CCW x1 1 PULSE DIR x1 2 PHASE A B x4 Continous Operation bit7 0 Disable 1 Enable Speed override bit 8 0 Specify 1 Specify speed Pulse output level bit 15 0 Low Active 1 High Active ...

Страница 735: ... 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 21 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 22 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 23 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 24 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 25 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 26 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 27 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 28...

Страница 736: ...129 71 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 72 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 73 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 74 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 75 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 76 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 77 1202 1203 1204 ...

Страница 737: ...705 119 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 120 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 121 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 122 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 123 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 124 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 125 1778 177...

Страница 738: ...2293 168 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 169 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 170 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 171 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 172 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 173 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 174 2366 23...

Страница 739: ...2881 217 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 218 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 219 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 220 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 221 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 222 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 223 2954 29...

Страница 740: ...3469 266 3470 3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 267 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 268 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 269 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 270 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 271 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 272 3542 35...

Страница 741: ...4057 315 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 316 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 317 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 318 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 319 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 320 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 321 4130 41...

Страница 742: ...4645 364 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 365 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 366 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 367 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 368 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 369 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 370 4718 47...

Страница 743: ...4993 393 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 394 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 395 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 396 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 397 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 398 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 399 5066 50...

Страница 744: ...5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 21 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 22 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 23 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 24 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 25 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 26 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 54...

Страница 745: ...904 5905 69 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 70 5918 5919 5920 5921 5922 5923 5924 5925 5926 5927 5928 5929 71 5930 5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 72 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 73 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 74 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 75 5978 5979 ...

Страница 746: ...493 118 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 6499 6500 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 119 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 6515 6516 6517 120 6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 121 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 122 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 123 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565 124 6566 656...

Страница 747: ...7081 167 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 168 7094 7095 7096 7097 7098 7099 7100 7101 7102 7103 7104 7105 169 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 170 7118 7119 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 171 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 172 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7151 7152 7153 173 7154 71...

Страница 748: ...7669 216 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 217 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 7689 7690 7691 7692 7693 218 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 219 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 220 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 221 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 222 7742 77...

Страница 749: ...8257 265 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 8268 8269 266 8270 8271 8272 8273 8274 8275 8276 8277 8278 8279 8280 8281 267 8282 8283 8284 8285 8286 8287 8288 8289 8290 8291 8292 8293 268 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 8299 8300 8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 269 8306 8307 8308 8309 8310 8311 8312 8313 8314 8315 8316 8317 270 8318 8319 8320 8321 8322 8323 8324 8325 8326 8327 8328 8329 271 8330 83...

Страница 750: ...8845 314 8846 8847 8848 8849 8850 8851 8852 8853 8854 8855 8856 8857 315 8858 8859 8860 8861 8862 8863 8864 8865 8866 8867 8868 8869 316 8870 8871 8872 8873 8874 8875 8876 8877 8878 8879 8880 8881 317 8882 8883 8884 8885 8886 8887 8888 8889 8890 8891 8892 8893 318 8894 8895 8896 8897 8898 8899 8900 8901 8902 8903 8904 8905 319 8906 8907 8908 8909 8910 8911 8912 8913 8914 8915 8916 8917 320 8918 89...

Страница 751: ...9433 363 9434 9435 9436 9437 9438 9439 9440 9441 9442 9443 9444 9445 364 9446 9447 9448 9449 9450 9451 9452 9453 9454 9455 9456 9457 365 9458 9459 9460 9461 9462 9463 9464 9465 9466 9467 9468 9469 366 9470 9471 9472 9473 9474 9475 9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 367 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 9488 9489 9490 9491 9492 9493 368 9494 9495 9496 9497 9498 9499 9500 9501 9502 9503 9504 9505 369 9506 95...

Страница 752: ...6 9787 9788 9789 9790 9791 9792 9793 393 9794 9795 9796 9797 9798 9799 9800 9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 394 9806 9807 9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815 9816 9817 395 9818 9819 9820 9821 9822 9823 9824 9825 9826 9827 9828 9829 396 9830 9831 9832 9833 9834 9835 9836 9837 9838 9839 9840 9841 397 9842 9843 9844 9845 9846 9847 9848 9849 9850 9851 9852 9853 398 9854 9855 9856 9857 9858 9859 9860 9861...

Страница 753: ...0147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 10153 23 10154 10155 10156 10157 10158 10159 10160 10161 10162 10163 10164 10165 24 10166 10167 10168 10169 10170 10171 10172 10173 10174 10175 10176 10177 25 10178 10179 10180 10181 10182 10183 10184 10185 10186 10187 10188 10189 26 10190 10191 10192 10193 10194 10195 10196 10197 10198 10199 10200 10201 27 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10...

Страница 754: ...10723 10724 10725 10726 10727 10728 10729 71 10730 10731 10732 10733 10734 10735 10736 10737 10738 10739 10740 10741 72 10742 10743 10744 10745 10746 10747 10748 10749 10750 10751 10752 10753 73 10754 10755 10756 10757 10758 10759 10760 10761 10762 10763 10764 10765 74 10766 10767 10768 10769 10770 10771 10772 10773 10774 10775 10776 10777 75 10778 10779 10780 10781 10782 10783 10784 10785 10786 1...

Страница 755: ...1 11312 11313 11314 11315 11316 11317 120 11318 11319 11320 11321 11322 11323 11324 11325 11326 11327 11328 11329 121 11330 11331 11332 11333 11334 11335 11336 11337 11338 11339 11340 11341 122 11342 11343 11344 11345 11346 11347 11348 11349 11350 11351 11352 11353 123 11354 11355 11356 11357 11358 11359 11360 11361 11362 11363 11364 11365 124 11366 11367 11368 11369 11370 11371 11372 11373 11374 ...

Страница 756: ...99 11900 11901 11902 11903 11904 11905 169 11906 11907 11908 11909 11910 11911 11912 11913 11914 11915 11916 11917 170 11918 11919 11920 11921 11922 11923 11924 11925 11926 11927 11928 11929 171 11930 11931 11932 11933 11934 11935 11936 11937 11938 11939 11940 11941 172 11942 11943 11944 11945 11946 11947 11948 11949 11950 11951 11952 11953 173 11954 11955 11956 11957 11958 11959 11960 11961 11962...

Страница 757: ...87 12488 12489 12490 12491 12492 12493 218 12494 12495 12496 12497 12498 12499 12500 12501 12502 12503 12504 12505 219 12506 12507 12508 12509 12510 12511 12512 12513 12514 12515 12516 12517 220 12518 12519 12520 12521 12522 12523 12524 12525 12526 12527 12528 12529 221 12530 12531 12532 12533 12534 12535 12536 12537 12538 12539 12540 12541 222 12542 12543 12544 12545 12546 12547 12548 12549 12550...

Страница 758: ...75 13076 13077 13078 13079 13080 13081 267 13082 13083 13084 13085 13086 13087 13088 13089 13090 13091 13092 13093 268 13094 13095 13096 13097 13098 13099 13100 13101 13102 13103 13104 13105 269 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110 13111 13112 13113 13114 13115 13116 13117 270 13118 13119 13120 13121 13122 13123 13124 13125 13126 13127 13128 13129 271 13130 13131 13132 13133 13134 13135 13136 13137 13138...

Страница 759: ...63 13664 13665 13666 13667 13668 13669 316 13670 13671 13672 13673 13674 13675 13676 13677 13678 13679 13680 13681 317 13682 13683 13684 13685 13686 13687 13688 13689 13690 13691 13692 13693 318 13694 13695 13696 13697 13698 13699 13700 13701 13702 13703 13704 13705 319 13706 13707 13708 13709 13710 13711 13712 13713 13714 13715 13716 13717 320 13718 13719 13720 13721 13722 13723 13724 13725 13726...

Страница 760: ...51 14252 14253 14254 14255 14256 14257 365 14258 14259 14260 14261 14262 14263 14264 14265 14266 14267 14268 14269 366 14270 14271 14272 14273 14274 14275 14276 14277 14278 14279 14280 14281 367 14282 14283 14284 14285 14286 14287 14288 14289 14290 14291 14292 14293 368 14294 14295 14296 14297 14298 14299 14300 14301 14302 14303 14304 14305 369 14306 14307 14308 14309 14310 14311 14312 14313 14314...

Страница 761: ...99 14600 14601 14602 14603 14604 14605 394 14606 14607 14608 14609 14610 14611 14612 14613 14614 14615 14616 14617 395 14618 14619 14620 14621 14622 14623 14624 14625 14626 14627 14628 14629 396 14630 14631 14632 14633 14634 14635 14636 14637 14638 14639 14640 14641 397 14642 14643 14644 14645 14646 14647 14648 14649 14650 14651 14652 14653 398 14654 14655 14656 14657 14658 14659 14660 14661 14662...

Страница 762: ...932 14933 14934 14935 14936 14937 14938 14939 14940 14941 22 14942 14943 14944 14945 14946 14947 14948 14949 14950 14951 14952 14953 23 14954 14955 14956 14957 14958 14959 14960 14961 14962 14963 14964 14965 24 14966 14967 14968 14969 14970 14971 14972 14973 14974 14975 14976 14977 25 14978 14979 14980 14981 14982 14983 14984 14985 14986 14987 14988 14989 26 14990 14991 14992 14993 14994 14995 149...

Страница 763: ...15511 15512 15513 15514 15515 15516 15517 70 15518 15519 15520 15521 15522 15523 15524 15525 15526 15527 15528 15529 71 15530 15531 15532 15533 15534 15535 15536 15537 15538 15539 15540 15541 72 15542 15543 15544 15545 15546 15547 15548 15549 15550 15551 15552 15553 73 15554 15555 15556 15557 15558 15559 15560 15561 15562 15563 15564 15565 74 15566 15567 15568 15569 15570 15571 15572 15573 15574 1...

Страница 764: ...9 16100 16101 16102 16103 16104 16105 119 16106 16107 16108 16109 16110 16111 16112 16113 16114 16115 16116 16117 120 16118 16119 16120 16121 16122 16123 16124 16125 16126 16127 16128 16129 121 16130 16131 16132 16133 16134 16135 16136 16137 16138 16139 16140 16141 122 16142 16143 16144 16145 16146 16147 16148 16149 16150 16151 16152 16153 123 16154 16155 16156 16157 16158 16159 16160 16161 16162 ...

Страница 765: ...87 16688 16689 16690 16691 16692 16693 168 16694 16695 16696 16697 16698 16699 16700 16701 16702 16703 16704 16705 169 16706 16707 16708 16709 16710 16711 16712 16713 16714 16715 16716 16717 170 16718 16719 16720 16721 16722 16723 16724 16725 16726 16727 16728 16729 171 16730 16731 16732 16733 16734 16735 16736 16737 16738 16739 16740 16741 172 16742 16743 16744 16745 16746 16747 16748 16749 16750...

Страница 766: ...75 17276 17277 17278 17279 17280 17281 217 17282 17283 17284 17285 17286 17287 17288 17289 17290 17291 17292 17293 218 17294 17295 17296 17297 17298 17299 17300 17301 17302 17303 17304 17305 219 17306 17307 17308 17309 17310 17311 17312 17313 17314 17315 17316 17317 220 17318 17319 17320 17321 17322 17323 17324 17325 17326 17327 17328 17329 221 17330 17331 17332 17333 17334 17335 17336 17337 17338...

Страница 767: ...63 17864 17865 17866 17867 17868 17869 266 17870 17871 17872 17873 17874 17875 17876 17877 17878 17879 17880 17881 267 17882 17883 17884 17885 17886 17887 17888 17889 17890 17891 17892 17893 268 17894 17895 17896 17897 17898 17899 17900 17901 17902 17903 17904 17905 269 17906 17907 17908 17909 17910 17911 17912 17913 17914 17915 17916 17917 270 17918 17919 17920 17921 17922 17923 17924 17925 17926...

Страница 768: ...51 18452 18453 18454 18455 18456 18457 315 18458 18459 18460 18461 18462 18463 18464 18465 18466 18467 18468 18469 316 18470 18471 18472 18473 18474 18475 18476 18477 18478 18479 18480 18481 317 18482 18483 18484 18485 18486 18487 18488 18489 18490 18491 18492 18493 318 18494 18495 18496 18497 18498 18499 18500 18501 18502 18503 18504 18505 319 18506 18507 18508 18509 18510 18511 18512 18513 18514...

Страница 769: ...39 19040 19041 19042 19043 19044 19045 364 19046 19047 19048 19049 19050 19051 19052 19053 19054 19055 19056 19057 365 19058 19059 19060 19061 19062 19063 19064 19065 19066 19067 19068 19069 366 19070 19071 19072 19073 19074 19075 19076 19077 19078 19079 19080 19081 367 19082 19083 19084 19085 19086 19087 19088 19089 19090 19091 19092 19093 368 19094 19095 19096 19097 19098 19099 19100 19101 19102...

Страница 770: ... 393 19394 19395 19396 19397 19398 19399 19400 19401 19402 19403 19404 19405 394 19406 19407 19408 19409 19410 19411 19412 19413 19414 19415 19416 19417 395 19418 19419 19420 19421 19422 19423 19424 19425 19426 19427 19428 19429 396 19430 19431 19432 19433 19434 19435 19436 19437 19438 19439 19440 19441 397 19442 19443 19444 19445 19446 19447 19448 19449 19450 19451 19452 19453 398 19454 19455 194...

Страница 771: ... axis end pos 19518 23748 27978 32208 36438 40668 44898 Sub axis end pos 19520 23750 27980 32210 36440 40670 44900 CAM Curve 19522 23752 27982 32212 36442 40672 44902 User Data 4 Main axis end pos 19524 23754 27984 32214 36444 40674 44904 Sub axis end pos 19526 23756 27986 32216 36446 40676 44906 CAM Curve 19528 23758 27988 32218 36448 40678 44908 User Data 5 Main axis end pos 19530 23760 27990 32...

Страница 772: ...0734 44964 Sub axis end pos 19586 23816 28046 32276 36506 40736 44966 CAM Curve 19588 23818 28048 32278 36508 40738 44968 User Data 15 Main axis end pos 19590 23820 28050 32280 36510 40740 44970 Sub axis end pos 19592 23822 28052 32282 36512 40742 44972 CAM Curve 19594 23824 28054 32284 36514 40744 44974 User Data 16 Main axis end pos 19596 23826 28056 32286 36516 40746 44976 Sub axis end pos 1959...

Страница 773: ...822 45052 CAM Data 25 19674 23904 28134 32364 36594 40824 45054 CAM Data 26 19676 23906 28136 32366 36596 40826 45056 CAM Data 27 19678 23908 28138 32368 36598 40828 45058 CAM Data 28 19680 23910 28140 32370 36600 40830 45060 CAM Data 29 19682 23912 28142 32372 36602 40832 45062 CAM Data 30 19684 23914 28144 32374 36604 40834 45064 CAM Data 31 19686 23916 28146 32376 36606 40836 45066 CAM Data 32 ...

Страница 774: ...40910 45140 CAM Data 69 19762 23992 28222 32452 36682 40912 45142 CAM Data 70 19764 23994 28224 32454 36684 40914 45144 CAM Data 71 19766 23996 28226 32456 36686 40916 45146 CAM Data 72 19768 23998 28228 32458 36688 40918 45148 CAM Data 73 19770 24000 28230 32460 36690 40920 45150 CAM Data 74 19772 24002 28232 32462 36692 40922 45152 CAM Data 75 19774 24004 28234 32464 36694 40924 45154 CAM Data 7...

Страница 775: ...80 28310 32540 36770 41000 45230 CAM Data 114 19852 24082 28312 32542 36772 41002 45232 CAM Data 115 19854 24084 28314 32544 36774 41004 45234 CAM Data 116 19856 24086 28316 32546 36776 41006 45236 CAM Data 117 19858 24088 28318 32548 36778 41008 45238 CAM Data 118 19860 24090 28320 32550 36780 41010 45240 CAM Data 119 19862 24092 28322 32552 36782 41012 45242 CAM Data 120 19864 24094 28324 32554 ...

Страница 776: ...88 45318 CAM Data 158 19940 24170 28400 32630 36860 41090 45320 CAM Data 159 19942 24172 28402 32632 36862 41092 45322 CAM Data 160 19944 24174 28404 32634 36864 41094 45324 CAM Data 161 19946 24176 28406 32636 36866 41096 45326 CAM Data 162 19948 24178 28408 32638 36868 41098 45328 CAM Data 163 19950 24180 28410 32640 36870 41100 45330 CAM Data 164 19952 24182 28412 32642 36872 41102 45332 CAM Da...

Страница 777: ...76 45406 CAM Data 202 20028 24258 28488 32718 36948 41178 45408 CAM Data 203 20030 24260 28490 32720 36950 41180 45410 CAM Data 204 20032 24262 28492 32722 36952 41182 45412 CAM Data 205 20034 24264 28494 32724 36954 41184 45414 CAM Data 206 20036 24266 28496 32726 36956 41186 45416 CAM Data 207 20038 24268 28498 32728 36958 41188 45418 CAM Data 208 20040 24270 28500 32730 36960 41190 45420 CAM Da...

Страница 778: ...24344 28574 32804 37034 41264 45494 CAM Data 246 20116 24346 28576 32806 37036 41266 45496 CAM Data 247 20118 24348 28578 32808 37038 41268 45498 CAM Data 248 20120 24350 28580 32810 37040 41270 45500 CAM Data 249 20122 24352 28582 32812 37042 41272 45502 CAM Data 250 20124 24354 28584 32814 37044 41274 45504 CAM Data 251 20126 24356 28586 32816 37046 41276 45506 CAM Data 252 20128 24358 28588 328...

Страница 779: ...24430 28660 32890 37120 41350 45580 CAM Data 289 20202 24432 28662 32892 37122 41352 45582 CAM Data 290 20204 24434 28664 32894 37124 41354 45584 CAM Data 291 20206 24436 28666 32896 37126 41356 45586 CAM Data 292 20208 24438 28668 32898 37128 41358 45588 CAM Data 293 20210 24440 28670 32900 37130 41360 45590 CAM Data 294 20212 24442 28672 32902 37132 41362 45592 CAM Data 295 20214 24444 28674 329...

Страница 780: ...24516 28746 32976 37206 41436 45666 CAM Data 332 20288 24518 28748 32978 37208 41438 45668 CAM Data 333 20290 24520 28750 32980 37210 41440 45670 CAM Data 334 20292 24522 28752 32982 37212 41442 45672 CAM Data 335 20294 24524 28754 32984 37214 41444 45674 CAM Data 336 20296 24526 28756 32986 37216 41446 45676 CAM Data 337 20298 24528 28758 32988 37218 41448 45678 CAM Data 338 20300 24530 28760 329...

Страница 781: ...24602 28832 33062 37292 41522 45752 CAM Data 375 20374 24604 28834 33064 37294 41524 45754 CAM Data 376 20376 24606 28836 33066 37296 41526 45756 CAM Data 377 20378 24608 28838 33068 37298 41528 45758 CAM Data 378 20380 24610 28840 33070 37300 41530 45760 CAM Data 379 20382 24612 28842 33072 37302 41532 45762 CAM Data 380 20384 24614 28844 33074 37304 41534 45764 CAM Data 381 20386 24616 28846 330...

Страница 782: ...24688 28918 33148 37378 41608 45838 CAM Data 418 20460 24690 28920 33150 37380 41610 45840 CAM Data 419 20462 24692 28922 33152 37382 41612 45842 CAM Data 420 20464 24694 28924 33154 37384 41614 45844 CAM Data 421 20466 24696 28926 33156 37386 41616 45846 CAM Data 422 20468 24698 28928 33158 37388 41618 45848 CAM Data 423 20470 24700 28930 33160 37390 41620 45850 CAM Data 424 20472 24702 28932 331...

Страница 783: ...24774 29004 33234 37464 41694 45924 CAM Data 461 20546 24776 29006 33236 37466 41696 45926 CAM Data 462 20548 24778 29008 33238 37468 41698 45928 CAM Data 463 20550 24780 29010 33240 37470 41700 45930 CAM Data 464 20552 24782 29012 33242 37472 41702 45932 CAM Data 465 20554 24784 29014 33244 37474 41704 45934 CAM Data 466 20556 24786 29016 33246 37476 41706 45936 CAM Data 467 20558 24788 29018 332...

Страница 784: ...24860 29090 33320 37550 41780 46010 CAM Data 504 20632 24862 29092 33322 37552 41782 46012 CAM Data 505 20634 24864 29094 33324 37554 41784 46014 CAM Data 506 20636 24866 29096 33326 37556 41786 46016 CAM Data 507 20638 24868 29098 33328 37558 41788 46018 CAM Data 508 20640 24870 29100 33330 37560 41790 46020 CAM Data 509 20642 24872 29102 33332 37562 41792 46022 CAM Data 510 20644 24874 29104 333...

Страница 785: ...24946 29176 33406 37636 41866 46096 CAM Data 547 20718 24948 29178 33408 37638 41868 46098 CAM Data 548 20720 24950 29180 33410 37640 41870 46100 CAM Data 549 20722 24952 29182 33412 37642 41872 46102 CAM Data 550 20724 24954 29184 33414 37644 41874 46104 CAM Data 551 20726 24956 29186 33416 37646 41876 46106 CAM Data 552 20728 24958 29188 33418 37648 41878 46108 CAM Data 553 20730 24960 29190 334...

Страница 786: ...25032 29262 33492 37722 41952 46182 CAM Data 590 20804 25034 29264 33494 37724 41954 46184 CAM Data 591 20806 25036 29266 33496 37726 41956 46186 CAM Data 592 20808 25038 29268 33498 37728 41958 46188 CAM Data 593 20810 25040 29270 33500 37730 41960 46190 CAM Data 594 20812 25042 29272 33502 37732 41962 46192 CAM Data 595 20814 25044 29274 33504 37734 41964 46194 CAM Data 596 20816 25046 29276 335...

Страница 787: ...25118 29348 33578 37808 42038 46268 CAM Data 633 20890 25120 29350 33580 37810 42040 46270 CAM Data 634 20892 25122 29352 33582 37812 42042 46272 CAM Data 635 20894 25124 29354 33584 37814 42044 46274 CAM Data 636 20896 25126 29356 33586 37816 42046 46276 CAM Data 637 20898 25128 29358 33588 37818 42048 46278 CAM Data 638 20900 25130 29360 33590 37820 42050 46280 CAM Data 639 20902 25132 29362 335...

Страница 788: ...25204 29434 33664 37894 42124 46354 CAM Data 676 20976 25206 29436 33666 37896 42126 46356 CAM Data 677 20978 25208 29438 33668 37898 42128 46358 CAM Data 678 20980 25210 29440 33670 37900 42130 46360 CAM Data 679 20982 25212 29442 33672 37902 42132 46362 CAM Data 680 20984 25214 29444 33674 37904 42134 46364 CAM Data 681 20986 25216 29446 33676 37906 42136 46366 CAM Data 682 20988 25218 29448 336...

Страница 789: ...25290 29520 33750 37980 42210 46440 CAM Data 719 21062 25292 29522 33752 37982 42212 46442 CAM Data 720 21064 25294 29524 33754 37984 42214 46444 CAM Data 721 21066 25296 29526 33756 37986 42216 46446 CAM Data 722 21068 25298 29528 33758 37988 42218 46448 CAM Data 723 21070 25300 29530 33760 37990 42220 46450 CAM Data 724 21072 25302 29532 33762 37992 42222 46452 CAM Data 725 21074 25304 29534 337...

Страница 790: ...25376 29606 33836 38066 42296 46526 CAM Data 762 21148 25378 29608 33838 38068 42298 46528 CAM Data 763 21150 25380 29610 33840 38070 42300 46530 CAM Data 764 21152 25382 29612 33842 38072 42302 46532 CAM Data 765 21154 25384 29614 33844 38074 42304 46534 CAM Data 766 21156 25386 29616 33846 38076 42306 46536 CAM Data 767 21158 25388 29618 33848 38078 42308 46538 CAM Data 768 21160 25390 29620 338...

Страница 791: ...25462 29692 33922 38152 42382 46612 CAM Data 805 21234 25464 29694 33924 38154 42384 46614 CAM Data 806 21236 25466 29696 33926 38156 42386 46616 CAM Data 807 21238 25468 29698 33928 38158 42388 46618 CAM Data 808 21240 25470 29700 33930 38160 42390 46620 CAM Data 809 21242 25472 29702 33932 38162 42392 46622 CAM Data 810 21244 25474 29704 33934 38164 42394 46624 CAM Data 811 21246 25476 29706 339...

Страница 792: ...25548 29778 34008 38238 42468 46698 CAM Data 848 21320 25550 29780 34010 38240 42470 46700 CAM Data 849 21322 25552 29782 34012 38242 42472 46702 CAM Data 850 21324 25554 29784 34014 38244 42474 46704 CAM Data 851 21326 25556 29786 34016 38246 42476 46706 CAM Data 852 21328 25558 29788 34018 38248 42478 46708 CAM Data 853 21330 25560 29790 34020 38250 42480 46710 CAM Data 854 21332 25562 29792 340...

Страница 793: ...25634 29864 34094 38324 42554 46784 CAM Data 891 21406 25636 29866 34096 38326 42556 46786 CAM Data 892 21408 25638 29868 34098 38328 42558 46788 CAM Data 893 21410 25640 29870 34100 38330 42560 46790 CAM Data 894 21412 25642 29872 34102 38332 42562 46792 CAM Data 895 21414 25644 29874 34104 38334 42564 46794 CAM Data 896 21416 25646 29876 34106 38336 42566 46796 CAM Data 897 21418 25648 29878 341...

Страница 794: ...25720 29950 34180 38410 42640 46870 CAM Data 934 21492 25722 29952 34182 38412 42642 46872 CAM Data 935 21494 25724 29954 34184 38414 42644 46874 CAM Data 936 21496 25726 29956 34186 38416 42646 46876 CAM Data 937 21498 25728 29958 34188 38418 42648 46878 CAM Data 938 21500 25730 29960 34190 38420 42650 46880 CAM Data 939 21502 25732 29962 34192 38422 42652 46882 CAM Data 940 21504 25734 29964 341...

Страница 795: ...25806 30036 34266 38496 42726 46956 CAM Data 977 21578 25808 30038 34268 38498 42728 46958 CAM Data 978 21580 25810 30040 34270 38500 42730 46960 CAM Data 979 21582 25812 30042 34272 38502 42732 46962 CAM Data 980 21584 25814 30044 34274 38504 42734 46964 CAM Data 981 21586 25816 30046 34276 38506 42736 46966 CAM Data 982 21588 25818 30048 34278 38508 42738 46968 CAM Data 983 21590 25820 30050 342...

Страница 796: ...892 30122 34352 38582 42812 47042 CAM Data 1020 21664 25894 30124 34354 38584 42814 47044 CAM Data 1021 21666 25896 30126 34356 38586 42816 47046 CAM Data 1022 21668 25898 30128 34358 38588 42818 47048 CAM Data 1023 21670 25900 30130 34360 38590 42820 47050 CAM Data 1024 21672 25902 30132 34362 38592 42822 47052 CAM Data 1025 21674 25904 30134 34364 38594 42824 47054 CAM Data 1026 21676 25906 3013...

Страница 797: ...978 30208 34438 38668 42898 47128 CAM Data 1063 21750 25980 30210 34440 38670 42900 47130 CAM Data 1064 21752 25982 30212 34442 38672 42902 47132 CAM Data 1065 21754 25984 30214 34444 38674 42904 47134 CAM Data 1066 21756 25986 30216 34446 38676 42906 47136 CAM Data 1067 21758 25988 30218 34448 38678 42908 47138 CAM Data 1068 21760 25990 30220 34450 38680 42910 47140 CAM Data 1069 21762 25992 3022...

Страница 798: ...064 30294 34524 38754 42984 47214 CAM Data 1106 21836 26066 30296 34526 38756 42986 47216 CAM Data 1107 21838 26068 30298 34528 38758 42988 47218 CAM Data 1108 21840 26070 30300 34530 38760 42990 47220 CAM Data 1109 21842 26072 30302 34532 38762 42992 47222 CAM Data 1110 21844 26074 30304 34534 38764 42994 47224 CAM Data 1111 21846 26076 30306 34536 38766 42996 47226 CAM Data 1112 21848 26078 3030...

Страница 799: ...47300 CAM Data 1149 21922 26152 30382 34612 38842 43072 47302 CAM Data 1150 21924 26154 30384 34614 38844 43074 47304 CAM Data 1151 21926 26156 30386 34616 38846 43076 47306 CAM Data 1152 21928 26158 30388 34618 38848 43078 47308 CAM Data 1153 21930 26160 30390 34620 38850 43080 47310 CAM Data 1154 21932 26162 30392 34622 38852 43082 47312 CAM Data 1155 21934 26164 30394 34624 38854 43084 47314 CA...

Страница 800: ...238 30468 34698 38928 43158 47388 CAM Data 1193 22010 26240 30470 34700 38930 43160 47390 CAM Data 1194 22012 26242 30472 34702 38932 43162 47392 CAM Data 1195 22014 26244 30474 34704 38934 43164 47394 CAM Data 1196 22016 26246 30476 34706 38936 43166 47396 CAM Data 1197 22018 26248 30478 34708 38938 43168 47398 CAM Data 1198 22020 26250 30480 34710 38940 43170 47400 CAM Data 1199 22022 26252 3048...

Страница 801: ...324 30554 34784 39014 43244 47474 CAM Data 1236 22096 26326 30556 34786 39016 43246 47476 CAM Data 1237 22098 26328 30558 34788 39018 43248 47478 CAM Data 1238 22100 26330 30560 34790 39020 43250 47480 CAM Data 1239 22102 26332 30562 34792 39022 43252 47482 CAM Data 1240 22104 26334 30564 34794 39024 43254 47484 CAM Data 1241 22106 26336 30566 34796 39026 43256 47486 CAM Data 1242 22108 26338 3056...

Страница 802: ...410 30640 34870 39100 43330 47560 CAM Data 1279 22182 26412 30642 34872 39102 43332 47562 CAM Data 1280 22184 26414 30644 34874 39104 43334 47564 CAM Data 1281 22186 26416 30646 34876 39106 43336 47566 CAM Data 1282 22188 26418 30648 34878 39108 43338 47568 CAM Data 1283 22190 26420 30650 34880 39110 43340 47570 CAM Data 1284 22192 26422 30652 34882 39112 43342 47572 CAM Data 1285 22194 26424 3065...

Страница 803: ...496 30726 34956 39186 43416 47646 CAM Data 1322 22268 26498 30728 34958 39188 43418 47648 CAM Data 1323 22270 26500 30730 34960 39190 43420 47650 CAM Data 1324 22272 26502 30732 34962 39192 43422 47652 CAM Data 1325 22274 26504 30734 34964 39194 43424 47654 CAM Data 1326 22276 26506 30736 34966 39196 43426 47656 CAM Data 1327 22278 26508 30738 34968 39198 43428 47658 CAM Data 1328 22280 26510 3074...

Страница 804: ...582 30812 35042 39272 43502 47732 CAM Data 1365 22354 26584 30814 35044 39274 43504 47734 CAM Data 1366 22356 26586 30816 35046 39276 43506 47736 CAM Data 1367 22358 26588 30818 35048 39278 43508 47738 CAM Data 1368 22360 26590 30820 35050 39280 43510 47740 CAM Data 1369 22362 26592 30822 35052 39282 43512 47742 CAM Data 1370 22364 26594 30824 35054 39284 43514 47744 CAM Data 1371 22366 26596 3082...

Страница 805: ...668 30898 35128 39358 43588 47818 CAM Data 1408 22440 26670 30900 35130 39360 43590 47820 CAM Data 1409 22442 26672 30902 35132 39362 43592 47822 CAM Data 1410 22444 26674 30904 35134 39364 43594 47824 CAM Data 1411 22446 26676 30906 35136 39366 43596 47826 CAM Data 1412 22448 26678 30908 35138 39368 43598 47828 CAM Data 1413 22450 26680 30910 35140 39370 43600 47830 CAM Data 1414 22452 26682 3091...

Страница 806: ...754 30984 35214 39444 43674 47904 CAM Data 1451 22526 26756 30986 35216 39446 43676 47906 CAM Data 1452 22528 26758 30988 35218 39448 43678 47908 CAM Data 1453 22530 26760 30990 35220 39450 43680 47910 CAM Data 1454 22532 26762 30992 35222 39452 43682 47912 CAM Data 1455 22534 26764 30994 35224 39454 43684 47914 CAM Data 1456 22536 26766 30996 35226 39456 43686 47916 CAM Data 1457 22538 26768 3099...

Страница 807: ...840 31070 35300 39530 43760 47990 CAM Data 1494 22612 26842 31072 35302 39532 43762 47992 CAM Data 1495 22614 26844 31074 35304 39534 43764 47994 CAM Data 1496 22616 26846 31076 35306 39536 43766 47996 CAM Data 1497 22618 26848 31078 35308 39538 43768 47998 CAM Data 1498 22620 26850 31080 35310 39540 43770 48000 CAM Data 1499 22622 26852 31082 35312 39542 43772 48002 CAM Data 1500 22624 26854 3108...

Страница 808: ...926 31156 35386 39616 43846 48076 CAM Data 1537 22698 26928 31158 35388 39618 43848 48078 CAM Data 1538 22700 26930 31160 35390 39620 43850 48080 CAM Data 1539 22702 26932 31162 35392 39622 43852 48082 CAM Data 1540 22704 26934 31164 35394 39624 43854 48084 CAM Data 1541 22706 26936 31166 35396 39626 43856 48086 CAM Data 1542 22708 26938 31168 35398 39628 43858 48088 CAM Data 1543 22710 26940 3117...

Страница 809: ...012 31242 35472 39702 43932 48162 CAM Data 1580 22784 27014 31244 35474 39704 43934 48164 CAM Data 1581 22786 27016 31246 35476 39706 43936 48166 CAM Data 1582 22788 27018 31248 35478 39708 43938 48168 CAM Data 1583 22790 27020 31250 35480 39710 43940 48170 CAM Data 1584 22792 27022 31252 35482 39712 43942 48172 CAM Data 1585 22794 27024 31254 35484 39714 43944 48174 CAM Data 1586 22796 27026 3125...

Страница 810: ...098 31328 35558 39788 44018 48248 CAM Data 1623 22870 27100 31330 35560 39790 44020 48250 CAM Data 1624 22872 27102 31332 35562 39792 44022 48252 CAM Data 1625 22874 27104 31334 35564 39794 44024 48254 CAM Data 1626 22876 27106 31336 35566 39796 44026 48256 CAM Data 1627 22878 27108 31338 35568 39798 44028 48258 CAM Data 1628 22880 27110 31340 35570 39800 44030 48260 CAM Data 1629 22882 27112 3134...

Страница 811: ...184 31414 35644 39874 44104 48334 CAM Data 1666 22956 27186 31416 35646 39876 44106 48336 CAM Data 1667 22958 27188 31418 35648 39878 44108 48338 CAM Data 1668 22960 27190 31420 35650 39880 44110 48340 CAM Data 1669 22962 27192 31422 35652 39882 44112 48342 CAM Data 1670 22964 27194 31424 35654 39884 44114 48344 CAM Data 1671 22966 27196 31426 35656 39886 44116 48346 CAM Data 1672 22968 27198 3142...

Страница 812: ...270 31500 35730 39960 44190 48420 CAM Data 1709 23042 27272 31502 35732 39962 44192 48422 CAM Data 1710 23044 27274 31504 35734 39964 44194 48424 CAM Data 1711 23046 27276 31506 35736 39966 44196 48426 CAM Data 1712 23048 27278 31508 35738 39968 44198 48428 CAM Data 1713 23050 27280 31510 35740 39970 44200 48430 CAM Data 1714 23052 27282 31512 35742 39972 44202 48432 CAM Data 1715 23054 27284 3151...

Страница 813: ...356 31586 35816 40046 44276 48506 CAM Data 1752 23128 27358 31588 35818 40048 44278 48508 CAM Data 1753 23130 27360 31590 35820 40050 44280 48510 CAM Data 1754 23132 27362 31592 35822 40052 44282 48512 CAM Data 1755 23134 27364 31594 35824 40054 44284 48514 CAM Data 1756 23136 27366 31596 35826 40056 44286 48516 CAM Data 1757 23138 27368 31598 35828 40058 44288 48518 CAM Data 1758 23140 27370 3160...

Страница 814: ...442 31672 35902 40132 44362 48592 CAM Data 1795 23214 27444 31674 35904 40134 44364 48594 CAM Data 1796 23216 27446 31676 35906 40136 44366 48596 CAM Data 1797 23218 27448 31678 35908 40138 44368 48598 CAM Data 1798 23220 27450 31680 35910 40140 44370 48600 CAM Data 1799 23222 27452 31682 35912 40142 44372 48602 CAM Data 1800 23224 27454 31684 35914 40144 44374 48604 CAM Data 1801 23226 27456 3168...

Страница 815: ...528 31758 35988 40218 44448 48678 CAM Data 1838 23300 27530 31760 35990 40220 44450 48680 CAM Data 1839 23302 27532 31762 35992 40222 44452 48682 CAM Data 1840 23304 27534 31764 35994 40224 44454 48684 CAM Data 1841 23306 27536 31766 35996 40226 44456 48686 CAM Data 1842 23308 27538 31768 35998 40228 44458 48688 CAM Data 1843 23310 27540 31770 36000 40230 44460 48690 CAM Data 1844 23312 27542 3177...

Страница 816: ...614 31844 36074 40304 44534 48764 CAM Data 1881 23386 27616 31846 36076 40306 44536 48766 CAM Data 1882 23388 27618 31848 36078 40308 44538 48768 CAM Data 1883 23390 27620 31850 36080 40310 44540 48770 CAM Data 1884 23392 27622 31852 36082 40312 44542 48772 CAM Data 1885 23394 27624 31854 36084 40314 44544 48774 CAM Data 1886 23396 27626 31856 36086 40316 44546 48776 CAM Data 1887 23398 27628 3185...

Страница 817: ...700 31930 36160 40390 44620 48850 CAM Data 1924 23472 27702 31932 36162 40392 44622 48852 CAM Data 1925 23474 27704 31934 36164 40394 44624 48854 CAM Data 1926 23476 27706 31936 36166 40396 44626 48856 CAM Data 1927 23478 27708 31938 36168 40398 44628 48858 CAM Data 1928 23480 27710 31940 36170 40400 44630 48860 CAM Data 1929 23482 27712 31942 36172 40402 44632 48862 CAM Data 1930 23484 27714 3194...

Страница 818: ...786 32016 36246 40476 44706 48936 CAM Data 1967 23558 27788 32018 36248 40478 44708 48938 CAM Data 1968 23560 27790 32020 36250 40480 44710 48940 CAM Data 1969 23562 27792 32022 36252 40482 44712 48942 CAM Data 1970 23564 27794 32024 36254 40484 44714 48944 CAM Data 1971 23566 27796 32026 36256 40486 44716 48946 CAM Data 1972 23568 27798 32028 36258 40488 44718 48948 CAM Data 1973 23570 27800 3203...

Страница 819: ...872 32102 36332 40562 44792 49022 CAM Data 2010 23644 27874 32104 36334 40564 44794 49024 CAM Data 2011 23646 27876 32106 36336 40566 44796 49026 CAM Data 2012 23648 27878 32108 36338 40568 44798 49028 CAM Data 2013 23650 27880 32110 36340 40570 44800 49030 CAM Data 2014 23652 27882 32112 36342 40572 44802 49032 CAM Data 2015 23654 27884 32114 36344 40574 44804 49034 CAM Data 2016 23656 27886 3211...

Страница 820: ...49078 CAM Data 2038 23700 27930 32160 36390 40620 44850 49080 CAM Data 2039 23702 27932 32162 36392 40622 44852 49082 CAM Data 2040 23704 27934 32164 36394 40624 44854 49084 CAM Data 2041 23706 27936 32166 36396 40626 44856 49086 CAM Data 2042 23708 27938 32168 36398 40628 44858 49088 CAM Data 2043 23710 27940 32170 36400 40630 44860 49090 CAM Data 2044 23712 27942 32172 36402 40632 44862 49092 CA...

Страница 821: ... 49368 49490 Main axis position 7 49126 49248 49370 49492 Sub axis position 7 49128 49250 49372 49494 Main axis position 8 49130 49252 49374 49496 Sub axis position 8 49132 49254 49376 49498 Main axis position 9 49134 49256 49378 49500 Sub axis position 9 49136 49258 49380 49502 Main axis position 10 49138 49260 49382 49504 Sub axis position 10 49140 49262 49384 49506 Main axis position 11 49142 4...

Страница 822: ...186 49308 49430 49552 Sub axis position 22 49188 49310 49432 49554 Main axis position 23 49190 49312 49434 49556 Sub axis position 23 49192 49314 49436 49558 Main axis position 24 49194 49316 49438 49560 Sub axis position 24 49196 49318 49440 49562 Main axis position 25 49198 49320 49442 49564 Sub axis position 25 49200 49322 49444 49566 Main axis position 26 49202 49324 49446 49568 Sub axis posit...

Страница 823: ...iring Reading analog input data Writing analog output data Setting parameter Programming Specification 1 1 performance specification Operating environment Analog input output type and range Digital output input range Wiring Wiring power External DC24V Wiring analog input output Setting types of Voltage Current input output Analog input output test XG5000 special module monitor test mode Parameter ...

Страница 824: ...000 8000 Precise value 1000 5000 1 5V 0 5000 0 5V 0 10000 0 10V 10000 10000 10V 4000 20000 4 20 0 20000 0 20 Percentile value 0 10000 Max resolution 1 16000 0 250 1 5V 0 3125 0 5V 0 625 0 10V 1 250 10V 1 0 4 20 1 25 0 20 Accuracy 0 2 or less When ambient temperature 25 0 3 or less When ambient temperature 0 55 Max conversion speed 0 5 channel Absolute max input DC 15V DC 30 Additional function Fil...

Страница 825: ...1 5V 0 3125 0 5V 0 625 0 10V 1 250 10V 1 0 4 20 1 25 0 20 Accuracy 0 2 or less When ambient temperature is 25 0 3 or less When ambient temperature is 0 55 Max conversion speed 0 5 channel Additional function Setting of channel output status Select one among previous Min Max value Setting of interpolation method Linear interpolation S type interpolation Insulation method Photo coupler insulation be...

Страница 826: ...ED Displays the operation status of analog output part On Operation normal Blinks Error occurs Flickering 1s intervals Off Power off or module error Input terminal Wiring input terminal block to connect with external device Output terminal Wiring output terminal block to connect with external device External Power supply Terminal for supplying the external DC24V Blinks AD DA LEDs simultaneously wh...

Страница 827: ... 0 2500 5000 7500 10000 10119 120 DC 1 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 10 V DC 4 20 mA 1 V 5 V 3 V 0 V 2 5 V 5 V 0 V 5 V 10 V 4 mA 12 mA 20 mA Analog input value Analog input applicable range Offset value Gain value DC 0 20 mA 0 mA 10 mA 20 mA DC 10 10 V 10 V 0 V 10 V 1 DC 4 20mA Input range Digital output range Analog input current 3 808 4 8 12 16 20 20 191 Unsigned value 192 16191 192 0 4 000 8 000 12 000 16 ...

Страница 828: ... 952 5 047 952 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 5 047 Percentile Value 120 10 119 120 0 2 500 5 000 7 500 10 000 10 119 4 DC 0 5V Input range Digital output range Analog input voltage V 0 06 0 1 25 2 5 3 75 5 5 059 Unsigned Value 192 16 191 192 0 4 000 8 000 12 000 16 000 16 191 Signed Value 8 192 8 191 8 192 8 000 4 000 0 4 000 8 000 8 191 Precise Value 60 5 059 60 0 1 250 2 500 3 750 5 000 5 059 Pe...

Страница 829: ...tage Analog output value 10V 5V 0V 5V 10V 10 24 10 24 0V 1 25V 2 5V 3 75V 5V 5 06 0 06 1V 2V 3V 4V 5V 5 048 0 952 Percentile value Unsigned value 5000 0 8000 16000 Digital input value P r a c t i c a l r a n g e o Offset value Gain value Signed value 8000 0 8000 10000 0 16191 8191 10119 191 8192 120 0V 2 5V 5V 7 5V 10V 10 12 0 12 1 DC 1 5V Output range Digital input Analog output voltage V 0 952 1...

Страница 830: ...e V 0 12 0 2 5 5 7 5 10 10 119 Unsigned value 192 16 191 192 0 4 000 8 000 12 000 16 000 16 191 Signed value 8 192 8 191 8 192 8 000 4 000 0 4 000 8 000 8 191 Precise value 120 10 119 120 0 2 500 5 000 7 500 10 000 10 119 Percentile value 120 10 119 120 0 2 500 5 000 7 500 10 000 10 119 4 DC 10 10V Output range Digital input Analog output voltage V 10 24 10 5 0 5 10 10 239 Unsigned value 192 16 19...

Страница 831: ... current 3 808 4 8 12 16 20 20 191 Unsigned value 192 16 191 192 0 4 000 8 000 12 000 16 000 16 191 Signed value 8 192 8 191 8 192 8 000 4 000 0 4 000 8 000 8 191 Precise value 3 808 20 191 3 808 4 000 8 000 12 000 16 000 20 000 20 191 Percentile value 120 10 119 120 0 2 500 5 000 7 500 10 000 10 119 2 DC 0 20 Output range Digital input range Analog output current 0 5 10 15 20 20 239 Unsigned valu...

Страница 832: ...pe of unsigned value selected Accuracy is 0 2 ambient temperature of 25 degrees 0 0V 5V 8000 10 V 16000 Analog input voltage 15968 16032 32 32 Digital output value 1 Accuracy when using 5V input 16 000 0 2 32 Therefore the range of the accuracy will become 8 000 32 8 000 32 7 968 8 032 when using 5V input 2 Accuracy when using 10V input 16 000 0 2 32 Therefore the range of the accuracy will become...

Страница 833: ... 10 02V 0V 2 5V 0 01V 0 01V 5V 4 99V 5 01V 0mA 10mA 0 04mA 0 04mA 20mA 19 96mA 20 04mA 4mA 8mA 3 97mA 4 03mA 20mA 19 97mA 20 03mA 1V 3V 0 99V 1 01V 5V 4 99V 5 01V 1 Accuracy when using 10 10V output 16000 0 2 32 Accuracy range when using 10V output will become 10V 32 1 25 10V 32 1 25 10 04 9 96V Accuracy range when using 10V output will become 10V 32 1 25 10V 32 1 25 9 96 10 04V 2 Accuracy when us...

Страница 834: ...onnection After detecting whether disconnection of the input circuit the alarm is displayed by a single flag Input signal range 4 20 1 5 V Maintenance function of valid conversion value When valid conversion value is exceeded whether conversion value retains will be able to set Alarm function When exceeding valid input range alarm and maximum minimum flag will be generated D Aoutput status setting...

Страница 835: ...nstant Filter Value Input Filtered Pre Value Filtered ms ms Setting range of Filter constant 4 64 000 ms Input value 10000 6320 0 Input value after filtering Actual input value Filter constant ms Time ms As the above graph if the input value rapidly decreases from 0 to 10 000 the input value will be filtered Specified time with filter constant is that the input value is the time to change by 63 2 ...

Страница 836: ...dule internally and then processed In this case remainder can be generated when dividing average time by number of used channels X 0 5ms The remainder is rounded down i e If the number of channels used is 4 and setting time is 151 Average processing count 151 4 0 5 75 counts remainder 1 75 counts 2 CountAverage Input value of specified channel accumulates during setting numbers and then the averag...

Страница 837: ...A n output average Weighted Current F n Setting Value Filter Output Value 설명 Scan 1 Scan 2 Scan 3 No Setting 0 8000 8000 8000 Not process weighted average 1 0 7920 7999 7999 Apply 1 of former value 50 0 4000 6000 7000 Apply 50 of former value 99 0 80 159 237 Apply 99 of former value Notes 1 In case of the time number of average every conversion time input value is not outputted And precondition is...

Страница 838: ... turned on off 1s intervals 3 Each channel can detect disconnection However Disconnection is only displayed for specified operation channel The LED can commonly use the channel from 0 to 3 If one or more channel is disconnected LED will be turned on off Input connections Channel operation AD LED condition Disconnection flag Normal Operation On Off Stop On Off Input wiring is disconnected or Input ...

Страница 839: ...percentile value Classification Unsignedvalue Signedvalue Precisevalue Percentilevalue Function disabled 192 16191 8192 8191 2 Reference 120 10119 Function enabled 0 16000 8000 8000 0 10000 2 Digital output value depending on input range Precise value Analoginputrange Classification Precisevalue 4 20 Function disabled 3808 20191 Function enabled 4000 20000 0 20 Function disabled 240 20239 Function...

Страница 840: ... detection signal is shown on U01 08 and U01 09 If input signal returns to the within of effective range alarm detection signal also returns to the normal status automatically 1 Upper limit alarm Deviceassignment Description Statusdescription U01 08 0 UX0 1 128 CH0 upper limit alarm Off Normal On Maximum alarm occurrence U01 08 1 UX0 1 129 CH1 upper limit alarm U01 08 2 UX0 1 130 CH2 upper limit a...

Страница 841: ... When initialization of module and error of PLC system are happened use to prevent abnormal output 2 Type You can set an output status of channel among Previous Min Mid Max value 1 Previous value The last output operated normally is retained 2 Min The Min value of each range is outputted 3 Mid The Mid value of each range is outputted 4 Max The Max value of each range is outputted 3 Example When th...

Страница 842: ...polation operation And it outputs digital input value intactly 2 Linear interpolation The output is changed up to objective value with linear during the interpolation time Interpolation time Analog output value t 4 t 4 t 4 t 4 t D 4 D 4 D 2 D Change of the output value Reaching a target value 3 S type interpolation The output is changed up to objective value with S type during the interpolation ti...

Страница 843: ...n output in operation U01 07 B UX0 1 123 Current Channel 1 interpolation output in operation Interpolation flag can be monitored when interpolation time is set to 1 s or 60 s 6 Example The interpolation method is set to S type interpolation and interpolation time is set to 60s If the output is changed from 4 to 20 and then changed to 4 again when it is reached to 20 the output is as graph below In...

Страница 844: ...ls for operation LED can be used from channel 0 to 3 in common If the one channel or more is disconnected flickering will be generated Output connections Channel operation LED condition Disconnection flag Normal Operation On Off Stop On Off Output wiring is disconnected or Output is not connected Operation Flickering 1s intervals On Stop On Off 3 If the disconnection is happened disconnection flag...

Страница 845: ... device Use the external power device 5 Example for analog input wiring When inputting the voltage relevant channel V and COM terminal is used When inputting the current relevant channel V and COM terminal is used after connecting between V and I terminal a Voltage wiring CH0 CH1 CH0 CH2 CH3 CH0 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 V0 COM0 V1 COM1 V2 COM2 V3 COM3 DC24V DC24V DC P 3er F r anal g m d1le FG b Cur...

Страница 846: ... 트랜스미터 2 Wire 트랜스미터 2 Wire 트랜스미터 2 Wire 트랜스미터 DC power for analog power supply have to connect DC24V with FG 7 The example of analog input 4 Wire sensor transmitter wiring The current input Use the I and COM terminal after connecting V with I terminal CH0 CH1 CH0 CH2 CH3 CH0 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 V0 COM0 V1 COM1 V2 COM2 V3 COM3 DC24V DC24V DC P 3er F r anal g m d1le FG DC DC DC DC 4 Wire Transmi...

Страница 847: ...itter or sensor Ri Internal resistance value 1 of voltage input module Vin Voltage allowed to analog input module Vi Tolerance of converted value due to source and cable length in voltage input Ri Rc Rs Vs Ri Vin 2 100 1 Vs Vin Vi Notes 1 While using a input voltage range among 1 5V 0 5V 0 10V 10 10V If the external wiring is disconnected It will take a certain amount of time to display output dat...

Страница 848: ...voltage current output wiring V0 V0 V1 V1 I0 I0 I1 I1 1kΩ or more Motor driven devices DC24V DC24V DC Power For analog module FG 1kΩ or more 600Ω or less 600Ω or less CH0 CH1 CH0 CH1 1 Two core twisted shield wire should be used as wire 2 DC power for analog power supply has to connect DC24V with FG ...

Страница 849: ...Channel Enable Disable setting 2 Input voltage current range 3 Output data format setting 4 Filter constant setting 5 Average processing method setting 6 Average value setting 7 Hold last value setting b Output parameter setting Specify the following setting items necessary for the module operation 1 Channel Enable Disable setting 2 Output voltage current range 3 Input data format setting 4 Channe...

Страница 850: ...en find and clink the slot 1 internal which has embedded function 4 Click the arrow button on the screen above to display the screen where an applicable module can be selected Search and select the embedded analog input output module to select 5 In order to set up parameter double click the module ...

Страница 851: ...Special Chapter 1 Embedded Analog 1 29 6 Ascreen will be displayed for you to specify parameters for respective channels as below Click a desired item to display parameters to set for respective items ...

Страница 852: ...0 again 2 I O parameter set in status of Special Module Monitor is temporally set to implement the test So If status of Special Module Monitor is ended I O parameter which is set becomes extinct 3 The test of Special Module Monitor is an examination function to check operation of the analog input module when the sequence program is not made up 2 How to use special module monitoring 1 With XG5000 c...

Страница 853: ...ded Analog 1 31 2 Select Special Module and click Module information to display the information as below 3 Click Monitor on the Special Module screen in Special Module List to display Special Module Monitoring screen as below ...

Страница 854: ...ded Analog 1 32 4 Start Monitoring Click Start Monitoring to show digital input output data of current operated channel Execution screen of Start Monitoring Monitoring Input channel 0 details Voltage output channel 0 details ...

Страница 855: ...o change the parameter of the embedded analog module which is presently set In case of clicking the setting value in the bottom of the screen you can change the parameter Test is able to set only if operation status of XGB s basic unit is stop Execution screen of Test ...

Страница 856: ...d on present value So Max Min value is not saved when Monitoring Test Screen is closed Max Min Value Monitor execution screen 7 Close Close Close is used to escape from the monitoring test screen When the monitoring test screen is closed the max value the min value and the present value will not be saved any more Reset of Max Min value Monitoring of Max Min value ...

Страница 857: ...ch module referring to the special module information that is set in the I O parameter The user can modify the variables and comments 1 Procedure 1 Select the special module type in the slot 1 internal of I O Parameter Setting window 2 Select Edit Register Module Variable Comments 3 Click Yes ...

Страница 858: ...ded Analog 1 36 4 As shown below the variables are registered 2 Save variables 1 The contents of View Variable can be saved as a text file 2 Select Edit Export to File 3 The contents of View variable are saved as a text file ...

Страница 859: ...pter 1 Embedded Analog 1 37 3 View variables in program The example of XGB DN32UA is as shown below 1 The example program of XG5000 is as shown below 2 Select View Variables The devices are changed into variables ...

Страница 860: ...Special Chapter 1 Embedded Analog 1 38 3 Select View Devices Variables Devices and variables are both displayed 4 Select View Device Comments Devices and comments are both displayed ...

Страница 861: ...Special Chapter 1 Embedded Analog 1 39 5 Select View Variables Comments Variables and comments are both displayed ...

Страница 862: ...UX0 1 43 Analog Output Current CH1 Error _01_AD0_DATA WORD UW0 1 3 Analog Input CH0 Output Read AH8E CPU _01_AD1_DATA WORD UW0 1 4 Analog Input CH1 Output _01_AD2_DATA WORD UW0 1 5 Analog Input CH2 Output _01_AD3_DATA WORD UW0 1 6 Analog Input CH3 Output _01_AD0_IDD BIT UX0 1 112 Analog Input CH0 Input Disconnection Flag Read AH8E CPU _01_AD1_IDD BIT UX0 1 113 Analog Input CH1 Input Disconnection ...

Страница 863: ...tus Setting Write AH8E CPU _01_DAV0_DATA WORD UW0 1 11 Analog Output Voltage CH0 Input Write AH8E CPU _01_DAV1_DATA WORD UW0 1 12 Analog Output Voltage CH1 Input Write AH8E CPU _01_DAI0_DATA WORD UW0 1 13 Analog Output Current CH0 Input Write AH8E CPU _01_DAI1_DATA WORD UW0 1 14 Analog Output Current CH1 Input Write AH8E CPU In order to read input CH3 conversion value of embedded analog module it ...

Страница 864: ...ady to process analog conversion in case of that PLC CPU is powered or reset 2 UX1 1 0 It is a flag to display the error status of embedded analog module 2 Run channel flag The area where RUN information of respective channels is saved 3 Error channel flag The area where ERROR information of respective channels is saved ...

Страница 865: ...16 bit binary 5 Disconnection flag The area where the disconnection detection signal of each channel is saved 1 Disconnection flag of input channel is saved in UX0 1 112 UX0 1 115 2 Disconnection flag of output channel is saved in UX0 1 126 UX0 1 127 Only for current output channel 6 Status of interpolation output The area shows the channel being outputting interpolation During interpolation outpu...

Страница 866: ...hannel is saved UX0 1 128 UX0 1 131 8 Lower limit alarm flag The area where the lower limit alarm detection signal of each channel is saved UX0 1 144 UX0 1 147 9 Output permission setting 1 The output enable disable for each channel can be set 2 When the output permission is not set the output of all channels will be prohibited ...

Страница 867: ...19 0 10 119 can be used within these ranges depending on the setting of input data type In case of Current output range is not 0 20 In case of Current output range is 0 20 2 If the digital input value is not set it will be handled as 0 Notes 1 If the external 24V is not supplied the module ready flag UX0 1 15 input disconnection flag UX0 1 112 UX0 1 115 upper limit alarm flag UX0 1 128 UX0 1 131 l...

Страница 868: ...16 000 01 8 000 8 000 10 Precise value 11 0 10 000 In case of precise value 4 20 4 000 20 000 0 20 0 20 000 1 5V 1 000 5 000 0 5V 0 5 000 0 10V 0 10 000 10 10V 10 000 10 000 R W 4 Input CH0 filter constant 0 or 4 64 000 R W 5 Input CH1 filter constant 6 Input CH2 filter constant 7 Input CH3 filter constant 8 Average processing method Average process setting 4 Bit 0000 Sampling process 0001 Time av...

Страница 869: ...22 Current output CH 0 interpolation value 23 Current output CH 1 interpolation value 24 Setting error information Setting error information Decimal Channel No output channel voltage 0 current 1 0 Normal operation 10 Input channel range setting error 20 Input channel filter constant setting error 30 Input channel average constant setting error 4 Output channel range setting error 5 Output channel ...

Страница 870: ...nput are DC 4 20mA DC 0 20mA 2 When the input range is not set or it is entered out of setting values it is handled as range of DC 4 20mA Channel 0 Input range setting 4 bit per channel 0 4 20 1 0 20 2 1 5 V 3 0 5 V 4 0 10 V 5 10 10 V Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 A ress No 1 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 3 Output range settin...

Страница 871: ... not be operated 2 If the filter constant is not specified with anything it can t filter and it will be handled in 0 Input channel 0 filter constant 0 or 4 64000 ms Input channel 1 fIlter constant 0 or 4 64000 ms A ress No 5 Input channel 2 fIlter constant 0 or 4 64000 ms A ress No 6 Input channel 3 fIlter constant 0 or 4 64000 ms A ress No 7 A ress No 4 Bi0 5 Bi0 4 Bi0 3 Bi0 2 Bi0 1 Bi0 0 Bi0 15 ...

Страница 872: ...average 2 100 samples Weighte average 1 99 8 Hold last value setting 1 In case that hold last value function is set at the same time if the invalid value is come the late valid value will only be retained For example firstly it is operated with 4 20mA Secondly 10mAcomes in Finally the signal is immediately falling down to 3mAwithout falling down the current continually In this case relevant channe...

Страница 873: ... 0 output status setting 17 Current channel 1 output status setting 10 Interpolation method setting Shows the setting of the interpolation method of each channel Voltage Output Channel 0 Address No u8 Inte polation metho setting 2 bits pe channel 00 Disable 01 Linea inte polation 10 S cu ve inte polation Voltage Output Channel 1 Cu ent Output Channel 0 Cu ent Output Channel 1 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 ...

Страница 874: ...ference Error 10 LED Flickering 1s intervals Setting error of input channel range 1 is the number of CH 0 3 is output type Voltage output 0 Current output 1 20 Setting error of input channel filter value 2 30 Setting error of input channel average value 3 4 Setting error of output channel range 4 5 Setting error of output channel digital input value range 5 6 Setting error of output channel interp...

Страница 875: ...alog 1 53 1 11 Example Program 1 Setting I O parameter 1 The input channel 0 is set with operation channel and the range is set with 4 20mA 2 The voltage output channel 0 is set with operation channel and the range is set with 1 5V ...

Страница 876: ... 3 If the error is caused on CH0 U01 07 0 Bit CH0 disconnection will be on and the M00001 will be on b Example of output program 1 The MX10 is on while the module normally operates UX0 1 0 Module Error Off UX0 1 15 Module Ready On UX0 1 24 Voltage Output Channel 0 Run On UX0 1 40 Voltage Output Channel 0 Error Off 2 When the M0010 is on voltage channel 0 output status UX0 1 160 is on and the outpu...

Страница 877: ...th default parameter operation flags error flags and disconnection flags for all channels are off AD conversion value is 0 or it is retained previous value DA output signal is 0 Measure Check wiring Check parameter setting Check DC24V wiring and supply power 1 12 2 Check the Embedded Analog Module The status of embedded analog module can be checked through the system monitor of XG5000 1 The order ...

Страница 878: ...ne it operates well d Yes Call our near agency or A S center 2 The LED is flickering AD or DA LED is flickering AD or DA LED is flikering 0 4s intervals The wiring is normal Make wiring correctly by referring the instructions Check disconnection d Yes No The parameter setting is correct Check PUT The operation parameter is error Set correctly by referring parameter setting rules from instructions ...

Страница 879: ...tting metho from instructions No Yes External terminal wiring is normal Mo ify correctly by referring wiring metho from instructions No Yes Call our near agency or A S center 4 The analog output value is abnormal The analog output value is abnormal The external DC24V is normal Supply input power source of external DC24V No Yes The wiring of each channel is normal Refer wiring metho from instructio...

Страница 880: ...Enet of XGB high performance small sized PLC basic unit has various applications based on the standard so it provides excellent functions and performance for a user Notice This chapter describes the functions of 2 ports FEnet embedded in XGB high performance small sized PLC basic unit For expansion communication modules refer to the manual of each module Characteristics 1 1 1 XGB high performance ...

Страница 881: ...blic network Supporting LSIS protocol XGT and other companies protocols Modbus TCP IP dedicated service Supporting the simple and convenient client function for communication between LSIS communication modules and communication with other companies modules XGT Modbus TCP user defined P2P client function Providing the host Enable table for upper PC MMI and communication security Supporting Dynamic ...

Страница 882: ...switch Unmanaged Switch built in 2 Maximum number of channels Items Specifications Remarks Maximum server access channel 7 channels XGT dedicated or Modbus 4 channels Remote 1 2 stage 1channel independently FTP 1 channel 3 Performance specifications by communication service Items Specifications Driver Communicati on method Port No Remarks F U N C T I O N Dedicated XGT server TCP IP 2004 Up to 4 ch...

Страница 883: ...N link Mode Status TRX Error P2Pservice Connection status service status service count error count Media information Total number of received packets BROAD MULTI UNI UDP ARP packet drop Packet rate per second Ping Test IPAddress Number of settings Timeout Auto Scan Not available 5 Available PLC Area 1 XBC Series MK type AREA Device Type Size Word Remark P P0 P2047 2048 Read Write Enable M M0 M2047...

Страница 884: ...lt in 2 XEC Series IEC type AREA Device Type Size Word Remark I IW0 0 0 IW15 15 3 1024 Read Write Enable Q QW0 0 0 QW15 15 3 1024 Read Write Enable M MW0 MW16383 16384 Read Write Enable W WW0 WW32767 32768 Read Write Enable R RW0 RW16383 16384 Read Write Enable ...

Страница 885: ...ation Item Color Operation details of each status LINK ACT Yellow ON Normal connection Linked with the connected device normally OFF Connection error No connected device Flickering During communication Flickering in case RX TX occur SPEED Green ON 100BASE T In progress at 100Mbps OFF 10BASE T In progress at 10Mbps FEnet communication connector FEnet communication connector RJ 45 ...

Страница 886: ...al Shielded pair individual twisted and cable with shield core only Up to 500MHz Sound information Data Video signal Substitute for the coaxial cable of 75Ω Notice XGB FEnet does not supportAUI 10BASE 5 1 In the case of twisted pair cable unit more than Category 5 adopts the hub of 100Mbps and it can be used with the zone of 10Mbps less than Category3 but at this time the network speed is limited ...

Страница 887: ...r network Low loss broadband cable Notice Now Category 3 5 En Category 5 and Category 6 are widely used domestically and internationally Category 4 disappeared due to emergence of Category 5 and Category 7 that is the STP structure is still at a development stage worldwidely 3 Example of Category 5 twisted pair cable UTP CTP LAN5 Items Unit Value Conductor resistance Max Ω km 93 5 Insulation resis...

Страница 888: ...able made of twisted transmission TD and reception RD internally If you connect these 2 basic units they can be used regardless of cable types since the built in FEnet interface supportsAuto MDIX You can connect the signal lines of straight cables and cross cables as below 1 Straight cable 2 Cross cable Notice 1 Separate the hub s power supply from the PLC s power supply 2 For termination and manu...

Страница 889: ...ectric equipments are open or close to the non metallic pipes 127 mm 305 mm 610 mm In case the unshielded power line or electric equipments are open or close to the buried metallic pipes 64 mm 152 mm 305 mm In case the power line of the buried metallic pipes or equivalent shielded ones is close to the buried metallic pipes 76 mm 152 mm Transformer electric motor fluorescent light 1 016 mm 305 mm S...

Страница 890: ... of the basic unit manual 7 After setting the system parameters correctly download them 4 Instructions for system configuration When you configure the system with XGB s built in FEnet refer to the below for installation 1 Check the basic factors required for system configuration and select the proper communication interface 2 Choose the dedicated cable for communication modules 3 When installing c...

Страница 891: ...r each station to use the high speed link service 3 Use the specified communication cables Otherwise communication problems may occur 4 Check whether the cables are disconnected or shorted before installing the communication cables 5 Fix them tightly until the communication cable connector clicks 6 In case the cable access is unstable it may cause serious communicable problems 7 For wiring separat...

Страница 892: ...tion diagram XGB s built in FEnet accesses LSIS PLC other companies PLCs PCs etc through the network You can configure the system by using dedicated communication Modbus TCP IP user defined frame high speed link communication Network configuration through XGB PLC 1 4 2 Fig 1 4 2 System configuration diagram XGB s built in FEnet can access to 1 1 communication or network and perform 1 N communicati...

Страница 893: ...In addition through XG5000 you can make download upload the program and parameters and transmit receive data through dedicated services Modbus TCP IP user defined frame Network configuration between LSIS modules 1 4 4 Fig 1 4 4 System configuration diagram You can configure the system by using XGB s built in FEnet and XGK PLC s FEnet I F expansion modules 1 N communication is available through 1 1...

Страница 894: ...fter network configuration make sure to set up IP parameters of each PLC protocols The protocols supported by the built in FEnet are XGT dedicated Modbus TCP IP user defined frame File Transfer Protocol FTP Each protocol is operated by the server or client and dedicated server P2P functions communicate based on designated protocols Items Specifications Driver Communica tion method Port No Remarks ...

Страница 895: ...tocols for XGT 2 Frame structure 1 XGT dedicated packet s structure through Ethernet When communicating with dedicated protocols for XGT MAC IP header IP Header TCP Header and LSIS frames containing data are included for Ethernet communication Fig 1 5 1 shows the frame structure for Ethernet communication Fig 1 5 1 XGT dedicated packet structure through Ethernet 3 Structure of XGT dedicated frame ...

Страница 896: ...W000 MW000 LW000 KW000 CW000 T W000 FW000 DW000 IW0 0 0 QW0 0 0 MW 0 RW0 WW0 UW00 00 etc D word h0300 D 44h PD000 MD000 LD000 KD000 CD000 TD0 00 FD000 DD000 ID0 0 0 QD0 0 0 MD0 R D0 WD0 etc L word h0400 L 4Ch PL000 ML000 LL000 KL000 CL000 TL000 FL000 DL000 IL0 0 0 QL0 0 0 ML0 RL0 WL0 etc Table 1 5 3 Data types of dedicated protocols for XGT Notice 1 In the timer counter designating bit means the c...

Страница 897: ...g on each data type h0100 h0200 h0300 h0400 Continuous h1400 Request on reading byte type of variables by block Response h5500 Individual h0000 Response to the request on reading data h0100 h0200 h0300 h0400 Continuous h1400 Response to the request on reading by block Write Request h5800 Individual h0000 Request on writing data depending on each data type h0100 h0200 h0300 h0400 Continuous h1400 R...

Страница 898: ...sequence number h0000 hFFFF 2 Length h0000 h0100 2 Length h0000 h0100 2 Position information h00 hFF 1 Position information h00 hFF 1 Check Sum h00 hFF 1 Check Sum h00 hFF 1 Command Command h5400 Read 2 Command h5500 Read 2 h5800 Write 2 h5900 Write 2 Data Type Data type h0000 bit 2 Data type h0000 bit 2 h0100 byte h0100 byte h0200 word h0200 word h0300 Double word h0300 Double word h0400 long wor...

Страница 899: ...hey are operated as server For client Company ID 1 or Company ID 2 should be used Type Mode Frame Remarks Company ID 1 ASCII L S I S X G T n n XGT HEX h4C h53 h49 h53 h2D h58 h47 h54 h00 h00 Company ID 2 ASCII L G I S G L O F A GM MK HEX h4C h47 h49 h53 h2D h47 h4C h4F h46 h41 Table 1 5 6 LSIS s Own Number Notice XGB FEnet does not support LGIS GLOFA header It will be supported in the future and y...

Страница 900: ...01 0x00 2 Variable Length 0x04 0x00 2 DataAddress ASCII M B 0 4 HEX 0x25 0x4D 0x42 0x30 Data Count HEX 0x02 0x00 2 Table 1 5 7 Request frame for reading variables individually 2 Response frame for reading variables individually Items Type Frame Size Company ID ASCII L S I S X G T n n 10 HEX 0x4C 0x53 0x49 0x53 0x2D 0x58 0x47 0x54 0x00 0x00 ASCII L G I S G L O F A HEX 0x4C 0x47 0x49 0x53 0x2D 0x47 ...

Страница 901: ...ength 0x04 0x00 2 DataAddress ASCII M B 0 4 HEX 0x25 0x4D 0x42 0x30 Data Count HEX 0x02 0x00 2 표1 5 9 Frame for reading variables sequentially 4 Response frame for reading variables sequentially Items Type Frame Size Company ID ASCII L S I S X G T n n 10 HEX 0x4C 0x53 0x49 0x53 0x2D 0x58 0x47 0x54 0x00 0x00 ASCII L G I S G L O F A HEX 0x4C 0x47 0x49 0x53 0x2D 0x47 0x4C 0x4F 0x46 0x41 PLC Info HEX ...

Страница 902: ...Data Unit 2 MBAP ModbusApplication Protocol 3 PDU Protocol Data Unit 1 Frame structure of Modbus TCP IP 1 Modbus TCP IP s frame structure through Ethernet Table 1 5 1 Modbus TCP IP s frame structure through Ethernet Table 1 5 2 Modbus MABP structure Table 1 5 3 Modbus ADU structure IP Header MAC TCP Header MODBUS TCP IP ADU MODBUS TCP IP ADU Ethernet Request Response Frame MABP Header Transaction ...

Страница 903: ...s Function Modbus transcription Function Code 01 h01 Reading output bit Read Coils Function Code 02 h02 Reading input bit Read Discrete Inputs Function Code 03 h03 Reading output word Read Holding Registers Function Code 04 h04 Reading input word Write Input Register Function Code 05 h05 Writing output bit Write single Coil Function Code 15 h0F Writing output bit sequentially Write Multiple Coils ...

Страница 904: ...nge Function code 1 byte h02 Initial address 2 bytes h0000 hFFFF Number of inputs 2 bytes h0001 h07D0 2000 bit Response Items Size Range Function code 1 byte h01 Number of bytes 2 bytes N Input status N x 1 byte Error Items Size Range Function code 1 byte h82 Function code h80 Exceptional code 1 byte h01 h02 h03 h04 Example of application Request frame Response frame Items HEX Items HEX Function c...

Страница 905: ...xample of application Request frame Response frame Items HEX Items HEX Function code h03 Function code h03 Initial address upper byte h00 Number of bytes h06 Initial address lower byte h6B Word status 108 h02 Number of words upper byte h00 Word status 108 h2B Number of words lower byte h03 Word status 109 h00 Word status 109 h00 Word status 110 h00 Word status 110 h64 4 Function code h04 Writing i...

Страница 906: ... output bit Write Single Coil Request Items Size Range Function code 1 byte h05 Initial address 2 bytes h0000 hFFFF Input value 2 bytes h0000 or hFF0D Response Items Size Range Function code 1 byte h05 Number of bytes 2 bytes h0000 hFFFF Input status 2 bytes h0000 or hFF00 Error Items Size Range Function code 1 byte h85 function code h80 Exceptional code 1 byte h01 h02 h03 h04 Example of applicati...

Страница 907: ...000 hFFFF Input status 2 bytes h0001 h07B0 Error Items Size Range Function code 1 byte h8F function code h80 Exceptional code 1 byte h01 h02 h03 h04 Example of application Request frame Response frame Items HEX Items HEX Function code h0F Function code h0F Initial address upper byte h00 Initial address upper byte h00 Initial address lower byte h13 Initial address lower byte h13 Number of outputs u...

Страница 908: ...plication Request frame Response frame Items HEX Items HEX Function code h06 Function code h06 Initial address upper byte h00 Number of bytes h00 Initial address lower byte h01 Coil status 27 20 h01 Input status upper byte h00 Coil status 36 28 h00 Number of coils lower byte h03 Coil status 38 36 h03 8 Function code h10 Writing output sequentially Write Multiple Registers Request Items Size Range ...

Страница 909: ...ms HEX Function code h10 Function code h01 Initial address upper byte h00 Initial address upper byte h00 Initial address lower byte h01 Initial address lower byte h01 Number of outputs upper byte h00 Number of outputs upper byte h00 Number of outputs lower byte h02 Number of outputs lower byte h02 Number of bytes h04 Output value upper byte h00 Output value lower byte h0A Output value upper byte h...

Страница 910: ...is the TCP IP based dedicated protocol for file transfer FTP is the function to read write delete edit move search files saved to various file systems of the FTP server through FTP commands The File Transfer Protocol is the TCP IP based one so it is composed of MAC header IP header TCP header FTP message Frame structure of FTP ...

Страница 911: ...t by the client 1 Client server model The server performs the functions detection of reception transmission of response Client Server 1 Request 2 Indication 3 Response 4 Confirmation Fig 1 6 1 Server client model 2 System configuration Server Server Server Network 3 Classification of dedicated services Dedicated services Port No Protocol Max Min number of accesses XGT server TCP XGT server 2004 TC...

Страница 912: ...be displayed in the network configuration After accessing to the PLC if you execute I O synchronization in Online Diagnosis I O information the built in communication modules will be updated Then if you choose the built in FEnet the window for setting communication modules will be executed The built in FEnet is automatically set so you cannot change the type base slot Fig 1 6 2 Creation of new pro...

Страница 913: ...f Duplex electricity of 100Mbps 100M FULL Full Duplex electricity of 10Mbps IP address You can set the IP address of the FEnet I F module Subnet Mask Value to determine whether the opposing station exists in the same network as its own Gateway Gateway module address router address to transmit and receive data through the station using different network from its own or public network DNS server You...

Страница 914: ...stered to the host table FTP web server setting d Item Description Activation of FTP server function Setting the FTP server s operations Activation of web server function Setting the web server s operations User ID ID required to connect to the PLC from the web server FTP client Password Setting the password of the user ID used for web server FTP commonly Show password For a user to check the set ...

Страница 915: ... 2004 Fig 1 6 5 Operating sequence of the TCP XGT server 1 Connection The client sends the connection request to the server and then the server transmits the response to connection request The connection port number is Port No 2004 of the XGT dedicated protocols Then the client sends the response to confirmation of connection After the stages of are completed connection between client server is ma...

Страница 916: ...ter 1 Built in FEnet communication 1 37 Built in Comm Built in 3 Disconnection The client transmits disconnection request and the server transmits confirmation of disconnection and terminates the connection ...

Страница 917: ...ing sequence of the below Fig 1 6 6 Client Server SYN SYN ACK ACK PUSH ACK PUSH ACK ACK FIN ACK FIN ACK RST Request disconnection Time Time Modbus TCP IP Protocol Client Modbus TCP IP Protocol Server Disconnection Disconnection Connection Connection Transmission port n 1024 Destination port 502 Fig 1 6 6 Operating sequence of the Modbus TCP IP server ...

Страница 918: ...e On it creates the request frames and receives responses for processing with the protocols that are designated as the relevant channel XGB s built in FEnet can realize the function through up to 7 channels and you can use other protocols for each channel Client Server 1 Request 2 Indication 3 Response 4 Confirmation Fig 1 7 1 Server client model The Client performs the functions of transmission o...

Страница 919: ...2P parameters of XG5000 Fig 1 7 3 Window for P2P setting of XG5000 Window for registering P2P parameters You can set the P2P parameters up to 6 Each P2P is composed of P2P channel P2P block user defined frame E mail Window for editing P2P You can register and edit P2P block up to 32 You can separately register frames by driver ...

Страница 920: ... use P2P services 1 Click the PLC module with the right mouse button on the P2P tab and choose P2P communication 2 Choose the P2P number to create the P2P module to be used 3 P2P 01 that XGB basic unit s built in communication setting is fixed as Cnet 4 P2P 02 that XGB basic unit s built in communication setting is fixed as FEnet ...

Страница 921: ...ion settings 6 The base is fixed as 0 7 The slot is automatically designated as slot 2 that has the built in FEnet 8 If communication settings are completed click the OK button 9 If you click the OK button the detailed items of P2P will be created in the project window as the figure of the next page ...

Страница 922: ...munication 1 43 Built in Comm Built in 2 Configuration of P2P parameters If you set the communication modules in the P2p screen the window for setting P2P parameters will be displayed as the below figure P2P is composed of 4 data ...

Страница 923: ...vices Setting user defined frame XGT client MODBUS TCP client Setting communication equipments using the protocols other than XGT MODBUS TCP 2 P2P block Setting 32 P2P blocks that are operated independently 3 User defined frames Registration of user defined frames 4 E mail Registration of frames to transmit and receive E mail frames ...

Страница 924: ...se of occurrence of events 2 Kinds of P2P services 1 XGT client The XGT client service is used to define transmission and reception of data of XGB s built in FEnet For simple communication a user only needs to designate the basic settings such as channels and data type BIT BYTE WORD etc and memory areas etc No 2004 port is used for TCP and No 2005 port is used for UDP 2 User defined frame It is th...

Страница 925: ... can communicate with the opposing devices by setting parameters without separate communication programming The below figure shows the typical example of using the Ethernet Driver communication with MMI PC When the MMI PC requests the data FEnet will respond Types of Ethernet server Drivers The available driver types are as below Types Descriptions XGT server LSIS s XGT FEnet dedicated protocol Mo...

Страница 926: ... number of available channels in P2P is the number that subtracts the number of dedicated accesses in the basic parameter from the total number of channels 4 Number of P2P channels 4 number of dedicated accesses For user convenience P2P allows the communication with the devices using XGT Modbus TCP protocols by setting simple parameters For communication with other devices it provides the function...

Страница 927: ...Chapter 1 Built in FEnet communication 1 48 Built in Comm You can define the P2P driver type by selecting the P2P Driver of the desired channel Selection of P2P Driver client ...

Страница 928: ...put the opposing device s IP address If you choose the XGT client or Modbus TCP client for the P2P Driver you cannot apply the user defined frame Notice 1 Opposing station s IP address In case XGT is client make sure to set the server device s IP address If the server is dynamically allocated the IP through DHCP the IP address may be changed so you need to check the IP address before use 3 How to ...

Страница 929: ...hannel You can select the communication port to be used for the relevant block The communication port of each block is determined at the time of setting parameter and it cannot be changed during RUN The maximum number of configurable channels is the number that subtracts the number of set dedicated accesses from total 16 communication modules basic settings of XG5000 3 Driver Setting It means the ...

Страница 930: ...evice to be accessed through unspecified communication not XGT client Modbus TCP client protocol It is applied to the user defined frame You can select and use just one frame per one Frame Send Through this function you need to designate the fixed variable sized variables of the relevant frames Before using this function you need to define the frame to be transmitted Receive d It is the function t...

Страница 931: ...you can choose them up to 4 In the case of Modbus it is fixed as 1 9 Data size It defines the size of the data to be read when you choose Sequential Read and the data size is different depending on the data type 10 Frame You can select the relevant frame group setting that will perform communication when defining the user frame 11 Setting You can designate the memory area to be transmitted receive...

Страница 932: ... the startup conditions of each block set in parameters are On In the case of XBL EMTA you can use the XGT client function in two ways TCP and UDP Client Server SYN SYN ACK ACK PUSH ACK PUSH ACK ACK FIN ACK FIN ACK RST Request disconnection Time Time XGT dedicated Protocol Client XGT dedicated Protocol Server Disconnection Disconnection Connection Connection Transmission port n 2004 Destination po...

Страница 933: ...dbus TCP IP protocol It transmits the frame when the startup conditions of each block set in parameters are On Client Server SYN SYN ACK ACK PUSH ACK PUSH ACK ACK FIN ACK FIN ACK RST Request disconnection Time Time Modbus TCP IP Protocol Client Modbus TCP IP Protocol Server Disconnection Disconnection Connection Connection Transmission port n 1024 Destination port 502 Setting Modbus TCP client cha...

Страница 934: ...e in the P2P service only All frames are composed of Header Data Tail and each element can be omitted The user defined frame is expressed as the group name and frame name Each meaning is as below 1 Group It is the set of frames having the same Headers and Tails To register frames you need to register groups 1 Adding groups of user defined frame After choosing the user defined frame as below click ...

Страница 935: ...roup name in the group edition menu and select the frame type You can input the group name discretionally Selecting group names and frame types of the user defined frame The below figure shows the results of the project window when selecting SEND of the group name transmission frame Completion of adding groups of the user defined frame ...

Страница 936: ... you can register the maximum of 4 variable segments to one Body 1 Adding frames to the groups If you click the right mouse button on the added group as below the popup menu will come on Choose Add Frames and choose the frame types The below figure represents the added frames to the group when you select HEAD TAIL BODY respectively Adding the transmission frame of the user defined frame Adding the...

Страница 937: ... s BODY 3 Segments 1 Kind of segments The frame s Headers Bodies Tails are composed of multiple segments You can add segments by clicking the right mouse button Example of the window where the segment is registered There are the numerical constant string constant fixed variable sized variables for the segments forming the frames ...

Страница 938: ... Built in FEnet communication 1 59 Built in Comm Built in Adding segment Numerical constant a It defines the part that is fixed as the constant among frames and the value of data term should be designated as Hex ...

Страница 939: ...ved to the PLC memory At this time data values can be changed swapped Variable size variables d They can be used for the frame s Body area Transmission frame It is used to change the frame length If you check memory specification the transmission frame will be composed of the data read from the PLC memory Reception frame It is used to process variable sized data among received frames It can be reg...

Страница 940: ...d saves it For configuring the transmission frame in CASE you use the PLC memory MW100 s 2word and convert it into Hex to ASCII or in case h34353637 is saved in MW100 the corresponding segment of the transmission frame will be made of 4567 In addition when you convert the part of the received frames into Hex and save it if the value of the corresponding area is 4567 h34353637 will be saved to the ...

Страница 941: ...by a user 2 After the access request is received from the client and connection is completed when the frame registered in the reception block is received from the client the corresponding block will be processed 3 In case the ports or frame forms are different reception process is not available 4 In the case of UDP user frame server when the frame registered in the reception block is received to t...

Страница 942: ...tered in the transmission block to the port designated by a user 2 If the startup conditions of the block are On the connection request will be sent to the server and the frame registered in the transmission block will be sent to the corresponding port 3 In the case of UDP when the startup conditions are On to the corresponding port without connection request the frame will be transmitted ...

Страница 943: ...eters to be downloaded are already made and accesses to the PLC s CPU 1 P2P parameter download If you choose Online Write in the XG5000 menu to download the completed P2P parameters the window for parameters download will pop up If you click the OK button the communication parameters will be downloaded to the CPU if you check Set up with Link Enable Link Enable can be applied with writing P2P HS p...

Страница 944: ...meters you need to start up P2P for P2P service To achieve this choose Online Communication Module Setting Link Enable high speed link P2P in the menu Choose the P2P parameters to be started in the link Enable high speed link P2P window If you cancel the already checked P2P parameter the relevant P2P service will stop ...

Страница 945: ...m Diagnosis as shown in the left figure after access through XG5000 2 Then the current system is displayed as shown in the right figure 3 Put the mouse on the figure of the module and click the right mouse button as shown in the left side of the below figure 4 Choose the status by services and click them ...

Страница 946: ...Chapter 1 Built in FEnet communication 1 67 Built in Comm Built in 5 Then the status window by service is displayed 6 If you select the P2P service tab you can check the status of P2P service as below ...

Страница 947: ...e as below 1 Function for setting the high speed link block If there are several transmission reception areas you can set the blocks up to 64 It is possible to set 200 words per one block 2 Function for setting the transmission cycle A user can set the transmission cycle by parameters It is possible for a user to set the transmission reception cycle from 20ms to 10 seconds 3 Function for setting t...

Страница 948: ...communication 1 69 Built in Comm Built in Parameters setting 1 8 2 1 Basic parameters 1 When creating the XG5000 project any RUN communication modules are not registered in the basic network Fig 1 8 1 Creation of XG5000 project ...

Страница 949: ...u execute I O synchronization in online diagnosis I O information after accessing to the PLC even the currently installed expansion communication module including built in communication will be registered Fig 1 8 2 Registration of XG5000 project communication module ...

Страница 950: ...lt in FEnet communication 1 71 Built in Comm Built in 3 Double click the built in Fenet and input high speed link s exchange number and network parameter information Fig 1 8 3 Setting the basic communication module ...

Страница 951: ...unication items a as shown in the left side of the figure 1 8 4 Then the window for setting communication modules is activated as shown in the right side of the b figure 1 8 4 and you can set the basic high speed link No 01 high speed link is the built in FEnet and No 02 and 03 high speed links can be used for expansion communication modules as before c Selection of period type Double click Fig 1 ...

Страница 952: ...shown in the right side of Fig 1 8 5 2 Setting the high speed link transmission block Fig 1 8 6 Setting high speed link transmission block Set the station type as MASTER a Choose the transmission mode b If you choose transmission it will be automatically set as the exchange number set in the basic c parameters Input the block number range 0 31 d nput the area to be read The area to be read is the ...

Страница 953: ...number This one is the exchange number of the opposing device transmitting c the relevant block Input the block number When the received frame is the same as the relevant block number d reception is processed Input the storage area The storage area is the area saving data when the frames of the relevant e block Numbers are received to each area of XGB CPU modules f If you input the word size of th...

Страница 954: ...ll be downloaded to the CPU If you check Set up with Link Enable Link Enable can be applied with writing P2P HS parameters at the same time 5 High speed link Enable Choose Online Communication module setting Link Enable after accessing to the PLC through a XG5000 Choose high speed link 01 that built in FEnet is designated as the base b After clicking the checkbox click Write button c If you click ...

Страница 955: ...ctions and definitions of the high speed link information Items RUN Link Link Trouble Transmissio n reception status Operation mode Error Status of high speed link Information type General information General information Individual information Individual information Individual information Individual information Keyword name x high speed link No _HSxRLINK _HSxLTRBL _HSxTRX n n 0 64 _HSxMOD n n 0 64...

Страница 956: ...ximum number of registrations When the station of the registered items is under Run mode the relevant bit will be On when the station is under Stop Pause Debug mode it will be Off 5 Flag displaying the block station and normal communication It is the individual information showing the operating status of the resisted lists of the high speed link parameters It displays the transmission reception in...

Страница 957: ... 32 blocks Less than 2 ms 8 blocks Less than 2 ms 16 blocks Less than 2 ms 32 blocks Less than 5 ms 4 blocks Less than 5 ms 8 blocks Less than 5 ms 16 blocks Less than 10 ms 1 block Less than 10 ms 4 blocks Less than 10 ms 8 blocks 50 ms Less than 1 ms 32 blocks 50 ms Less than 1 ms 32 blocks 50 ms Less than 1 ms 32 blocks Less than 2 ms 24 blocks Less than 2 ms 32 blocks Less than 2 ms 32 blocks ...

Страница 958: ... 10 ms 32 blocks Less than 10 ms 32 blocks 1s Less than 1 ms 32 blocks 1s Less than 1 ms 32 blocks 1s Less than 1 ms 32 blocks Less than 2 ms 32 blocks Less than 2 ms 32 blocks Less than 2 ms 32 blocks Less than 5 ms 32 blocks Less than 5 ms 32 blocks Less than 5 ms 32 blocks Less than 10 ms 32 blocks Less than 10 ms 32 blocks Less than 10 ms 32 blocks 5s Less than 1 ms 32 blocks 5s Less than 1 ms...

Страница 959: ...ected to the same network with the PLC in the above figure you can perform the remote 1 stage access through Ethernet Assume that the Ethernet cables are connected to the PLC 1 station in XG5000 and PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC N are connected with each other through Ethernet To access the details of the PLC N station in the above figure set the access method as Ethernet in access setting of XG5000 s online me...

Страница 960: ...access methods The above figure shows the example of 1 stage PLC B and 2 stage PLC E access in the system composed of two networks 1 Direct and remote 1 stage access in the PC connected to Ethernet If the PC where XG5000 is running is connected to the PLC through network you can perform the remote 1 stage access through Ethernet without connecting RS 232C to the PLC s CPU Fig 1 9 1 Remote 1 stage ...

Страница 961: ... through Ethernet Fig 1 9 2 Direct and remote 1 stage access in the PC 1 Access Method You can select the access methods In Fig 9 2 6 Ethernet is used for access instead of RS 232C so choose Ethernet 2 Access stage You can determine to connect with the PLC through remote 1 stage or 2 stage In this case you need to choose 1 stage 3 IP address Record the IP address of the FEnet I F module to be acce...

Страница 962: ...5000 is not matched with the accessed 1 stage and 2 stage CPU types the following menu items are not available a Write program and each parameter b Read program and each parameter c Monitor d Link Enable setting e I O information f Forced I O information 2 Open the project to be accessed and execute remote access when programming XG5000을 through remote 1 stage and 2 stage access 3 The remote acces...

Страница 963: ...ss 3 Allocation of data channels 4 Receiving data channel 5 sending commands 6 Receiving commands 7 Data send receive Fig 1 10 1 FTP server client structure Supported Functions 1 10 2 You can access to XGB high performance PLC series built in FTP server through FTP client After access you can copy the data log file saved in the SD card to the user s PC where FTP client is installed or other device...

Страница 964: ...ddress This address is commonly used for P2P service high speed link service remote service FTP service Fig 1 10 2 Setting the basic FTP address 2 Check Activate FTP server function as shown in Fig 1 10 3 Fig 1 10 3 Activation of the FTP function 3 Enter the user ID and password to be used to access the FTP server You can change the user ID and password through XG5000 only Notice Unless you set th...

Страница 965: ...e parameters to use FTP is completed 6 When you execute Online Write Parameter the parameters are written in the PLC Fig 1 10 5 Writing parameters Notice Rules for applying the user ID and password You can enter the user ID and password that are composed of alphabetical characters and numbers but special characters are not available They must be case sensitive and must not exceed the maximum of 8 ...

Страница 966: ...lity with other commercial client programs other than Windows FTP client is not guaranteed 1 How to use WINDOWS command prompt 1 First of all execute the command prompt in Windows Fig 1 10 6 Execution of command prompt Notice To execute the command prompt window enter cmd to the window or press Start All Programs Auxiliary Programs Command Prompt For more details on execution of command prompt ref...

Страница 967: ...tart the FTP session Fig 1 10 7 Startup of FTP 3 Enter the open IP address to access to the FTP server You can enter the FTP IP address in the command prompt instead of using the open command Fig 1 10 8 FTP server access using the open command No Used function 1 ftp No Used function 1 Open 165 144 149 158 ...

Страница 968: ...communication 1 89 Built in Comm Built in 4 Enter the user ID and password to access to the FTP server It is normal that the password is not displayed on the screen Fig 1 10 9 ID authentication after accessing to the FTP server ...

Страница 969: ...FEnet communication 1 90 Built in Comm 5 When login is completed successfully the message will be displayed User name accepted Fig 1 10 10 Completion of FTP server access and login Fig 1 10 11 Failure of FTP server login ...

Страница 970: ...e download Accordingly you can check the current progress of file download by activating the HASH function Fig 1 10 12 Activation of the HASH function 7 You can view the directories and file lists that exist in the drive currently through the DIR command Fig 1 10 13 Viewing the file list of the current route through the dir command No Used function 1 hash No Used function 1 dir ...

Страница 971: ...ahasnd folder lists that exist in the lower folder will be displayed Fig 1 10 14 Entry into the lower folder through the cd command 9 Designate the directory path of the FTP client side that will download the file through the lcd command Fig 1 10 15 Activation of HASH function No Used function 1 cd DATALOG 2 dir 3 cd GROUP00 4 dir No Used function Remark 1 lcd c test C test folder is made before u...

Страница 972: ...get command and download it Fig 1 10 16 Importing the file through the get command 11 When the HASH funciton is activated and deactivated the transmission status is shown in as below Fig 1 10 17 Completion of download after deactivating the hash function No Used function 1 get FILE0003 CSV No Used function 1 hash ...

Страница 973: ...rbose Setup cancellation of verbose mode open Connection to the remote ftp quote Sending random ftp commands prompt Executing interactive questions to multiple commands recv Receiving files put Sending one file Not available dir Enumerate the contents of remote directories pwd Printing the remote computer s working directory disconnect Termination of the ftp session quit Termination and end of the...

Страница 974: ... FTP server 226 Closes the data transfer port after successful transmission 230 Successful access to the FTP server through the entered ID and password 250 The connection of requested files and folders is successfully completed 257 Indicates the current remote directory s path 331 Server s request on the password 510 Unserviceable command Commands Description Operations Example open Attempting to ...

Страница 975: ...rewall or apply exception handling If the FTP access is not smooth refer to the below 1 Cancellation of a firewall Clear the window s own firewall 1 Execute the control panel 2 Execute the Windows Firewall 3 Execute setup or clear of the Windows Firewall 4 Clear all firewalls as below Notice If you clear the Windows Firewall you may be exposed to various external intrusions so you are recommended ...

Страница 976: ...al rules You can refer to the following procedures to register exceptional rules to a firewall 1 Execute the control panel 2 Execute the Windows Firewall 3 If you execute the advanced settings the below screen will pop up 3 Choose the inbound rules 4 Choose New Rules at the top of the right side ...

Страница 977: ...Chapter 1 Built in FEnet communication 1 98 Built in Comm 5 Create the rules with the method perferred by a user Notice For registering exceptional rules refer to the window manual ...

Страница 978: ... data packet Accordingly you are recommended to set thatACK is sent whenever the TCP IP of windows receives one packet through a register as below 1 Select the Start button of Windows for execution Shortcut key Windows key R 2 Input regedit to the execution window and run the process 3 Check the below path HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services Tcpip Parameters Interfaces 4 Depending...

Страница 979: ...FEnet communication 1 100 Built in Comm 7 Enter the value name as shown below Value name TcpAckFrequency It should be case sensitive 8 Double click the created register and enter 1 to the value data 9 Reboot the computer ...

Страница 980: ...rm the administrator of the state through the mail server The E mail service is also available in common mails and you need to configure the separate relay server to send a common mail 2 Configuration of the E mail system To use the common E mail service the configuration for using E mail is needed To transfer a common mail you need to encrypt the mail for security but it is not easy for the PLC t...

Страница 981: ... start up conditions to send the mail If the start up conditions are met the mail information is sent to the SMTP relay server and then the SMTP relay server substitutingly goes through authentication process and sends the final mail to a recipient The mail recipient can see the ID and title details of the E mail set in XG5000 Start Install the SMTP relay server Creation of mail start up condition...

Страница 982: ...er Support Download Materials SMTP relay server Korean website http www lsis co kr ls support downloadlist asp English website http www lsis com support download 1 Installaiton of the relay server Procedures Description 1 Program execution 1 After downloading the program to set up the SMTP relay to the PC where you want to configure the relay server double click SMTPRelay msi 2 After clicking the ...

Страница 983: ...Through Windows Firewall in the upper left of the Windows firewall setting screen click the Program or Firewall Enable 2 Firewall Enable Find the program called SMTPRelayServer and check all items of domain home company individual common areas and then click the OK button Notice 1 After the SMTP relay server setting is completed in the E mail setting window of 1 11 2 E mail Setting you need to inp...

Страница 984: ...e as shown below Procedures Description 1 Add P2P After selecting Embedded FEnet in XG5000 s project window click on the right mouse button and then select Add Items P2P communication 2 Creation of P2P When the P2P selection window is created after selecting No 2 slot click the OK button Notice 1 In the P2P view tab E mail can be set up in the same way ...

Страница 985: ...t up the user name with the PLC the sender name will be displayed as the PLC Mail address It is the recipient s mail address when pressing Reply It indicates the transmitting mail server composed of the user name and mail server You can also set up that the PLC sends data and a normal PC receives the reply SMTP relay server information IP address When checking the SMTP relay server item you can fi...

Страница 986: ...nds the E mail by itself when the PLC s mode changes from RUN into STOP STOP RUN It is the option that the embedded Ethernet sends the E mail by itself when the PLC s mode changes from STOP into RUN ERROR It is the option that the embedded Ethernet sends the E mail by itself when some errors occur in the PLC Notice 1 When sending the mail through the SMTP relay server there may be the common E mai...

Страница 987: ...mbedded FEnet in XG5000 s project window double click the address of P2P 02 embedded or double click the address of P2P No 2 in P2P View 2 Register the address In the window for setting E mail address book register the address to which you want to send the mail If you select Edit The address edition window will pop up If you enter the name and mail address in this screen and select the OK button r...

Страница 988: ...ess book select Address book group the edition window for E mail address book s group will be created The details of the group edition window are as shown below 1 Group name Name of the group to create newly 2 Contact information Currently registered addresses 3 Members Addresses to be included to the group 4 Select It adds the addresses selected from the Contact Information to the Members 5 Delet...

Страница 989: ...communication 1 110 Built in Comm Procedures Description 3 Confirm creation of the group If you click the OK button in Group Edition the group list added newly to the address book will be displayed with the individual addresses ...

Страница 990: ...o 2 in P2P View 2 Write messages Click the Add button in the E mail message editing window and input the details to send The configuration and details of E mail edition are as shown below 1 Format Selection of the message type STRING Selected when the transferred message is a string type MB Selected when the transferred message is a device type 2 Size It is activated only when the format is MB It ...

Страница 991: ... added to the list of e mail messages index Notice 1 The format of an E mail message can be divided into String and Byte data received from the CPU The MB type is used to send the P2P ESend parameter s message data as many as the number of bytes set in the Size 2 The line break includes the command to write on the next line when outputting the message in the received screen ...

Страница 992: ...FEnet in XG5000 s project window double click P2P block of P2P 02 embedded or double click P2P block of P2P No 2 in P2P View 2 Make P2P block 1 In the P2P parameter setting window tick the E mail checkbox 2 Select ESEND in P2P functions 3 Set up the start up conditions to transfer E mail 3 Setting Click the setting button to set up each variable For more details refer to E mail variables 4 If you ...

Страница 993: ...ide to whom If you want to send the mail to several people you can set up grouping In this case the recipient s mail address should be input in advance before grouping The maximum number of groupings is limited to 10EA or less Mail data It means the start address of the data to send In terms of the size of the transmitted data starting with the first part the mail is transmitted as many as the num...

Страница 994: ...d Link Enable Select Online Write in XG5000 s project window After checking Set together with Link Enable in the Write window check Link Enable in P2P 02 embedded 2 If you click the OK button Write Parameters and Link Enable will be done Notice 1 If you set up the parameters for the SMTP relay server to use common E mails Gmail yahoo etc you need to set up for SMTP relay server Refer to 2 Setting ...

Страница 995: ...ction as shown below Procedures Description 1 Setting for SNTP 1 Input the TCP IP setting parameters in the FEnet basic setting window Enter the IP address subnet mask gateway DNS server address This address is commonly used for P2P service high speed link service remote service FTP SNTP service etc 2 Check SNTPTime Synchronization Enable 3 Then set up the SNTP server s IP address and Port No sync...

Страница 996: ...done the PLC reads periodically the time value from the SNTP server 2 In the SNTP server s IP address the initial 203 248 240 140 port is set as 123 This is the open SNTP server called Time bora net 3 If you want to use other SMTP servers change the IP address and port No of the SNTP server before input ...

Страница 997: ...rs after supplying power and connecting network Module defect is suspected so follow up service may be required In case Read Write Data do not work during dedicated services 1 Check the communication speed Auto 10 100M TX It should have the same communication speed with the opposing device to be communicated In case the device with Auto Negotiation and the device with manual speed are mixed in the...

Страница 998: ...twork should be same or set as Auto for communication 2 Check the IP address settings The IP should be valid in the network In case the set IP addresses are overlapped in the network or invalid IP exists communication is impossible 3 Check whether the high speed link s parameters are set In case the parameters are not set or the set exchange numbers are overlapped in the network or you have wrong ...

Страница 999: ...rted 3 It operates independently according to channel Since protocol data written by user is managed by main unit in case communication module is changed additional setting download is not necessary 4 Device read write by using XGT dedicated modbus user defined protocol is available 5 It provides communication function in which multidrop up to 32 connection is available in case of using RS 422 485...

Страница 1000: ...communication LS Bus Client Notes1 Server XGT dedicated protocol server Modbus ASCII RTU server Data type Data bit 7 or 8 Stop bit 1 or 2 Parity Even Odd None Synchronization type Asynchronous type Transmission speed bps 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps available Station No setting Setting range 0 255 Max station No available 32 stations Transmission distance Max 15m Max 500m Diagn...

Страница 1001: ...ead Write Enable K K0 K8191 8192 Read Write Enable F F0 F219 200 Read Enable F200 F2047 1848 Read Write Enable T T0 T2047 2048 Read Write Enable C C0 C2047 2048 Read Write Enable L L0 L4095 4096 Read Write Enable N N0 N10239 10240 Read Enable D D0 D19999 20000 Read Write Enable U U00 00 U0B 31 384 Read Write Enable Z Z0 Z127 128 Read Write Enable R R0 R16383 16384 Read Write Enable ...

Страница 1002: ... 2 XEC Series IEC type AREA Device Type Size Word Remark I IW0 0 0 IW15 15 3 1024 Read Write Enable Q QW0 0 0 QW15 15 3 1024 Read Write Enable M MW0 MW16383 16384 Read Write Enable W WW0 WW32767 32768 Read Write Enable R RW0 RW16383 16384 Read Write Enable ...

Страница 1003: ...or RS 232C connection terminal Built in RS 232C connection connector Pin No Name Description Signal direction XGBU External Device Function Description 1 485 485 Signal Built in RS 485 Signal 2 485 485 Signal Built in RS 485 Signal 3 SG Signal Ground Signal ground 4 TX Transmitted Data Built in RS 232C transmitted data signal 5 RX Received Data Built in RS 232C received data signal ...

Страница 1004: ...connecting in null modem mode connect 3 wire system as follow Cnet 9 PIN Connection number and signal direction Computer communication device Pin No Name Name 3 SG SG 4 TX TXD 5 RX RXD 2 Wiring method when using built in RS 485 Pin No Name Signal direction External communication device 1 485 485 2 485 485 ...

Страница 1005: ... LAN Interface Cable Type LIREV AMESB Size 2P X 22AWG D 0 254 TA Manufacturer LS Cable 1 Cable specification 1 Electrical characteristic Item Standard Test conditions Withstanding voltage No destruction 500V 1min Insulation resistance 1 000 or above 20 Static electricity capacity 45 M or less 1 Characteristics impedance 120 5 Ω 10 2 External characteristic Item Unit Standard Conductor Cores Pair 2...

Страница 1006: ...nsmission specifications Transmission specifications can be set per RS 232C and RS 485 channel and the operation is started and stopped according to channels Data flow of each channel is as below RS 485 channel PLC CPU TX RX RX TX RS 232C channel RS 422 cable RS 232C cable PLC CPU Note 1 For mode change during RUN download parameter by using XG5000 2 Though you don t reset the PLC if download is c...

Страница 1007: ... of cable for long distance communication and the same resistance 1 2W as characteristic impedance of cable must be connected to terminal of network When using the recommended cable in 2 2 3 connect termination resistor of 120 to both end other cable than recommended the same resistance 1 2W as characteristic impedance of cable must be connected to both ends of cable Recommended termination resist...

Страница 1008: ... module acts as server which respond request of PC HMI Since there is no modem in case of using RS 232C channel communication distance is max 15m in case of using RS 422 channel communication distance is max 500m Operation mode of Cnet I F is set according to PC HMI s communication method 1 In case of using 1 1 connection with normal PC Wiring method External form of PC PC Connection number and si...

Страница 1009: ... XP Connection number and signal direction XGB main unit XGB external form Pin No Pin No Signal Name 1 1 485 2 RXD 2 485 3 TXD 3 SG 4 4 TX 5 GND 5 RX 6 7 8 9 Note In case of PMU short no 4 and no 6 short no 7 and no 8 Wiring method RS 485 PMU Connection no and signal direction XGB main unit 485 485 485 485 Female Type XP Series LSIS XGB main unit RS 232C I F RS 485 I F ...

Страница 1010: ... In case of using 1 1 connection with XGB main unit Wiring method XGB external form XGB main unit Connection no and signal direction XGB main unit Pin No Pin No Signal name 1 1 485 2 2 485 3 3 SG 4 4 TX 5 5 RX XGB main unit XGB main unit RS 232C I F RS 485 I F ...

Страница 1011: ...hannel with PC HMI Normally PC HMI acts as client station Cnet I F module acts as server station which respond request of PC HMI Since it uses modem RS 232C channel should be set as dedicated modem and long distance communication is available Operation mode of this module should be set according to communication method of PC HMI Modem Modem XBL C21A XB E C DN32U XB E C DN32U XBL C21A ...

Страница 1012: ...on is Communication between Cnet I F modules through RS 422 channel PC acts as client station of Cnet 1 station Up to max 32 station connection is available in case of Cnet I F module RS 422 485 communication It sets station 1 among Cnet I F module as server station Dedicate modem or dial up modem available Type Module setting XBL C41A Station no PLC Cnet 1 P2P 1 XGT client Cnet 2 N XGT server 2 N...

Страница 1013: ...nt station Cnet I F module acts as server at this time module setting acts as RS 232C XGT server Cnet I F module RS 422 channel acts as P2P mode It transmits indication data to display module of mosaic panel through RS 422 channel Reading display transmission data from PC Type Module setting XBL C21A XBL C41A Station no PLC Cnet 1 XGT server P2P 1 XGB PLC Cnet 1 HMI PC GLOFA RS 232C communication ...

Страница 1014: ...al modem Communication between Cnet I F module is dedicated server client communication Optical modem connected with Cnet I F module on mobile body can communicate with the other optical modem only when positioned in communication available Main application Parking tower Monitoring device RS 422 Communication XGB PLC Cnet 1 XGB PLC Cnet 2 XGB PLC Cnet 3 RS 232C communication RS 232C communication ...

Страница 1015: ...between Cnet I F module is dedicated client communication RS 232C channel of Cnet I F module is dedicated modem mode Wireless Modem Wireless Modem XGB PLC Cnet 2 RS 232C Communication RS 232C Communication Type Module setting RS 232C RS 422 Station XBL C21A Dedicated mode Not used 2 station User mode Note Attach RS 232 485 terminal block when Power is Off and tighten the screw bolt Don t detach th...

Страница 1016: ...er click Project New Project and input project name select XGB as CPU series 2 In case of off line method on Cnet I F module registration In the status PLC is not connected in case the user set about communication module and write parameter related with communication In the project window select Basic Network and then click mouse right button Select Add item Communication module In the window clic...

Страница 1017: ...ction When selecting Project Open from PLC equipped communication module is searched automatically Screen of Open from PLC At this time in case registered module is different with currently connected module or type of communication module in the previous project it shows whether it changes or not with the following message I O information change message If you execute Read IO Information equipped ...

Страница 1018: ... PLC The method to read basic setting value and P2P setting value of communication module saved in PLC is as follow While connecting to main unit select Project Open from PLC After setting Online Settings click OK and then the saved parameter and project in PLC is opened as follow Open from PLC ...

Страница 1019: ...ng with other device You can define P2P block with max 32 per one channel acting independently 3 Loader service By using remote 1 2 you can monitor download program about remote PLC To use Cnet I F module you should set transmission specification such as data type like transmission speed and data stop bit You should select transmission specification of system to be same with specification of syste...

Страница 1020: ...net type 1 Built in communication channel 1 RS 232C channel 2 RS 485 2 XBL C41A channel 1 not used channel 2 RS 422 RS 485 3 XBL C21A channel 1 not used channel 2 RS 232C Response waiting time It means the time from sending frame to receving 1 operation setting it is available when active mode is set to Use P2P 2 waiting time 100ms setting value 100ms Delay time Setting It means that frame is sent...

Страница 1021: ... Reference P2P Each port acts as client and executes the communication by setting P2P parameter P2P setting reference XGT server It acts as XGT server supporting XGT dedicated communication Dedicated service Modbus ASCII server It acts as Modbus ASCII server Modbus communication Modbus RTU server It acts as Modbus RTU server Modbus communication Operation mode setting item Note Character Time It m...

Страница 1022: ... waiting time 100ms Delay time 10 Waiting time between characters 0ms XGT server 2 Executing XG5000 you register communication module Cnet for setting at each slot position 3 After Cnet module is registered if you double click Cnet module the following standard setting window shows Communication module setting screen 4 If standard communication parameter setting ends download Cnet module If you se...

Страница 1023: ...ation between our products by our dedicated service all characters are configured as ASCII code In case of using multi drop up to 32 stations can be connected In case of setting station number duplicated station number should not be set In case of using multi drop communication speed stop bit parity bit data bit of all Cnet I F module in network should be same For more detail protocol refer to cha...

Страница 1024: ...Single Coil 0XXXX 1 Coil 06 Preset Single Register 4XXXX 1 Register 15 Force Multiple Coils 0XXXX 1968 Coils 16 Preset Multiple Registers 4XXXX 120 registers 2 4 2 P2P Service P2P service means acting client operation of communication module P2P instructions available at Cnet I F module are 4 Read Write Send Receive Registration and edit of P2P service is executed in XG5000 each P2P parameter cons...

Страница 1025: ... the following figure P2P parameter consists of three informations Types Descriptions Remark P2P channel P2P channel setting defining communication protocol of P2P service to execute XGT Modbus available Each channel is independent It is applied when active mode is Use P2P settings P2P Block Setting P2P block of 32 acting independently User frame definition User frame definition registration ...

Страница 1026: ...r Meaning None Not using P2P service User frame definition In case of transmitting receiving user frame definition XGT client Select in case of executing read write of XGT memory Modbus ASCII client Select in case of acting as Modbus client using ASCII mode Modbus RTU client Select in case of acting as Modbus client using RTU mode About communication channel in case of selecting P2P driver as XGT ...

Страница 1027: ...r 2 Built in Cnet communication 2 29 Built in Comm You can set up to 32 independent blocks If you select temporary block you can designate each block operation by selecting instruction P2P instruction screen ...

Страница 1028: ...et as Use P2P settings P2P setting according to active active mode in the mode is as follows 2 P2P block setting If selecting P2P block in the P2P parameter setting window P2P block setting window shows Block setting window is same according to protocol and activated area is different P2P Each of items means as follow No Type Block form Contents 1 Channel Driver name changes according to driver se...

Страница 1029: ...max no is 4 2 When command type is continuous it is fixed as 1 7 Data size 1 This is activated when command type is continuous 2 When data type is 1 byte available max no is 120 byte 8 Destination station 1 Check Specify the destination station 2 Uncheck In case of using P2PSN command communicate with previously designated P2PSN destination station 9 Destination station number 1 Destination statio...

Страница 1030: ...er to PLC CPU enable P2P service If parameter is downloaded but P2P EIP is not enabled the P2P block is not operated In order to enable P2P EIP Select Online Communication module setting Enable Link and click P2P EIP number which you want to operate and then click Wirte button The P2P EIP is enabled 5 Diagnosis service In order to check the setting parameter operates normally diagnosis service is ...

Страница 1031: ...or P2P service about each channel However active mode in the standard settings should be set as Use P2P settings 2 P2P block setting There are two commands Write writes memory of self station to destination station s memory area and Read reads memory of destination memory and saves it in the memory area of self station Setting methods of both RTU and ASCII clients are same No Type Block type Meani...

Страница 1032: ... Bit type 1 976 2 Word type 1 61 2 when P2P function is Write 1 Modbus RTU client 1 Bit type 1 1968 2 Word type 1 123 2 Modbus ASCII client 1 Bit type 1 944 2 Word type 1 125 7 Destinatio n station 1 It is checked automatically 2 In case that the user doesn t want to use relevant block remove the check indication Then that block doesn t work 8 Destinatio n station number 1 Destination station numb...

Страница 1033: ...er to PLC CPU enable P2P service If parameter is downloaded but P2P EIP is not enabled the P2P block is not operated In order to enable P2P EIP Select Online Communication module setting Enable Link and click P2P EIP number which you want to operate and then click Wirte button The P2P EIP is enabled 5 Diagnosis service In order to check the setting parameter operates normally diagnosis service is ...

Страница 1034: ...hould define TX and RX frame so that it meets partner device s protocol 1 Structure of user defined frame When writing frame by user definition frame frame is divided into HEAD TAIL and BODY generally and each HEAD TAIL and BODY is divided into segment Total size of one frame should be less than 1024 byte 1 Structure of HEAD Input type of segment for HEAD is divided into numerical constant and str...

Страница 1035: ...r detection method CRC 16 IBM 16 bit IBM CRC error detection method CRC 16 CCITT 16 bit CCITT CRC error detection method MODBUS LRC MODBUS LRC error detection method Method checking error for dedicated communication LGIS CRC Error detection method used for LSIS PLC DLE AB Error detection method used for DF1Protocol of Allen Bradley DLE SIEMENS Error detection method used for Siemens 3964R communic...

Страница 1036: ...ing so the function and characteristic is same with Fix sized variable of RX frame b Fix sized variable in RX frame Frame part where size is fixed but contents changes are defined as Fix sized variable It can be set in the BODY In case of Fix sized variable the user can register up to 4 TRX frame standard for user defined communication of XGB Cnet I F module is as follows Group Frame Segment Refer...

Страница 1037: ...P settings 3 Set up transmission frame Frame is composed of HEAD indicating start TAIL indicating end and BODY which is data area How to write transmission frame is as follows Sequence Setting contents Setting method 1 Writing user frame definition 1 Select User frame definition 2 Click right button of mouse and click Add Group 2 Creating frame 1 Group name is name of frame for user to write 2 Sel...

Страница 1038: ...ODY repeat step 3 5 Name of frame edit window is activated when frame type is BODY 6 Available to creating many BODYs with different name 5 HEAD registration 1 Double click HEAD Then edit window is created 2 Double click edit window or click right button and select Add segment 3 Select Form 1 Numerical constant 1 Defines numerical constant among frame 2 Data value is always Hex Hexadecimal 2 Strin...

Страница 1039: ...ing constant are same as described above 2 Variable sized variable 1 used when frame length change 2 available to insert up to 4 for one body 3 Assign memory is checked automatically 4 Control by byte unit 3 Conversion Hex ToASCII converts the data red from PLC into ASCII and configures transmission frame ASCIITo Hex converts the data red from PLC into Hex and configures transmission frame 4 Swap ...

Страница 1040: ...ect Reception as frame type 3 Creating frame 1 Check creation of frame 2 Select frame name and click right button of mouse 3 Click Add Frame to create HEAD TAIL and BODY 4 Group Edit when changing frame name 5 Delete Group when deleting frame 4 Creating HEAD TAIL BODY 1 After clicking Add Frame select type of frame 2 type HEAD TAIL BODY 3 Select HEAD 4 To create TAIL BODY repeat step 3 5 Name of f...

Страница 1041: ...riable sized variable 1 used when frame length changes 2 Available to insert only one variable sized variable and it is impossible to add segment after variable sized variable 3 When checking Assign memory it is available to save in the PLC memory 4 Control by byte unit 3 Fix sized variable 1 Used when frame size is fixed 2 available to insert up to 4 for one body 3 When checking Assign memory it ...

Страница 1042: ...en according to partner s protocol 3 Conditional flag 1 DetermineswhenCentsendsframe 2 It is activated when P2P function is Send 3 In case of XBC type Ex F90 20ms flag M01 4 In case of XEC type Ex _T20MS 20ms flag MX01 4 Frame 1 In case of selecting SEND in the P2P function select body of transmission frame written in the user definition frame 1 In case of selecting RECEIVE in the P2P function sel...

Страница 1043: ...er to PLC CPU enable P2P service If parameter is downloaded but P2P EIP is not enabled the P2P block is not operated In order to enable P2P EIP Select Online Communication module setting Enable Link and click P2P EIP number which you want to operate and then click Wirte button The P2P EIP is enabled 8 Diagnosis service In order to check the setting parameter operates normally diagnosis service is ...

Страница 1044: ... settings P2P setting according to active active mode in the mode is as follows 2 P2P block setting If selecting P2P block in the P2P parameter setting window P2P block setting window shows Block setting window is same according to protocol and activated area is different P2P Each of items means as follow No Type Block form Contents 1 Channel Driver name changes according to driver set in the P2P ...

Страница 1045: ... 8 word 5 Destination station 1 Check Specify the destination station 6 Destination station number 1 Destination station number setting range is 0 63 7 Setting 1 When P2P function is Read 1 Read area device area of server 2 Save area client s device to save the data from server 2 When P2P function is Write 1 Read area device area of client 2 Save area Server s device area to save client s data ...

Страница 1046: ...er to PLC CPU enable P2P service If parameter is downloaded but P2P EIP is not enabled the P2P block is not operated In order to enable P2P EIP Select Online Communication module setting Enable Link and click P2P EIP number which you want to operate and then click Wirte button The P2P EIP is enabled 5 Diagnosis service In order to check the setting parameter operates normally diagnosis service is ...

Страница 1047: ...ication in channel 2 or XGB s main unit with XGL C41A module connected XGL C41A module supports RS 422 485 protocol RS 232C communication cable for XGB s main unit is different from RS 232C cable for XG5000 XG PD in pin arrangement and from the cable for Cnet I F module too The cable can t be used without any treatment For the detailed wiring method refer to configuration of respective communicati...

Страница 1048: ...5 H34 H12 and H89AB 3 Available frame length is maximum 256 bytes 4 Used control codes are as follows 5 If the command is small letter r BCC value is added in check frame The other side capital letter R BCC value is not added in check frame 2 Command frame sequence a Sequence of command request frame ENQ Station No Comman d Formatteddata EOT BCC ACK Station No Command Formatteddata ETX BCC NAK Sta...

Страница 1049: ...d with block unit Bitcontinuousreadisnotallowed Writing device Individual w W H77 H57 SS 5353 WritedataofBit Byte Word Dword Lwordatdirectvariable Continuous w W H77 H57 SB 5342 WritedataofByte Word Dword Lwordatdirectvariablewith blockunit Bitcontinuousreadisnotallowed Item Command Treatment Maincommand RegisterNo Code ASCIIcode Monitoring variableregister x X H78 H58 H00 H0F Registerdevicetomoni...

Страница 1050: ...R16383 16384 Read Write Monitor available b Available types of device XEC type Device Range Size Word Remark I IW0 0 0 IW15 15 3 1024 Read Write Monitor available Q QW0 0 0 QW15 15 3 1024 Read Write Monitor available M MW0 MW16383 16384 Read Write Monitor available W WW0 WW32767 32768 Read Monitor available R RW0 RW16383 16384 Read Write Monitor available When device is designated attach 25H in fr...

Страница 1051: ... 0007 Data type error Other data type than X B W D L received 01rSS0105 MK10 0011 Data error Data length area information incorrect 01rSB05 MW10 4 In case is unavailable to start with 01rSS0105 MW10 Variable s area value wrong 01rSS0105 MW Other value is written for Bit Write than 00 or 01 01wSS0105 MX1011 0090 Monitor execution error Unregistered monitor execution requested 0190 Monitor execution...

Страница 1052: ...lue is A4 ASCII value H4134 Number of Blocks This specifies how much of the blocks composed of device length device name are in this request format This can be set up to 16 Therefore the value of Number of blocks must be set between H01 ASCII value 3031 H10 ASCII value 3030 Device length Length of device name This indicates the number of name s characters that means device which is allowable up to...

Страница 1053: ...vice name of computer request Format Number of data in accordance with its data type is as follows Datatype Availablevariable Numberofdata Bit X P M L K F T C D R I Q W X 1 Byte B P M L K F T C D R I Q W B 1 Word W P M L K F T C D R I Q W W 2 R area is supported at XBC DXXXU Data In data area there are the values of hex data converted to ASCII code saved Example 1 The fact that number of data is H...

Страница 1054: ...d is lowercase r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 Byte each to ASCII values fromNAKtoETXisconvertedintoASCIIandaddedtoBCC Error code Hex and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes indicate error type Refer to 10 1 4 XGT dedicated communication error codesandcountermeasures Example This example supposes when 1 WORD from M20 and 1 WORD from P001 address of station No 1 are read At this time...

Страница 1055: ...7303030 31 H04 For ACK response after execution of command PC XGB Format name Header StationNo Command Command type Numberof blocks Numberof data Data Numberofdata Data Tail Framecheck Ex offrame ACK H01 R r SS H02 H02 H1234 H02 H5678 ETX BCC ASCIIvalue H06 H303 1 H52 72 H5353 H3032 H3032 H31323334 H3032 H35363738 H03 For NAK response after execution of command PC XGB Formatname Header StationNo C...

Страница 1056: ... is 5 it means that 5 words should be read In the number of data you can use up to 60 words 120Byte Protocol of continuous reading of direct variable doesn t have number of blocks Bit device continuous readingisnotsupported Item Description BCC When command is lowercase r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 Byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and add...

Страница 1057: ...equest Format is 03 data number of PLC ACK response after execution of command is indicated by H06 2 03 06 bytes Byte and ASCII code value 3036 is entered in data area Example 2 In just above example when data contents of 3 words are 1234 5678 and 9ABC in order actual ASCII code converted values are 31323334 35363738 39414243 and the contents are entered in data area XGB response format NAK respon...

Страница 1058: ...value H05 H3041 H52 72 H5342 H3036 H254D3030 30 H3032 H04 For ACK response after execution of command PC XGB Formatname Header StationNo Command Commandtype Numberof block Numberof data Data Tail Frame check Frame Example ACK H0A R r SB H01 H04 12345678 ETX BCC ASCIIvalue H06 H3041 H52 72 H5342 H3031 H3034 H3132333435363738 03 For NAK response after execution of command PC XGB Formatname Header St...

Страница 1059: ...0 ASCII value 3030 Device Length Namelengthof device This indicates the number of name s characters that means device which is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from hex type and the range is from H01 ASCII value 3031 to H10 ASCII value 3130 device Address to be actually read is entered This must be ASCII value within 16 characters and in this name digits upper low...

Страница 1060: ... converted into ASCII and added to BCC and sent Error code Hex and 2 bytes ASCII code 4 bytes indicate error type For the details Refer to 10 1 4 XGT dedicated communication error codes and countermeasures Example This example supposes that HFF is written in M230 of station No 1 1 PC request format PC XGB Formatname Header Station No Command Command type Numberof blocks DeviceLength DeviceName Dat...

Страница 1061: ...n command is lowercase r only one lower byte of the value resulted by adding 1 Byte each to ASCII values from ENQ to EOT is converted into ASCII and added to BCC Device Length Namelengthof variable This indicates the number of name s characters that means device which is allowable up to 16 characters This value is one of ASCII converted from hex type and the range is from H01 ASCII value 3031 to H...

Страница 1062: ...s and countermeasures Example This example supposes that 2 byte H AA15 is written in D000 of station No 1 1 PC request format PC XGB Formatname Header Station No Command Command type Device Length Device Numberof data Data Tail Framecheck Frame Example ENQ H01 W w SB H06 DW000 H01 HAA15 EOT BCC ASCIIvalue H05 H3031 H57 77 H5342 H3036 H254457303030 H3031 H41413135 H04 2 For ACK response after execu...

Страница 1063: ... to 16 0 to 15 H00 H0F and if an already registered No is registered again the one currently being executed is registered Register Format This is used to before EOT in command of Formats of separate reading of variable continuous reading and named variable reading 1 Register Format of request Formats must select and use only one of the followings 1 Individual reading of device RSS Numberofblocks 2...

Страница 1064: ...ermeasures Example This example supposes that device M000 of station NO 1 is monitor registered 1 PC request format PC XGB Formatname Header Station No Command Registration No RegistrationFormat Tail Frame check R Numberof blocks Devicelength Devicename Frame Example ENQ H01 X x H01 RSS H01 H06 MW000 EOT BCC ASCIIvalue H05 H3031 H58 78 H3031 H5253 53 H3031 H3036 H2554573030 30 H04 2 For ACK respon...

Страница 1065: ...ng of device Formatname Header StationNo Command Registration No Numberof Blocks Numberofdata Data Tail Framecheck Frame Example ACK H10 Y y H09 H01 H02 H9183 ETX BCC ASCIIvalue H06 H3130 H59 79 H3039 H3031 H3032 H39313833 H03 2 In case that the register Format of register No is the continuous reading of device Formatname Header StationNo Command RegistrationNo Numberofdata Data Tail Framecheck Fr...

Страница 1066: ... H01 Y y H01 EOT BCC ASCIIvalue H05 H3031 H59 79 H3031 H04 2 For ACK response after execution of command PC XGB Formatname Header StationNo Command RegistrationNo Numberof Blocks Numberofdata Data Tail Framecheck Frame Example ACK H01 Y y H01 H01 H02 H2342 ETX BCC ASCIIvalue H06 H3031 H59 79 H3031 H3031 H3032 H32333432 H03 3 For NAK response after execution of command PC XGB Formatname Header Stat...

Страница 1067: ...Station number Command Structurized data area Frame check BCC Tail EOT b ACK response frame XGB External communication when receiving data normally Header ACK Station number Command Structurized data area Frame check BCC Tail EOT c NAK response frame XGB External communication when receiving data abnormally Header NAK Station number Command Error code ASCII 4 Byte Frame check BCC Tail EOT Note 1 T...

Страница 1068: ... Command Formatted data BCC EOT NAK Station No Command Formatted data BCC EOT 2 List of commands List of commands used in LS Bus communication is as shown below Items Command Treatment Command type Code ASCII code Continuous read R H52 Read inverter variable of Word Continuous write W H57 Write inverter variable of Word Inverter ACK response Inverter NAK response Classification ...

Страница 1069: ...pt ENQ and EOT is summed the lowest 1byte of the result value is BCC Device Length This specifies how many Words you will write As converted value to ASCII the range is from H01 ASCII value 3031 to H08 ASCII value 3038 Address of inverter Enter the address that you want to read ASCII value above 4 characters and non numeric is not allowed Data When you write data H A to inverter address 0100 area ...

Страница 1070: ... Error information is shown as hex 1byte 2bytes of ASCII code For more information please refer to the error code of the inverter user manual Example This describes if the user want to write H00FF to address number 1230 of station number 1 of inverter XGB request format XGB Inverter Format name Header Station No Command Device length Address of inverter Data Frame check Tail Frame Example ENQ H01 ...

Страница 1071: ...ple ENQ H10 R 0100 H5 BCC EOT ASCII value H05 H3130 H52 H30313030 H35 H04 Item Description BCC When ASCII value of each 1byte except ENQ and EOT is summed the lowest 1byte of the result value is BCC Device length This specifies how many Words you will write As converted value to ASCII the range is from H01 ASCII value 3031 to H08 ASCII value 3038 Address of inverter Enter the address that you want...

Страница 1072: ... BCC Error code Error information is shown as hex 1byte 2bytes of ASCII code For more information please refer to the error code of the inverter user manual Example This describes if the user want to read 1Word data from address number 1230 of station number 1 of inverter XGB request format XGB Inverter Format name Header Station No Command Address of inverter Device length Frame check Tail Frame ...

Страница 1073: ...re two communication modes of Modbus ASCII and RTU 1 Structure of Modbus protocol Modbus protocol s structure is as follows In case of normal communication process step is as follows In case of abnormal communication process step is as follows Characteristic ASCII mode RTU mode Coding method ASCII code 8 bit binary code No of data per one character Start bit 1 1 Data bit 7 8 Parity bit Even Odd No...

Страница 1074: ...Start Station no Function code Data Error check End Size byte 1 2 2 N 2 2 1 Characteristic of ASCII mode a In the ASCII mode start of frame is indicated with colon which is ASCII code and end of frame is indicated with CRLF b Each character allows maximum 1s interval c How to check the error uses LRC it takes 2 s complement except frame of start and end and converts it as ASCII conversion 2 Addres...

Страница 1075: ...b In case of receiving normal frame it responds as normal response c In case of receiving abnormal frame it responds by using error code 4 Error check area It determines if frame is normal or not by using CRC check of 2 byte 5 Modbus address regulation Address in the data starts from 0 and it is same with value that is minus 1 from modbus memory Modbus address is same with address 1 of data 3 Expr...

Страница 1076: ... Tail CRLF Size byte 1 1 1 2 2 Details of frame a Station no indicates the station no of slave to read bit of output area b Function code 01 indicating Read Coil Status c Address start address of data to read and it consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regulation d Data size size of data to read and it consists of 2 byte e Frame error check in case of ASCII mode...

Страница 1077: ...on no Function code Address Data size Error check Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Frame 01 01 00 13 00 13 CRC b Response frame In case receiving normal frame Classification Station no Function code No of byte Data Error check Frame 01 01 03 12 31 05 CRC c Response frame In case of receiving abnormal frame Classification Station no Function code Exceptional code Error check Frame 01 81 ...

Страница 1078: ... address of data to read It consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regulation d Data size size of data to read consists of 2 byte e Frame error check in case of ASCII mode it uses LRC and in case of STU mode it uses CRC for error check It consists of 2 byte f Tail it is applied in case of ASCII mode CRLF is added after LRC g No of byte no of byte of data respondin...

Страница 1079: ...ead word data of output area b Function code 03 indicating Read Holding Registers c Address indicating start address of data to read It consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regulation d Data size size of data to read consists of 2 byte e Frame error check in case of ASCII mode it uses LRC and in case of STU mode it uses CRC for error check It consists of 2 byte ...

Страница 1080: ...ponse frame In case of receiving abnormal frame Classification Station no Error code Exceptional code Tail CRLF Size byte 1 1 1 2 2 Details of frame a Station no indicates the station no of slave to read word of input area b Function code 04 indicating Read Input Registers c Address start address of data to read and it consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regula...

Страница 1081: ... n no Function code Address Data size Error check Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Frame 01 04 00 08 00 01 CRC b Response frame In case receiving normal frame Classificatio n Statio n no Function code No of byte Data Error check Frame 01 04 02 00 0A CRC c Response frame In case of receiving abnormal frame Classification Station no Function code Exceptional code Error check Frame 01 84 0...

Страница 1082: ...t consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regulation d Output in case of turning on address set in the Address FF00 Hex is indicated and in case of turning off addres set in the Address it is indicated 0000 Hex e Frame error check in case of ASCII mode it uses LRC and in case of STU mode it uses CRC It consists of 2 byte f Tail it is applies in case of ASCII mode C...

Страница 1083: ... 1 1 1 2 2 Details of frame a Station no indicates the station no of slave to write single word of output area b Function code 06 indicating Preset Single Register c Address start address of data to write and it consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regulation d Output data value to write in the address set in the Address e Frame error check in case of ASCII mode...

Страница 1084: ...ceiving abnormal frame Classification Station no Error code Exceptional code Tail CRLF Size byte 1 1 1 2 2 Details of frame a Station no indicates the station no of slave to write continuous bit of output area b Function code 06 indicating Force Multiple Coils c Address start address of data to read and it consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to Modbus address regulation d No of ...

Страница 1085: ...ica tion Station no Function code Address No of output Data size Output Error check Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Frame 01 0F 00 13 00 0A 02 CD 01 CRC b Response frame In case receiving normal frame Classifica tion Station no Function code Address No of output Error check Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Frame 01 04 00 13 00 0A CRC c Response frame In...

Страница 1086: ... station no of slave to write continuous word of output area b Function code 10 indicating Preset Multiple Registers c Address start address of data to read and it consists of 2 byte At this time start address conforms to modbus address regulation d No of output no of output to write and it consists of 2 byte Ex When writing 10 continuous data from address number 20 no of output is 000A Hex e Data...

Страница 1087: ...io n code Address No of output Data size Output Error check Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Frame 01 10 00 13 00 02 04 CD 01 00 0A CRC b Response frame In case receiving normal frame Classific ation Station no Function code Address No of output Error check Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Frame 01 10 00 13 00 02 CRC c Response frame In case of receiving abnormal frame Classi...

Страница 1088: ... monitor Status by service 2 8 1 Diagnosis Function of XG5000 How to diagnosis system and network status by XG5000 system diagnosis are described below Connect XG5000 to loader port of main unit and if you select Online Communication module setting System Diagnosis the following window is created Select Online Communication module setting System Dianosis and click the icon Click the right button o...

Страница 1089: ...ication module information is as follows Item Content Remark Module kind Information of module kind under diagnosis Base number Base information of communication module under diagnosis It is fixed as 0 at XGB PLC Slot number Slot no of communication module under diagnosis In case of built in communication it is fixed as 0 Station number Station no of relevant channel used at dedicated service P2P ...

Страница 1090: ... monitor window is as follows Item Content Remark Standard information Base No Information of base number under diagnosis Slot No Information of slot number under diagnosis Monitor selections Select Channel Select channel to monitor Frame monitor window Form Indicates whether it is TX or RX frame Result Indicates the protocol type 1 XGT server 2 XGT client 3 Modbus server 4 Modbus client 5 User de...

Страница 1091: ...Item Content Multiple reading Refresh Multiple reading Checks the dedicated service status every second Refresh Checks the dedicated service status information at started time Dedicated Service Standard information Base Number Information of base number under diagnosis Slot Number Information of slot number under diagnosis Link type Type of communication module under diagnosis Dedicated service in...

Страница 1092: ...mber Information of slot number under diagnosis Link type Type of communication module under diagnosis P2P service information P2P parameter existence Indicates whether P2P parameter exists or not Driver type Indicates the P2P driver by port XGT Modbus User definition frame Detailed information Block number Available range 0 63 Only block under operation is indicated Port number Indicates the chan...

Страница 1093: ...o ACK NAK 4 Error of max station number Available range 0 255 2 Error of RX frame tail There is no tail 5 Time out 3 BCC error of RX frame FFFE 1 Modbus address error 2 Commands except Read Write are used 9 Station number of RX frame is different with self station number Self station number 0 0A In case of not get response from CPU 0B RX frame size exceeds the modbus max frame size 0C RX frame is ...

Страница 1094: ... into RUN Non coincidence of communication standard parameter between client and server Connect XG PD and click File Open from PLC Check standard settings of module acting as client and server Enable Link setting error After executing P2P parameter enable right P2P link 3 Trouble shooting when response frame is missed in case of acting as client and using RS 485 Phenomenon Reason Trouble shooting ...

Страница 1095: ...ication with server and check if it works properly 2 Take interlock for servers not to sends frame simultaneously In case parity bit setting is not coincident Set the parity bit to be same each other In case stop bit setting is not coincident Set the stop bit to be same each other In case communication speed setting is not coincident Set the communication speed to be same each other In case of mul...

Страница 1096: ... 1 1 communication with server and check if it works properly 2 Take interlock for servers to sends frame simultaneously Connection error of wiring communication line Change cable or check connection of cable In case of RS 485 Half duplex non coincidence of timing of TRX signal Increase delay time of client and server 1 When transmission is not complete it requests next process of transmission 2 W...

Страница 1097: ...edure Setting method 1 Connection setting 1 Select Online Connection Settings or click icon 2 Click Connect after setting 2 Read I O information Select Online Read I O Information or click icon Reads the information about currently equipped module 3 Standard Settings 1 Double click Cnet I F module and execute standard setting window Set Type Speed Data bit Stop bit station no of connection menu 2 ...

Страница 1098: ...us ASCII server Modbus RTU server 5 Writing parameter 1 Select Online Write Parameter or click icon 2 Click OK 3 If you click OK button parameter is sent to PLC If you don t reset relevant module XGB Cnet I F module acts as changed parameter 6 Checking the operation 1 Select Online System Diagnosis or click icon 2 Click the right button on the relevant module and click Frame Monitor or Status By S...

Страница 1099: ...1 Select Use P2P settings as active mode 3 P2P settings 1 After selecting P2P setting window double clock P2P block address and input base and slot no of communication module 2 P2P 01 is fixed as built in Cnet and base and slot is fixed as 0 and you can t change that 4 P2P channel setting 1 Double click P2P driver and select protocol according to each channel 2 P2P driver supports user definition ...

Страница 1100: ...ording to protocol In case of user definition frame P2P block can be set when user definition frame is written 6 Writing parameter 1 Select Online Write Parameter or click icon 2 Click OK 3 If you press OK parameter is sent to PLC If you don t reset relevant module XGB Cnet I F module acts as changed parameter 7 Enabling the link 1 Select Online Enable Link or click icon 2 Click the P2P to enable ...

Страница 1101: ...ation 2 103 Built in Comm Sequence Procedure Setting method 8 Checking the operation 1 Select Online System Diagnosis or click icon 2 Click the right button on the relevant module and click Frame Monitor or Status By Service to check ...

Страница 1102: ...t in Cnet Figure 2 11 1 Example of dedicated service system configuration 1 Client setting Type Setting content Main unit XBM DN16S Communication module XBL C21A 1 slot Communication type RS 232C Communication speed 38 400 Data bit 8 Stop bit 1 Parity bit None Modem type Null modem Operation cycle 200ms Operation status Write Saves 1 word of M100 at client to M100 at server Read Saves 1 word of D1...

Страница 1103: ...ine Connection settings and click 2 After setting the connection option according to user click the connection 2 Reading IO information Select Online Read IO Information and click icon IO information of currently mounted is shown on the project window 3 Standard settings 1 Set standard settings at built in communication channel to be same with Table 10 2 2 s standard settings 2 Since active mode a...

Страница 1104: ...onnection option according to user click the connection 2 Reading IO information Select Online Read IO Information and click icon IO information of currently mounted is shown on the project window 3 Standard settings 1 Select XBL C21A and set standard setting at channel 2 to be same with setting described in Table 2 11 1 2 In case of acting as client station setting doesn t have the meaning so set...

Страница 1105: ...e operation select WRITE 3 Conditional flag to send frame every 200ms use flag F92 4 Command type Data type to write 1 word select single and 2 byte 5 No of variable since no of word is 1 select 1 6 Destination station number input 1 as station number of server 7 Setting after setting Read area and Save area click OK 1 Read area device address of data saved in the client 2 Save area device address...

Страница 1106: ...g method 7 Writing parameter 1 Select Online Write Parameter or click icon 2 Click OK 3 If writing parameter is complete After clicking OK changed parameter is applied automatically 8 Enabling the link 1 Select Online Enable Link or click icon 2 Click the P2P to enable and click Write ...

Страница 1107: ...less of protocol Sequence Procedure Setting method 1 System Diagnosis 1 Connect with cilent by XG PD and select Online System Diagnosis or click 2 Click the right button on the relevant module and click Frame Monitor or Status By Service 2 Frame monitor 1 Select channel 2 and click Start 2 Since dedicated service is ASCII communication select View by ASCII In case of Modbus RTU select View by HEX ...

Страница 1108: ... Operation cycle 200ms Operation status Write Write 1 word of M100 of client to M1 of server Write 4 words from D0 of client to M2 M5 of server Write 15 th bit of M2 to 2 nd bit of M20 of server Write 0 15 th bit of M2 to 0 15 th bit of M21 of server Read Read 1 word of M2 of server and save it at M160 of client Read 4 words from P0 of server and save it at M150 M153 Read 1 st bit of P2 of server ...

Страница 1109: ...e connection 2 Reading IO information Select Online Read IO Information and click icon IO information of currently mounted is shown on the project window 3 Standard settings 1 Write setting value as same with Table 2 11 2 at built in communication channel 1 2 Set active mode as Modbus RTU server 4 Modbus setting 1 Bit read area Address P00000 2 Bit write area Address M0000 3 Word read area Address...

Страница 1110: ...on 2 112 Built in Comm Sequence Procedure Setting method 5 Writing parameter 1 Select Online Write Parameter or click icon 2 Click OK 3 If writing parameter is complete after clicking OK button changed parameter is applied automatically ...

Страница 1111: ...tting the connection option according to user click the connection 2 Reading IO information Select Online Read IO Information and click icon IO information of currently mounted is shown on the project window 3 Standard settings 1 Select XBL C41A and write standard settings to be same with Table 2 11 1 at channel 2 Since station setting doesn t have meaning when acting as client set as temporary st...

Страница 1112: ...ction select WRITE 3 Conditional flag to send frame every 200ms use flag F92 4 Command type Data type to write 1 word select single and 2 byte 5 Destination station number select station number of server 6 Setting after setting Read area and Save area click OK 1 Read area device address saved in the client M100 2 Save area deice address of server to save 0x40001 M1 If all settings are completed co...

Страница 1113: ... of server is Hex value 8 Setting of writing operation 4 Write 0 15 th bit of M2 to 0 15 th bit of M21 of server 1 Ch P2P function conditional flag destination station no same with step 7 2 Command type select continuous 3 Setting after setting Read area and Save area click OK 1 Read area device address saved in the client M2 0 2 Save area deice address of server to save 0x00150 9 Setting of readi...

Страница 1114: ... P2 of server and save it at 1 st bit of M170 1 Ch Conditional flag Command type Data type Destination station no same with step 7 2 P2P function select READ 3 Setting after setting Read area and Save area click OK 1 Read area device address saved in server 0x00021 2 Save area device address of client to save M170 1 12 Setting of reading operation 4 Read 0 th 15 th bit of M10 of server and save it...

Страница 1115: ...g method 13 Writing parameter 1 Select Online Write Parameter or click icon 2 Click OK 3 If writing parameter is complete after click OK changed parameter is applied automatically 14 Enabling the link 1 Select Online Enable Link or click icon 2 Click the P2P to enable and click Write ...

Страница 1116: ...e as Table below Device name Main unit XBC DN32H Han Young temperature controller PX7 Note2 Communication module Built in RS 485 Operation mode Client Server Protocol User frame definition PC Link Communication type RS 485 RS 485 Communication speed 9 600 9 600 Data bit 8 8 Stop bit 1 1 Parity bit None None Station no 0 1 Delay time note1 100ms Operation Reads present value and setting value from ...

Страница 1117: ...STD It starts with first character STX 0x02 and ends with last character CR 0x0D LF 0x0A The following Table 2 11 3 and Table 2 11 4 indicates structure of standard protocol and Sum protocol Table 2 11 3 standard protocol structure Table 2 11 4 SUM protocol structure 2 Writing example frame In this example present value and setting value is saved in M device area of PLC Table 2 11 5 is frame reque...

Страница 1118: ...fter standard settings double click P2P 01 in the P2P window 2 As for built in communication base and slot is fixed as 0 Click OK 3 Double click P2P Channel and select User frame definition in Channel 2 2 1 Click user definition frame and click right button of mouse 2 Click Add Group and input group name DRS and select frame type as transmission 3 1 Click Add Frame and select type HEAD TAIL BODY a...

Страница 1119: ... which indicates CR and LF 6 1 Double click DRS test tap and edit segment like the following 2 Write frame requesting reading data of continuous 2 areas starting first of D register of station no 1 3 When double clicking editor screen and writing frame through segment edition size of one segment is less than 10 7 1 Result writing entire frame of data reading request frame ...

Страница 1120: ...elect HEAD TAIL BODY as type and input BODY name 2 BODY s name is RECE_DRS here 3 1 Method writing HEAD TAIL is same with step 4 5 of method writing frame that request reading data 4 1 To save present temperature value in MB200 and setting value in MB210 set the storage area of 1 st and 2 nd data as set in Table 10 4 1 2 Since data size of data 1 and 2 is 4 byte select Fix sized variable and input...

Страница 1121: ...nal flag is activated when P2P function is SEND 5 Since it reads data every 1 second use F93 as conditional flag 6 Click Setting of RX frame and set save area of current temperature and setting value 2 Execute Write Parameter and Enable Link 6 Checking TRX data Check whether written frame is transmitted received properly Sequence Setting method 1 1 Select Online System Diagnsis or click icon 2 Aft...

Страница 1122: ... 0090 Monitor execution error Unregistered monitor execution requested 0190 Monitor execution error Reg No range exceeded 0290 Monitor reg Error Reg No range exceeded 1132 Device memory error Other letter than applicable device is input 1232 Data size error Request exceeds the max range of 60 Words to read or write at a time 01wSB05 MW1040AA5512 1234 Extra frame error Unnecessary details exist as ...

Страница 1123: ...number of reception frame is not correct 05 ERR_WRONG_DRV_TYPE Driver type is not correct 07 ERR_FRAME_SND Can t send TX frame 09 ERR_NO_USE_LINKID There is no communication module 0A ERR_PLC_RESP_TIMEOUT Reception frame is not received during time out setting time 0B ERR_FRM_LENGTH Length of reception frame is not correct 0D ERR_ASCII_HEX_ERR ASC HEX conversion of reception frame is not correct 0...

Страница 1124: ...n access to the web server at the same time Through the web server you can monitor the diagnosis information such as the basic information error history mode switching history etc of the PLC The web server also provides the functions to monitor and control the PLC s flags or data Furthermore through a wide variety of functions a user can freely make the web page and control the PLC and download th...

Страница 1125: ...ation 2 Monitoring diagnosis information You can remotely monitor error history mode switching history system history power down history web access history E mail history communication service history of the PLC 3 Device monitoring You can monitor and modify the devices and system flags of the PLC respectively 4 Management of data log file You can remotely download the data logging file saved to t...

Страница 1126: ...er version XBC xxxxUx 1 1 or higher XEC xxxxUx 1 1 or higher 3 Web browser version Web browser version Available web server version Internet Explore 9 0 or higher Crome 38 0 2 or higher Firefox 30 0or higher Notice 1 You can download the parameters setting program from the website Web address http www lsis com 2 It can be programmed by the USB port of the basic unit For the type of available cable...

Страница 1127: ... characters BASIC INFO PLC s basic information Name Displaying the PLC s name IP address Displaying the PLC s IP address Scan time Displaying the PLC s scan time Web server s information Web page information Displaying the version and creation date of the web page Web page state Displaying the web page s state Server load Displaying the web server s load rate PLC s state information State informat...

Страница 1128: ... Downloading the data log file from the PLC 1 Displaying the data log files up to 256EA 2 Amaximum of 10 data log folders can be accessible USER PAGE User page view User page URL http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html xxx means the web server s IP address SETTING User account setting 1 Account can be registered up to 15EA 2 ID Less than 8 characters 3 password Less than 8 characters IP filtering ...

Страница 1129: ...group 5group 10group Not Used 1group 5group 10group Scan time increment ms 4 2 4 9 3 3 3 7 3 3 5 9 5 4 3 3 Web server load time s 2 79 3 12 3 52 7 24 7 49 7 53 7 63 10 72 15 19 2 Scan time 50ms 100ms Scan Time ms 50ms 100ms Datalog group numbers Not Used 1group 5group 10group Not Used 1group 5group 10group Scan time increment ms 3 9 2 2 3 2 3 1 3 7 3 0 4 1 2 9 Web server load time s 22 16 23 21 24...

Страница 1130: ...essing to the web server is shown in the below chart TCP IP Setting START Activates of web server function User ID Password Input Write Parameters SD Cara Partition Web page file transfer Access to the web server TCP IP Setting SD Memory card setting After setting the parameters of the embedded FEnet you can access to the web server In order to contact the web server after connecting the PLC to Et...

Страница 1131: ...ule selection Double click New PLC B0S1 Internal FEnet in the project window 2 1 2 3 1 IP address setting 1 Enter the IP address subnet mask gateway DNS server address 2 This address can be commonly used for P2P service high speed link service remote service FTP service web server etc 2 Host table setting IP for emergency access Note1 3 Activating web server function 1 Check Activates the function...

Страница 1132: ... to the web server in the PC regardless of IP filtering Note 2 The default user ID and password is respectively LSIS and 0000 If you want to see the password check Show Password you can check the set password Procedures Details 3 Writing parameters 1 Click Online Write to write parameters to the PLC 2 During executing Write if you check Set up with Link Enable Link Enable can be applied with writi...

Страница 1133: ...nning XG5000 access to the PLC 2 After accessing to the PLC click Online Reset Clear SD memory Format 3 If you click Format button the warning window will be created If you click Yes the window for SD card format will be created 2 Completion of format 1 Click the Web server area button in the window for SD card format If the Web server area is activated it indicates the SD card partition is done I...

Страница 1134: ...w for transferring the web page file will be created and file transfer will start 2 Completion of format 1 When file transfer is done the window indicating the web page file transfer is completed will be created If you click the OK button web page transfer will be completed Notice 1 To transfer the web page to the SD card you need the XG5000 that supports web page transfer 2 XG5000 version support...

Страница 1135: ... server 1 Connect the PLC to the Ethernet network You can also connect the PLC to the PC directly 2 After running a web browser enter the IP set in XG5000 in a search window 3 If you click Move button after entering the IP the web server s main page will be loaded as shown below Fig 3 3 3 1 web server login page ...

Страница 1136: ...you click the button the warning message will pop up as shown below 3 If you click the Yes button all programs parameters passwords data of the PLC including web server data will be deleted Notice 1 As described above DeleteAll PLCs deletes not only the web server data but also PLC s data so try not to use this function 2 If you click Delete All PLCs the PLC s parameters and programs etc will be a...

Страница 1137: ...ing how to establish the communication setting items Korean English Converting the web page s language Korean English LSIS HOME PAGE Moving to LSIS s website MANUAL DOWNLOAD Moving to the manual download page COMM SETTING Improving communication speed by changing the TcpAckFrequency registry Login Login Login to the web server Logout Logout of the web server BASIC INFO PLC Basic Information Name D...

Страница 1138: ...l E mail transfer histories COM SERV LOG Communication service history Monitoring the embedded communication module s P2P communication service history DEVICE MONITOR DEVICE Device monitoring Monitoring the PLC s device values FLAG System flag monitoring Monitoring the PLC s system flag values DATALOG Data log Data log file download Downloading the data log file saved to the SD card USER PAGE User...

Страница 1139: ...low Legend Available X Not available Used restrictively Unrelated Large category Middle category Function Administrator User Guest MAIN MAIN Communication setting guide Language Conversion LSIS website link Manual download Communication setting Login Login Logout BASIC INFO PLC Basic Information Name IP address Scan time WEBSERVER Information Web page information Web page state Server load PLC Sta...

Страница 1140: ...SER PAGE User page User page X SETTING User account setting User account setting X X IP filtering setting IP filtering setting X X Time setting Time synchronization setting X X User page User page setting X X Notice 1 The guest can monitor the devices registered in the integrated monitoring However there is not right to add edit change values delete 2 Time setting is available only when SNTP setti...

Страница 1141: ...delines to improve communication speed Fig 3 4 2 1 Main page The main page provides the following functions No Name Description 1 MAIN Moving to the main page 2 Korean English Converting the language into Korean or English Korean Click this button to convert the English website into Korean English Click this button to convert the Korean website into English 3 LSIS HOME PAGE Moving to LSIS s home p...

Страница 1142: ...e checkbox in the bottom left of the screen and click the OK button Then the message window will not be created again Fig 3 4 2 2 Pop up window to guide communicaiton setup Notice 1 If you change the relevant PC s registry through communication setup functions communication response speed increases and it will lead to improvement of the web server s communication speed 2 If you select the checkbox...

Страница 1143: ...ecrease That is why the web server provides the program to change communication settings to solve such a problem After downloading the program as shown below it is recommended that you set up the program so that ACK is sent every time the Windows TCP IP receives one packet Procedure Description 1 File download 1 Click COMM SETTING in the MAIN page 2 If the web page s message pops up click the OK b...

Страница 1144: ...otice 1 If you click the Set or Reset button of the program it will be disconnected from Ethernet to reread registry settings and be connected again 2 If you want to restore the registry settings to the original state click the Reset button ...

Страница 1145: ...ring the account to login to the web server Password Entering the password to login to the web server 3 Login Login button Notice 1 When logging into the web server for the first time enter the ID and password set in XG5000 administrator authorization 2 If you want to register accounts refer to Chap 3 4 8 Settings 3 When registering accounts the available range may be different depending on author...

Страница 1146: ...scription 1 BASIC INFO Moving to PLC Module Basic Information page 2 PLC Basic Information Displaying the PLC s name IP address scan time server load information 3 WEB SERVER Information Showing the web server s information 4 PLC State Information Displaying the PLC s operation mode and operating conditions 5 PLC Detail Information Displaying PLC s CPU and the expanded module s information Notice ...

Страница 1147: ... In case the web page type is different from the server type Namely you need to match the web page type with the server type 3 Server Load Displaying the web server s load When a user accesses to the server a load of about 24 is used 3 PLC State Information It is the function to monitor the PLC s operation mode and operating conditions Namely it provides the information on operation mode and opera...

Страница 1148: ... mode such as WARNNING ERROR you can check the detailed history Operation mode Description Remarks OK PLC works normally WARNNING Operating conditions Detailed message on Error Warning Minor failure such as wrong setting of P2P HS etc occurs ERROR Operating conditions Detailed message on Error Warning Major failure such as module detachment occurs 4 PLC Detail Information Through the PLC s detaile...

Страница 1149: ... the relevant page Refer to Table 3 4 4 2 2 Log Type Error Log It displays the name of the Log type chosen in the web page of diagnosis information Refresh In case of new log if you click Refresh the log information will be updated 3 History History No It means the log information No provided by the PLC The lower the number is the more recently the history occurs Providing a maximum of 100 log inf...

Страница 1150: ...eration mode conversion Up to 100 EA System Log Providing the PLC s access log information Up to 100 EA Shut down Log Providing the PLC s power shut down information Up to 100 EA Web access Log Providing the web server module s access information Up to 100 EA E mail Log Providing the information on E mail service history Up to 25 EA Communication service history COM SERV LOG Providing the informat...

Страница 1151: ...des the history information up to 100EA 2 History details Index It means error occurrence procedure The lower the number is the more recently the error log occurs Code It means the error code Date It means the date when the error occurs Time It means the time when the error occurs Contents It means the error details 3 Details and Measures If you click Error History you can see the details and meas...

Страница 1152: ...mode conversion occurs Code It means the date when mode conversion occurs Date It means the time when mode conversion occurs Time It means the details of mode conversion 3 Remove all Mode Log History The button is created when you access to the server with the administrator authorization If you click this button and OK button all mode log histories will be deleted Notice Note1 If the data exceeds ...

Страница 1153: ...ovides the history information up to 100EA 2 History details Index It means the system history The lower the number is the more recently system change history occurs Data It means the date when system change occurs Time It means the time when system change occurs Contents It means the details of system change 3 Remove all System Log History The button is created when you access to the server with ...

Страница 1154: ...formation up to 100EA 2 History details Index It means the power down history The lower the number is the more recently power down history occurs Date It means the date when power down occurs Time It means the time power down change occurs Contents It indicates the location where power down occurs 3 Remove all System Shut Down History The button is created when you access to the server with the ad...

Страница 1155: ...ns the web access history The lower the number is the more recently web access history occurs Date It means the date when web server access occurs Login Time It means the login time accessing to the web server Access IP It means the IP address of the user s computer accessing to the web server module User Log It means the account information of the user accessing to the web server module 3 Remove ...

Страница 1156: ...ervice The lower the number is the more recently the E mail is sent Date It means the date when E mail transfer is completed E mail address It means the E mail address recipient s mail address sent from the PLC Title Success It indicates the transferred E mail title Fail Fail Check Network SMTP Relay program is not connected to internet network or connection is not possible on a commercial E mail ...

Страница 1157: ...nding e mail service based on Event information RUN Stop Stop Run etc when selecting Write in XG5000 for communication parameter setting PLC goes to stop to activate it which falls under Event information In this special case service history would be missing ...

Страница 1158: ...on on the whole service count of FEnet s P2P channel among embedded communications 2 Error RS 232 Information on the whole error count of RS 232C channel among embedded communications RS 485 Information on the whole error count of RS 485 channel among embedded communications FEnet Information on the whole error count of FEnet s P2P channel among embedded communications Notice 1 When you connect to...

Страница 1159: ...Write Enable U U00 00 U00 00 0 U0B 31 U0B 31 F Read Write Enable S S000 00 S127 99 Read Write Enable Z Z000 Z127 Read Write Enable L L0000 L00000 L4095 L4095F Read Write Enable N N00000 N10239 Read Enable D D00000 D00000 0 D19999 D19999 F Read Write Enable R R00000 R00000 0 R16383 R16383 F Read Write Enable ZR ZR00000 ZR32767 Read Write Enable 2 XEC series PLC IEC type Area Type Start End Remarks ...

Страница 1160: ... Byte UB0 0 0 UB0 11 63 Read Write Enable Word UW0 0 0 UW0 11 31 Read Write Enable Dword UD0 0 0 UD0 11 15 Read Write Enable Lword UL0 0 0 UL0 11 7 Read Write Enable R Bit RX0 RX262143 Read Write Enable Byte RB0 RB32767 Read Write Enable Word RW0 RW16383 Read Write Enable Dword RD0 RD8191 Read Write Enable Lword RL0 RL4095 Read Write Enable A Bit AX0 AX524287 Read Enable Byte AB0 AB65535 Read Enab...

Страница 1161: ...er 64 Unsigned decimal number 0 18446744073709551615 8 REAL Real Numbers 32 Signed decimal number 3 402823466e 038 1 175494351e 038 or 0 or 1 175494351e 038 3 402823466e 038 0 0 000000000e 000 9 LREAL Long Real Numbers 64 Signed decimal number 1 7976931348623157e 308 2 2250738585072014e 308 or 0 or 2 2250738585072014e 308 1 7976931348623157e 308 0 0 0000000000000000e 000 10 TIME Duration 32 Clock ...

Страница 1162: ... of Length 8 8 Hexadecimal number h00 hFF 16 00 16 FF 17 WORD Bit String of Length 16 16 Hexadecimal number h0000 hFFFF 16 0000 16 FFFF 18 DWORD Bit String of Length 32 32 Hexadecimal number h00000000 hFFFFFFFF 16 00000000 16 FFFFFFFF 19 LWORD Bit String of Length 64 64 Hexadecimal number h0000000000000000 hFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 16 0000000000000000 16 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ...

Страница 1163: ...ntegrated monitoring Page where you can register devices commonly for all login accounts and monitor them If the device value is registered in advance it can be monitored without separate login 2 Edition of device Add To add devices Edit To edit devices Modify value To change device values Delete To delete devices 3 Update cycle setting Selecting the update cycle of device monitoring cycle N A 10 ...

Страница 1164: ...rs monitor the device commonly select Integrated Monitoring 3 Add Device Click Add in the window for added devices If the device input window is created select and input the proper type and display format for the targeted device Each meaning is as shown below For more details refer to Chap 3 4 5 2 Device Monitor Type Selecting the device type Display format Selecting the device s disply format Dev...

Страница 1165: ...it button you can see the device value will be changed into the set one in the monitoring window If you clcik the Cancel button the device edition window will be canceled 3 Change of device values It is the function to change the value of the registered device as shown below Procedures Description 1 Select the device to change 2 Change device value Click Modify Value in the device edition window I...

Страница 1166: ...tion 1 Select the device to delete 2 Delete Device Click Delete in the device edition window The webpage message asking whether deleting the selected device from the monitoring page is created If you click the OK button the relevant device will be deleted If you the Cancel button the webpage meassage will disappear and the device will not be deleted ...

Страница 1167: ...y login account and monitor them Amaximum of 10 devices can be registered and edited Integrated monitoring Page where you can register flags commonly for all login accounts and monitor them If the device value is registered in advance it can be monitored without separate login 2 Edition of flag Add To add devices Edit To edit devices Delete To change device values 3 Update cycle setting Selecting ...

Страница 1168: ...ystem No of the list If you click the Add button you can see the selected flag value will be registered in the monitoring window If you click the Cancel button flag addition window will be canceled 2 Edition of system flags If the system flag type is WORD or DWORD through this function you can convert the view format into hexadecimal number or signed decimal number unsigned decimal number as shown...

Страница 1169: ...ect the falt to delete 2 Delete flag Click Delete in the flag edition window The webpage message asking whether deleting the selected flag from the monitoring page is created If you click the OK button the relevant device will be deleted If you the Cancel button the webpage meassage will disappear and the device will not be deleted Notice 1 For the information on flags refer toAppendix 1 Flag List...

Страница 1170: ...een configuration and meaning of data log file page are as shown below No Screen configuration Description Remarks 1 Directory It is the checkbox to select the data log directory saved in the SD card 2 File list Displaying the information on the data log 3 File download Downloading the data log file from the PLC Available only for individual download 4 Refresh If you click the Refresh button the w...

Страница 1171: ...ted by the data log function as shown below Procedures Description 1 Select the data log file to download 2 Click the Download button 2 File download Click the Download button Select Save or Save as to download the file If you click the Open button the file will not be saved automatically ...

Страница 1172: ...etails of the user page are as shown below You can access to the user page by clicking the user page button or by inputting the user page s URL directly No Screen configuration Description Remarks 1 User page Moving to the user page 2 User page screen User page under the state that the webpage made by a user is not registered The user page can be registered only when you login with the administrat...

Страница 1173: ...in the URL input area of the web page xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP address 2 Then the screen will be moved to the user page Notice 1 For making the user web page refer to Appendix 4 How to make the user page 2 To send the user web page to the web server refer to 3 4 8 Settings 3 For setting the web server s IP address refer to 3 3 1 TCP IP Setting 4 When making the user page the initi...

Страница 1174: ...ogin with the administrator account The screen configuration and details are as shown below Screen configuration Description Remarks USERACCOUNT Function to add edit or delete accounts to login to the web server IP FILTERING Setting blocking and permission of specific IPs for security of the web server TIME Function to set the PLC s time by accessing to the web server USER PAGE Function to transfe...

Страница 1175: ...tting screen No Registration order of user accounts Up to 15EA User ID ID of the account assigned by the administrator Authorization Authorization of each account Administrator User 2 Account edition Add To add the user account Within the range of English Combination of English Numbers 1 8 characters Edit To edit the user account Delete To delete the user account 3 Refresh If you click the Refresh...

Страница 1176: ...ll be displayed in the user account setting screen If you click the Cancel button the window for adding user accounts will be canceled and the account will not be added 3 Adding accounts is done If you click the Add button in the above 2 the window indicating registeration is done will pop up If you click the OK button you can see the account is added to the user account setting screen Notice 1 Th...

Страница 1177: ...e user account setting page Select the account to edit 2 Password input Click Edit in the account edition window After entering the password of the account to edit click the OK button If you access to the web server account set in the TCP IP setting window of the embedded FEnet you do not need to check the password separately 3 Edit account After changing the ID password access authorization if yo...

Страница 1178: ... If you access to the web server account set in the TCP IP setting window of the embedded FEnet you do not need to check the password separately If the authorization of the account to delete is general one you do not need to check the password separately 3 Delete accounts If you click the OK button the targeted account will be deleted Notice 1 If you edit or delete the administrator account the me...

Страница 1179: ...istration order of IP filtering setting Start address Start address of IP where filtering is set up End address End address of IP where filtering is set up 2 IP filtering menu IP blocked Activating the function to block off the input IP Up to 15EA IP allowed Activating the function to allow the input IP only Up to 15EA Not use The IP filtering function is not in use 3 IP edition menu Add To add th...

Страница 1180: ... blocked IP IP edition menu IP address input Click Add in the IP edition menu When the input window for IP address is created input the start and end IP of the IP address to block off If there is just one IP address to block off enter the same start IP and end IP If you click the Add button the range of the input IP wil be displayed in the IP filtering setting screen If you click the Cancel button...

Страница 1181: ...OK button IP permission will be activated 2 Add allowed IP IP edition menu IP address input Click Add in the IP edition menu If the input window for IP address is created enter the start and end IP of the IP address to block off If there is just one IP address to allow enter the same start IP and end IP If you click the Add button the input IP range will be displayed in the IP filtering setting sc...

Страница 1182: ...net s basic setting 2 After accessing to the web server with the administrator account in the PC that is relevant to the IP input in the host table setting window as described above if you modify the wrong IP address in the IP filtering function you can access to the web server normally 3 When setting the IP in the host table to access to the web server you can access to the web server from the PC...

Страница 1183: ...ing IP blocking Activation of IP blocking Select IP blocking in the IP filtering menu Then the window confirming whether changing into IP blocking will pop up If you click the OK button IP blocking will be activated 2 Edit IP IP edition menu IP address input Click the IP address list to edit Click Edit in the IP edition menu Change the IP address If you click the Edit button the changed IP range w...

Страница 1184: ...nu Message confirming deletion Click the IP address list to delete Click Delete in the IP edition menu Then the window asking whether deleting the IP will pop up If you click the OK button the selected IP will be deleted If you click the Cancel button the selected IP will not be deleted ...

Страница 1185: ...g method is as shown below Procedures Description 1 Click Setup IP filtering setting in the webpage to move to the IP filtering setting page 2 Disable Window confirming IP filtering Disable Activation of IP filtering Disable Select Not Use in the IP filtering menu Then the window confirming whether changing into Not Use will pop up If you click the OK button Not Use will be activated ...

Страница 1186: ...cannot use the manual time setting If you want to use the time setting function cancel the SNTP in XG5000 first No Screen configuration Description Remarks 1 Time Moving to the time setting page 2 Time setting SNTP Sync setting Displaying the method of synchronization setup manual or auto Automatic synchronization can be set up in the embedded FEnet s basic parameters Time setting The area for tim...

Страница 1187: ...NTP time synchronization function should be checked in time synchronization setting The screen configuration and details on the automatic synchronization function are as shown below No Screen configuration Description Remarks 1 Sync setting Indicates automatic synchronization is set up 2 NTP server IPAddress IP address of the set NTP server 3 Port Number Set port number 4 Sync cycle Automatic sync...

Страница 1188: ...ls are as shown below No Screen configuration Description Remarks 1 Sync setting It indicates synchronization is set up manually 2 Time setting Setting the time 3 Details of time setting Date and time Setting the date and time Setting in date hours minutes seconds Synchronization with local time Synchronizing the time with the local PC s data and time Done Closing the time setting box 4 Confirm Ca...

Страница 1189: ...er or manage files of the web server The screen configuration and details are as shown below No Screen configuration Description Remarks 1 USER PAGE Moving to the user page 2 Register the User page Registering the user page 3 User page file list Displaying the user page file list You can download and delete the list here ...

Страница 1190: ...k User page file Upload After selecting the file to add click Open When the file transfer is completed the list of uploaded files will be displayed in User page file list Notice 1 The main page name of the user page should be home html 2 The user page does not support the folder structure 3 The length of the file name when the file upload please within 32 characters 4 In the mobile environment the...

Страница 1191: ...list 3 file download Click User page file list Download After selecting the location where the file is saved click the Save button Notice 1 Download methods of the user page may be different depending on the web browser Internet Explorer Chrome Firefox 2 Internet Explorer saves the html file as htm If you download the html file in Internet Explorer after download is done change the file name into ...

Страница 1192: ...w procedures Procedures Description 1 Click SETTING USER PAGE in the web page to move to the User page manage 2 Select the file to delete from the user page file list 3 Delete File Click User page file list Delete If you click the OK button after the dialog box asking whether delete or not is created the relevant file will be deleted from the user page file list ...

Страница 1193: ...own below so that ACK is sent every time the Windows TCP IP receives one packet The method to change registers can be divided into automatic change through the communication setting file provided by the web server and direct change 3 5 1 How to set up registers using the web server communication settings You can change registers using the communication setting function as shown below Procedure Des...

Страница 1194: ...below path HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services Tcpip Parameters Interfaces 4 Depending on the devices installed in the PC You can see the folders are created as shown below 5 If there are several register folders select one by one and find the folder where the current PC s IP address is set in the right register value 6 Click with the right mouse button on the right screen of the ...

Страница 1195: ...eb Server 3 72 Built in Comm 7 Enter the value name as shown below Value name TcpAckFrequency It should be case sensitive 8 Double click the created register and enter 1 to the value data 9 Reboot the computer ...

Страница 1196: ... If the above message window appears repetitively in some web browsers Chrome Firefox the checkbox that can make the additional message invisible any more will be created in the window At this time if you click the checkbox and click the same function later the confirmation message will not pop up any more so you may not use the function Accordingly although the checkbox is created do not click it...

Страница 1197: ...nput state FX17 _FORCE_OUT Forced output Forced output state FX20 _MON_On Monitor Monitor on execution FX21 _USTOP_On Stop Stop by Stop function FX22 _ESTOP_On EStop Stop by EStop function FX24 _INIT_RUN Initialize Initialization task on execution FX28 _PB1 Program Code 1 Program Code 1 selected FX29 _PB2 Program Code 2 Program Code 2 selected FW2 3 FD1 _CNF_ER System error Reports heavy error sta...

Страница 1198: ... 20 s Clock 20s cycle Clock FX151 _T60S 60 s Clock 60s cycle Clock FX153 _On Ordinary time On Always On state Bit FX154 _Off Ordinary time Off Always Off state Bit FX155 _1On 1scan On First scan On Bit FX156 _1Off 1scan Off First scan OFF bit FX157 _STOG Reversal Reversal every scan FW11 _LOGIC_RESULT Logic result Indicates logic results FX176 _ER operation error On during 1 scan in case of operat...

Страница 1199: ... of system history FD74 _LOG_ROTATE Log Rotate Saves log rotate information FW150 _BASE_INFO0 Slot information 0 Main base slot information FW158 _RBANK_NUM Current using block number Current using R area FW159 _RBLOCK_STATE Flash block state Flash memory operation state FD80 _RBLOCK_RD_FLAG Flash read state ON when reading N area in flash FD81 _RBLOCK_WR_FLAG Flash write state ON when writing N a...

Страница 1200: ...he station set in the parameter or 3 The communication state of data block set in the parameter is not good LINK TROUBLE shall be On if the above 1 2 3 conditions occur and if the condition return to the normal state it shall be OFF again LX32 LX95 _HS1_STATE k bit Array Indicates total status of High Speed Link no 1 th block Indicates total status of communication information about each data bloc...

Страница 1201: ...8 LX1279 4 LX1344 LX1679 5 LX1744 LX2079 k that is the block number indicates the information of 64 blocks in the range of 00 63 through 4 words 16 per 1 word For example the mode information _HS1MOD indicates the information of the block 0 15 in L0006 the information of block 16 31 32 47 48 63 in L0007 L0008 L0009 Accordingly the mode information of block No 55 is indicated in L000097 ...

Страница 1202: ..._NDR01 Bit P2P parameter 1 1 Block service normal end LX8289 _P2P1_ERR01 Bit P2P parameter 1 1 Block service abnormal end LW519 _P2P1_STATUS01 Word Indicates error code in case of P2P parameter 1 1 Block service abnormal end LD260 _P2P1_SVCCNT01 DWord Indicates P2P parameter 1 1 Block service normal count LD261 _P2P1_ERRCNT01 DWord Indicates P2P parameter 1 1 Block service abnormal count In terms ...

Страница 1203: ..._P1B00WS1 Word Saves area size 1 to save P2P parameter 1 00 block N0026 0029 _P1B00WD2 Device Structure Saves area device 2 to save P2P parameter 1 00 block N0030 _P1B00WS2 Word Saves area size 2 to save P2P parameter 1 00 block N0031 0034 _P1B00WD3 Device Structure Saves area device 3 to save P2P parameter 1 00 block N0035 _P1B00WS3 Word Saves area size 3 to save P2P parameter 1 00block N0036 003...

Страница 1204: ...a size 3 to save P2P parameter 1 01 block N0077 0080 _P1B01WD4 Device Structure Saves area device 4 to save P2P parameter 1 01 block N0081 _P1B01WS4 Word Saves area size 4 to save P2P parameter 1 01 block Atotal of 32 blocks from No 0 to No 31 exist per P2P of No 1 to No 6 The saving parameters of each block have the same size and display function as the above table P2P Number L Address Note 1 N00...

Страница 1205: ...2A 042 6A 106 j 0B 011 VT 4B 075 K 2B 043 6B 107 k 0C 012 FF 4C 076 L 2C 044 6C 108 l 0D 013 CR 4D 077 M 2D 045 6D 109 m 0E 014 SO 4E 078 N 2E 046 6E 110 n 0F 015 SI 4F 079 O 2F 047 6F 111 o 10 016 DLE 50 080 P 30 048 0 70 112 p 11 017 DC1 51 081 Q 31 049 1 71 113 q 12 018 DC2 52 082 R 32 050 2 72 114 r 13 019 DC3 53 083 S 33 051 3 73 115 s 14 020 DC4 54 084 T 34 052 4 74 116 t 15 021 NAK 55 085 U...

Страница 1206: ...Appendix 2 Dimension App2 1 Appendix 2 Dimension Unit mm 1 CPU Type XEC DN32U 2 Positioning Type XEC DN32UP ...

Страница 1207: ...Appendix 2 Dimension App2 2 2 Analog Type XEC DN32UA ...

Страница 1208: ...Appendix 2 Dimension App2 3 3 Extension I O module XBE DC32A XBE TR32A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 19 20 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 A B XBE RY16A ...

Страница 1209: ...Appendix 2 Dimension App2 4 XBE DC08A XBE DC16A XBE TN08A XBE TN16A XBE DR16A XBE RY08A ...

Страница 1210: ...Appendix 2 Dimension App2 5 4 Extension Cnet I F Module XBL C41A XBL C21A ...

Страница 1211: ...E_BCD_TO_USINT BYTE BCD USINT WORD_BCD_TO_UINT WORD BCD UINT DWORD_BCD_TO_UDINT DWORD BCD UDINT LWORD_BCD_TO_ULINT LWORD BCD ULINT BCD_TO_ASC BCD_TO_ASC BYTE BCD WORD BYTE_TO_ASC BYTE_TO_ASC BYTE ASC BYTE TRUNC TRUNC_REAL REAL DINT TRUNC_LREAL LREAL LINT REAL_TO_ REAL_TO_SINT REAL SINT REAL_TO_INT REAL INT REAL_TO_DINT REAL DINT REAL_TO_LINT REAL LINT REAL_TO_USINT REAL USINT REAL_TO_UINT REAL UIN...

Страница 1212: ...TRING INT STRING DINT_TO_ DINT_TO_SINT DINT SINT DINT_TO_INT DINT INT DINT_TO_LINT DINT LINT DINT_TO_USINT DINT USINT DINT_TO_UINT DINT UINT DINT_TO_UDINT DINT UDINT DINT_TO_ULINT DINT ULINT DINT_TO_BOOL DINT BOOL DINT_TO_BYTE DINT BYTE DINT_TO_WORD DINT WORD DINT_TO_ DINT_TO_DWORD DINT DWORD DINT_TO_LWORD DINT LWORD DINT_TO_REAL DINT REAL DINT_TO_LREAL DINT LREAL DINT_TO_STRING DINT STRING LINT_T...

Страница 1213: ...UINT_TO_STRING UINT STRING UINT_TO_LREAL UINT LREAL UINT_TO_DATE UINT DATE UDINT_TO_ UDINT_TO_SINT UDINT SINT UDINT_TO_INT UDINT INT UDINT_TO_DINT UDINT DINT UDINT_TO_LINT UDINT LINT UDINT_TO_USINT UDINT USINT UDINT_TO_UINT UDINT UINT UDINT_TO_ULINT UDINT ULINT UDINT_TO_BOOL UDINT BOOL UDINT_TO_BYTE UDINT BYTE UDINT_TO_WORD UDINT WORD UDINT_TO_DWORD UDINT DWORD UDINT_TO_LWORD UDINT LWORD UDINT_TO_...

Страница 1214: ...E_TO_LWORD BYTE LWORD BYTE_TO_STRING BYTE STRING WORD_TO_ WORD_TO_SINT WORD SINT WORD_TO_INT WORD INT WORD_TO_DINT WORD DINT WORD_TO_LINT WORD LINT WORD_TO_USINT WORD USINT WORD_TO_UINT WORD UINT WORD_TO_UDINT WORD UDINT WORD_TO_ULINT WORD ULINT WORD_TO_BOOL WORD BOOL WORD_TO_BYTE WORD BYTE WORD_TO_DWORD WORD DWORD WORD_TO_LWORD WORD LWORD WORD_TO_DATE WORD DATE WORD_TO_STRING WORD STRING DWORD_TO...

Страница 1215: ...TRING _TO_BYTE STRING BYTE STRING _TO_WORD STRING WORD STRING _TO_DWORD STRING DWORD STRING _TO_LWORD STRING LWORD STRING _TO_REAL STRING REAL STRING _TO_LREAL STRING LREAL STRING _TO_DT STRING DT STRING _TO_DATE STRING DATE STRING _TO_TOD STRING TOD STRING _TO_TIME STRING TIME TIME_TO_ TIME_TO_UDINT TIME UDINT TIME_TO_DWORD TIME DWORD TIME_TO_STRING TIME STRING DATE_TO_ DATE_TO_UINT DATE UINT DAT...

Страница 1216: ...Arc sine operation 10 ACOS Arc Cosine operation 11 ATAN Arc Tangent operation Angle function 12 RAD_REAL Convert degree into radian 13 RAD_LREAL 14 DEG_REAL Convert radian into degree 15 DEG_LREAL 2 Basic Arithmetic Function No Function name Description Remarks Operation function of which input number n can be extended up to 8 1 ADD Addition OUT IN1 IN2 INn 2 MUL Multiplication OUT IN1 IN2 INn Ope...

Страница 1217: ...n Remarks 1 SHL Shift input to the left of N bit the right is filled with 0 2 SHR Shift input to the right of N bit the left is filled with 0 3 SHIFT_C_ Shift input to the designated direction as much as N bit carry 4 ROL Rotate input to the left of N bit 5 ROR Rotate input to the right of N bit 6 ROTATE_C_ Rotate input to the direction as much as N bit carry No Function name Description n can be ...

Страница 1218: ...Take a right side of a string size of L and output it 4 MID Take a middle side of a string size of L from the P th character 5 CONCAT Concatenate the input character string in order 6 INSERT Insert the second string after the P th character of the first string 7 DELETE Delete a string size of L from the P th character 8 REPLACE Replace a size of L from the P th character of the first string by the...

Страница 1219: ...her two inputs are equal after masking 2 DIS_ Data distribution 3 UNI_ Unite data 4 BIT_BYTE Combine 8 bits into one BYTE 5 BYTE_BIT Divide one BYTE into 8 bits 6 BYTE_WORD Combine two bytes into one WORD 7 WORD_BYTE Divide one WORD into two bytes 8 WORD_DWORD Combine two WORD data into DWORD 9 DWORD_WORD Divide DWORD into 2 WORD data 10 DWORD_LWORD Combine two DWORD data into LWORD 11 LWORD_DWORD...

Страница 1220: ...tput a number of On bit 4 SEG_WORD Convert BCD HEX into 7 segment code 5 BMOV_B W D L Move part of a bit string 6 INC_B W D L Increase IN data 7 DEC_B W D L Decrease IN data Appendix 3 3 Array Operation Function No Function name Description Remarks 1 ARY_MOVE Copy array typed data OUT IN 2 ARY_CMP_ Array comparison 3 ARY_SCH_ Array search 4 ARY_FLL_ Filling an array with data 5 ARY_AVE_ Find an av...

Страница 1221: ...Function block name Description Remarks 1 CTU_ Up Counter INT DINT LINT UINT UDINT ULINT 2 CTD_ Down Counter INT DINT LINT UINT UDINT ULINT 3 CTUD_ Up Down Counter INT DINT LINT UINT UDINT ULINT 4 CTR Ring Counter Appendix 3 4 4 Timer No Function block name Description Remarks 1 TP Pulse Timer 2 TON On Delay Timer 3 TOF Off Delay Timer 4 TMR Integrating Timer 5 TP_RST TP with reset 6 TRTG Retrigge...

Страница 1222: ...ting On Off 3 RTC_SET Write time data Appendix 3 4 7 Special Function Block No Function block name Description Remarks 1 GET Read special module data 2 PUT Write special module data 3 ARY_GET Read special module data array 4 ARY_PUT Write special module data array No Function block name Description Remarks 1 EBREAD Read R area data from flash area 2 EBWRITE Write R area data to flash area ...

Страница 1223: ...rride 15 APM_INC Inching run 16 APM_SNS Run step no change 17 APM_MOF M code cancel 18 APM_PRS Present position preset 19 APM_SIP Input signal parameter setting 20 APM_EMG Emergency stop 21 APM_RST Error reset output prohibition cancel 22 APM_WRT Saving parameter run data No Function block name Description Remarks 1 XPM_ORG Return to original point run 2 XPM_FLT Floating original point setting 3 X...

Страница 1224: ... Extended parameter teaching 28 XPM_SHP Homing parameter teaching 29 XPM_SMP Manual operation parameter teaching 30 XPM_SIP Input signal parameter setting 31 XPM_SCP Common Parameter Setting 32 XPM_SMD peration Data Teaching 33 XPM_VRD Read Variable Data 34 XPM_VWR Write Variable Data 35 XPM_EMG Emergency stop 36 XPM_RST Error reset output prohibition cancel 37 XPM_HRST Error History Reset 38 XPM_...

Страница 1225: ...ription Remarks 1 FOR Repeat a block of FOR NEXT n times 2 NEXT 3 BREAK Escape a block of FOR NEXT 4 CALL Call a SBRT routine 5 SBRT Assign a routine to be called by the CALL function 6 RET RETURN 7 JMP Jump to a place of LABLE 8 INIT_DONE Terminate an initial task 9 END Terminate a program ...

Страница 1226: ... for MK language devices and there are I Q M L N K etc for IEC language devices You can set up the parameters by inputting the proper device name for the language supported by the product XBC Series MK type device 1 The below table indicates the device data area of XBC series Device Start Bit End Bit Remarks P P0000 P00000 P2047 P2047F Read Write Enable M M0000 M00000 M2047 M2047F Read Write Enabl...

Страница 1227: ...able MD0 MD8191 Read Write Enable ML0 ML4095 Read Write Enable L LX0 LX65535 Read Write Enable LB0 LB8191 Read Write Enable LW0 LW4095 Read Write Enable LD0 LD2047 Read Write Enable LL0 LL1023 Read Write Enable N NX0 NX163839 Read Enable NB0 NB20479 Read Enable NW0 NW10239 Read Enable ND0 ND5119 Read Enable NL0 NL2559 Read Enable K KX0 KX131071 Read Write Enable KB0 KB16383 Read Write Enable KW0 K...

Страница 1228: ...67 Read Enable AD0 AD16383 Read Enable AL0 AL8191 Read Enable W WX0 WX524287 Read Write Enable WB0 WB65535 Read Write Enable WW0 WW32767 Read Write Enable WD0 WD16383 Read Write Enable WL0 WL8191 Read Write Enable F FX0 FX32767 Read Enable FB0 FB4095 Read Enable FW0 FW2047 Read Enable FD0 FD1023 Read Enable FL0 FL511 Read Enable ...

Страница 1229: ...0000 hFFFF 16 0000 16 FFFF 6 UDINT 32 Unsigned decimal number 0 4294967295 Hexadecimal number h00000000 hFFFFFFFF 16 00000000 16 FFFFFFFF 7 ULINT 64 Unsigned decimal number 0 18446744073709551615 Hexadecimal number h0000000000000000 hFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 16 0000000000000000 16 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 8 REAL 32 Signed decimal number 3 402823466e 038 1 175494351e 038 or 0 or 1 175494351e 038 3 402823466e 038 0...

Страница 1230: ... The below table indicates the display format of the device No Display format Available type 0 Signed decimal number SINT INT DINT LINT REAL LREAL WORD DWORD LWORD 1 Unsigned decimal number USINT UINT UDINT ULINT BOOL WORD DWORD LWORD 2 hexadecimal number BYTE WORD DWORD LWORD USINT UINT UDINT ULINT 3 TEXT STRING 4 None device monitoring parameter exercise 5 To read or write the device you need to...

Страница 1231: ...s 15 BIT 1 Signed decimal number 0 1 IB0 0 4 BYTE access 4 USINT 2 hexadecimal number 16 00 16 FF MW90 WORD access 1 INT 0 Signed decimal number 32768 32767 UL0 10 7 LWORD access 9 LREAL 0 Signed decimal number 1 7976931348623157e 308 2 2250738585072014e 308 or 0 or 2 2250738585072014e 308 1 7976931348623157e 308 0 0 0000000000000000e 000 ...

Страница 1232: ...e will be saved On Off exercise Outputting the relevant image depending on the device data value 0 or 1 Progress bar exercise The progress bar image may be different depending on the device data value Exercise related to displaying string based on the device value Displaying the string based on the device data value Web page link exercise If you click the button the screen will be moved to the set...

Страница 1233: ...getElementById login_view style display block user_view style display none function login var id document getElementById pAccout var pw document getElementById pPasswd if checkParameter id value alert Input the account else if checkParameter pw value alert Input the password else var sData pAccount id value pPassword MD5 pw value toUpperCase ajax type POST url KR login cgi data sData dataType json...

Страница 1234: ...T url KR logout cgi dataType text error function alert Access to the server has failed Try it again success function data deleteCookie var code data substr 0 3 if checkParameter code if code 100 document getElementById login_view style display block document getElementById user_view style display none document getElementById user_view innerHTML uAuth 0 else if code 101 alert Access to the server h...

Страница 1235: ...the user page App4 10 th account th td input id pAccout type text td tr tr th password th td input id pPasswd type password td tr tr th th td input style float right type button value login onclick login td tr table body html ...

Страница 1236: ...d click the Select File button 4 If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 5 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 6 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html 7 xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP 8 If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 1 1 login sample page will be loaded 9 How to us...

Страница 1237: ...gin state page 1 If you click the button Fig 4 2 1 1 login sample page will be created again 2 Notice 1 For more details on how to transfer the user page refer to User Page Setting Functions of the web server manual 2 For more details on login account management refer to UserAccount of the web server manual ...

Страница 1238: ...js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src js jquery cookie js script script type text javascript function getLanguage var lng cookie LANGUAGE if lng null setFrame lng else var type navigator appName var lang null if type Netscape lang navigator language else lang navigator browserLanguage if lang indexOf ko 1 setFrame ko else setFrame en function setFrame lng var langTag document getElementById LAN...

Страница 1239: ...uage ko style text decoration underline cursor pointer target _parent Korean a a id ENG onclick javascript setLanguage en style text decoration none cursor pointer target _parent English a font div div style position relative top 20px id LANG div body html How to use conversion into English 2 Click the English button in Fig 4 2 2 1 language conversion sample page 1 If you click the button Fig 4 2 ...

Страница 1240: ... HTML 4 01 Transitional EN http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd html head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset UTF 8 script src js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src KR js common js script script src KR js deviceTypeList js script script src js biginteger js script EUC KR code table script src js KSC5601 js script script type text javascript Input Area var pDevice M0000 var pTyp...

Страница 1241: ...pe pType 1 name document getElementById pSystem innerHTML valueType pSystem 1 name sendForm pCommand value pCommand sendForm pType value pType sendForm pValue value checkType pSystem data pValue pType function setDevice form if checkTypeSys pType pSystem alert Check the type and display format return false else if checkValueLength parseInt pType pSystem form pValue value form pValue focus return e...

Страница 1242: ...alue alert READ the device else if checkParameter form pValue value alert Check the value form pValue focus else if checkValueLength form pType value pSystem form pValue value else script head body onload getDevice form id readForm name readForm table tr th device th td id device_name td tr tr th type th td id pType td tr tr th display format th td id pSystem td tr table form form id sendForm name...

Страница 1243: ...ake the user page App4 18 td input name pCommand type hidden input name pType type hidden input name pValue type text input type button value Write onclick javascript setDevice document sendForm td tr table form body html ...

Страница 1244: ...ile transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 8 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html 9 xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP 10 If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 2 1 sample page of reading writing device values will be loaded 11 How to use Reading device values 3 Click the Web page update F5 button 1 The device values set in the sample page will be read in Fig ...

Страница 1245: ...er the user page refer to User Page Setting Functions of the web server manual 2 For more details on login account management refer to UserAccount Setting of the web server manual 3 For setting the parameters of the sample code refer to Device Monitoring Parameters of the previous Chapter ...

Страница 1246: ...as shown below DOCTYPE html html head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset utf 8 script src js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src KR js deviceTypeList js script script type text javascript Input Area XBC TYPE var pDevice M00000 var pType 15 var pSystem 1 XEC TYPE var pDevice MX0 var pType 15 var pSystem 1 pType pSystem window load function getDeviceState function getDeviceStat...

Страница 1247: ...data pValue 1 state_image html operating mode RUN else if data pValue 0 state_image html operating mode STOP else state_image html operating mode unknown value function setDeviceState val if checkTypeSys pType pSystem alert Check the type and display format return false ajax type POST url KR set_plc_run cgi data mode val dataType text error function alert Access to the server has failed Try it aga...

Страница 1248: ...lick the 5 Save button After saving the file log in to the web server with the administrator privilege 6 Move to Setting User page and click the Select File button 7 If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 8 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 9 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html 10 xxx xxx xxx...

Страница 1249: ...tml head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset utf 8 script type text javascript var rTime 10 var rplc null function setAutoReplace time rTime time if rplc null clearInterval rplc if rTime 0 rplc setInterval refresh rTime 1000 function refresh document getElementById selection style display none setTimeout refresh2 50 function refresh2 document getElementById selection style displ...

Страница 1250: ...r page and click the Select File button 4 If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 5 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 6 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html 7 xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP 8 If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 5 1 Sample page of update of the web pa...

Страница 1251: ...code for automatic update of the web page is as shown below DOCTYPE html html head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset UTF 8 script type text javascript Input Area var rTime 3 3 seconds var rplc null function setAutoReplace time rTime time if rplc null clearInterval rplc rplc setInterval load time 1000 function load alert rTime Updated in seconds script head body onload setAutoR...

Страница 1252: ...tton 5 After saving the file log in to the web server with the administrator privilege 6 Move to Setting User page and click the Select File button 7 If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 8 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 9 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html 10 xxx xxx xxx xxx means the w...

Страница 1253: ...e none padding 0px menu_list li cursor pointer style script src js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script type text javascript function setView idx var tag div menu idx 1 No div view html tag script head body div style position absolute top 0 left 0 width 190px background color blue color white padding 10px bottom 0px ul id menu_list style li onclick setView 0 menu1 li li onclick setView 1 menu2 li li ...

Страница 1254: ... User page and click the Select File button d If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web e server After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page f http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html g xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP h If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 6 1 sample page of the list will be...

Страница 1255: ...uffer Sample code 1 The sample code for ring buffer is as shown below DOCTYPE html html head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset utf 8 link href KR css Table css rel stylesheet type text css script src js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src KR js common js script script src KR js deviceTypeList js script script src js biginteger js script script type text javascript Input Area...

Страница 1256: ...f checkTypeSys pType pSystem alert Check the type and display format return false var dev_list document getElementById dev_list if dev_list style display none ajax type GET url KR read_device_data cgi pCommand pCommand pType pType dataType json global false error function alert Access to the server has failed Try it again success function data buff unshift data var list temp_table_list list html v...

Страница 1257: ...x right 10px option value 10 10 seconds option option value 20 20 seconds option option value 30 30 seconds option option value 60 1 minute option select div class list_table style position absolute top 40px left 10px right 10px div class table_header table cellspacing 0 colgroup col width 20 col width 30 col width 30 col width 20 colgroup thead tr th scope col No th th scope col date th th scope ...

Страница 1258: ...Move to Setting User page and click the Select File button 6 If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 7 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 8 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html 9 xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP 10 If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 7 1 sample page of ...

Страница 1259: ...in js script script src KR js common js script script src KR js deviceTypeList js script script src KR js biginteger js script script type text javascript Input Area var pDevice M00000 var pType 15 var pSystem 1 var pCommand pDevice 0 0 pType pSystem window load function getDeviceState function getDeviceState checkTypeSys pType pSystem Check the suitable display format for the type if checkTypeSys...

Страница 1260: ... to the note pad 1 Input the parameters to the Input Area of the sample code 2 After inputting parameters click the File Save as button in the note pad menu 3 After setting filename home html file format all files encoding UTF 8 in Fig 4 2 1 2 Save as window 4 click the Save button After saving the file log in to the web server with the administrator privilege 5 Move to Setting User page and click...

Страница 1261: ... InputArea of the sample code from 0 into 1 in the state that Fig 4 2 8 1 On Off 1 sample page is loaded Update the web page with F5 button 2 When the web page is updated the image will be changed from Red into Green as shown in Fig 4 2 8 2 On Off 3 sample page Fig 4 2 8 2 On Off sample page On ...

Страница 1262: ...rc js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src KR js common js script script src KR js deviceTypeList js script script src js biginteger js script script type text javascript Input Area XBC TYPE var pDevice M00000 var pType 0 var pSystem 0 XEC TYPE var pDevice MB0 var pType 0 var pSystem 0 pType pSystem window load function getDeviceState function getDeviceState checkTypeSys pType pSystem Check the s...

Страница 1263: ... pSystem val Convert the value into the minimum or maximum percentage based on the type and display format clock data text is not available var val checkType pSystem data pValue pType var temp checkValuePercentage pType pSystem val state_text html val dev_progress_bar width temp script head body table tr td div style width 224px height 18px span style float left value span span style float right i...

Страница 1264: ...e html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 7 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 8 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 9 1 sample page of progress bar will be loaded 9 How to use 3 Load Fig 4 2 9 1 sample page of progress bar 1 Cha...

Страница 1265: ...html head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset utf 8 script src js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src js biginteger js script script src KR js common js script script src KR js deviceTypeList js script script type text javascript Input Area XBC TYPE var pDevice M00000 var pType 0 var pSystem 0 XEC TYPE var pDevice MB0 var pType 0 var pSystem 0 pType pSystem window load functio...

Страница 1266: ...tput the value that is suitable for the type and display format var temp checkType pSystem data pValue pType var tMsg temp Value according to the type and display format if temp 128 temp 11 tMsg warning The temperature value is too low else if temp 10 temp 40 tMsg normal The temperature value is normal else if temp 41 tMsg warning The temperature value is too high else tMsg temperature temp temp_s...

Страница 1267: ...and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 7 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 8 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 2 10 1 sample page of displaying string depending on device 9 values will be loaded How to use 3 Load Fig 4 2 10 1 sample page...

Страница 1268: ...as shown below DOCTYPE html html head meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset utf 8 head body div a href http www lsis com Move link 1 a div br div onclick javascript document location http www lsis com style cursor pointer link 이동2 div br div a target _blank href http www lsis com Move link to new window 1 a div br div onclick javascript window open http www lsis com newWin style c...

Страница 1269: ... log in to the web server with the administrator privilege 5 Move to Setting User page and click the Select File button 6 If you select the saved home html file and click the Open button the file will be transferred to the web server 7 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page 8 http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP If you load the ...

Страница 1270: ... page made by using the above mentioned sample codes The temperature control system enables you to change the operation mode of the PLC into Run or Stop and it supports Read Write Device Values etc The web server user can easily make the user page by using the next exercise that will be given lastly Fig 4 3 1 Temperature control system page Fig 4 3 2 Temperature value log page ...

Страница 1271: ...top_right float right width auto height 100 padding 0 10px li margin bottom 10px width auto cursor pointer main_state tr width 100 height 50px main_state th width 40 main_state td width 60 style link href KR css Table css rel stylesheet type text css In case of using deviceTypeList js use the whole script src js jquery 1 8 1 min js script script src js biginteger js script script src KR js common ...

Страница 1272: ...ow load function loadLogin rlogin setInterval checkCookie 1000 Refresh time setting Refresh in rtime function setAutoReplace time rTime time if rplc null clearInterval rplc if rTime 0 rplc setInterval replaceData rTime 1000 In case of Refresh call each data function replaceData getTempLog getDeviceState getTemp function getTempLog if checkTypeSys tempType tempSystem alert Check the type and displa...

Страница 1273: ...0 i buff length i tr tr tr td i 1 td tr td buff i pDate td tr td buff i pTime td tr td checkType tempSystem buff i pValue pType td tr tr list html tr function getDeviceState if checkTypeSys sysType sysSytem alert Check the type and display format systemstate return false var pCommand sysDevice 0 sysHex var pType sysType ajax type GET url KR read_device_data cgi pCommand pCommand pType pType dataTy...

Страница 1274: ...solute top 17px width 20px height 20px left 0px if uAuth 0 addImg div style width 50px height 20px float left padding 4px 0px 0px 30px RUN div input style float left type button value stop onclick setDeviceState 0 state_image html addImg else if val 0 addImg img src images red png style position absolute top 17px width 20px height 20px left 0px if uAuth 0 addImg div style width 50px height 20px fl...

Страница 1275: ...alue is normal else if temp 41 tMsg warning The temperature value is too high else tMsg temperature temp document getElementById temp_state innerHTML tMsg tempPer checkValuePercentage tempType tempSystem temp document getElementById dev_progress_bar style width tempPer document getElementById dev_progress_bar_value innerHTML temp degree document getElementById conf_temp value temp function setTemp...

Страница 1276: ...e LSID null uAuth parseInt get_cookie AUTH var auth if uAuth 0 auth administrator else if uAuth 1 auth general else auth uAuth var user_view document getElementById user_view user_view firstChild firstChild innerHTML get_cookie LSID auth input type button value logout onclick logout document getElementById login_layer style display none setAutoReplace rTime replaceData else document getElementById...

Страница 1277: ...ss function data if data pCode 100 uAuth data pAuth var user_view document getElementById user_view pw value var auth if data pAuth 0 auth administrator else if data pAuth 1 auth general else auth data pAut user_view firstChild firstChild innerHTML data pAccount auth input type button value logout onclick logout document getElementById login_layer style display none setAutoReplace rTime replaceCoo...

Страница 1278: ...d width 100 height 100 background color white z index 10000 div id login_bg style margin 200px auto width 250px height auto table id login_view tr th account th td input id pAccout type text td tr tr th password th td input id pPasswd type password td tr tr th th td input style float right type button value login onclick login td tr table div div div class main_top style position relative top 0px ...

Страница 1279: ... seconds option option value 20 20 seconds option option value 30 30 seconds option option value 60 1 minute option select div div id dev_State style position absolute top 40px left 210px right 0px bottom 0px table class main_state style position absolute top 15px left 15px width 400px tr th system th td id state_image style position relative td tr tr th state th td id temp_state normal The temper...

Страница 1280: ... Setting Appendix 4 3 2 1 Paste the sample code to the note pad 2 Input the name type and display format of the device to read or write to the Temperature value log area of the sample code 3 Input the F00000 FX0 system flag parameter that enables you to check the PLC s operating state such as RUN or STOP to the system state area of the sample code 4 After inputting parameters click the File Save a...

Страница 1281: ...button the file will be transferred to the web server 9 After file transfer is done input the below URL to the web page http xxx xxx xxx xxx userpage home html xxx xxx xxx xxx means the web server s IP 10 If you load the web page by entering the URL Fig 4 3 1 temperature control system page will be loaded ...

Страница 1282: ...ng the RUN or STOP button If you input the targeted vale to the set temperature and press the Change button you can see the value will be changed You can also see the system s state and temperature display will be changed according to the set temperature 6 If you click 2 temperature value log at the top left corner of Fig 4 3 1 temperature control system page Fig 4 3 2 temperature value log page w...

Страница 1283: ...5 Owing to the reasons unexpected at the level of the contemporary science and technology when delivered 6 Not attributable to the company for instance natural disasters or fire 3 Since the above warranty is limited to PLC unit only make sure to use the product considering the safety for system configuration or applications Environmental Policy LSIS Co Ltd supports and observes the environmental p...

Страница 1284: ...93 0070 Fax 91 1244 930 066 E Mail hwyim lsis com HEAD OFFICE LS Tower 127 LS ro Dongan gu Anyang si Gyeonggi Do 431 848 Korea Tel 82 2 2034 4870 Fax 82 2 2034 4648 E mail cshwang lsis biz Southeast Asia 82 2 2034 4888 cshwang lsis com Charles Hwang Europe 82 2 2034 4676 sukyong lsis com Brian Choi Turkey Israel CIS 82 2 2034 4879 dkimc lsis com Daniel Kim Oceania 82 2 2034 4394 kacho lsis com Ken...

Результаты поиска

Содержание XBE-DC08A

Отзывы:

LSIS XBE-DC08A, Руководство пользователя, Страница: 168 / 1284

Результаты поиска

Содержание XBE-DC08A

Отзывы: